White Stone Publishing

70A Old Porirua Road, Ngaio, Wellington 6035, New Zealand

Phone 64 21 188 6118
whitestone3@gmail.com
www.shamballaschool.org

First published 2005

Second edition 2009

© Bruce Lyon, 2005–2009

Except as provided by the Copyright Act 1994, no part of this publication may be reproduced
by any process, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means with-
out the prior permission of the author. Requests and enquiries should be directed to White
Stone Publishing.

Lyon, Bruce Philip, 1957–

Group Initiation / Bruce Lyon
ISBN 978-0-476-01477-0

Editor: Barbara Maré

Cover design by Bruce Lyon with technical assistance from Roxy O’Neill
Printed by Astra Print, Wellington
Contents
Dedication........................................................................................i
Preface..............................................................................................ii
Part One..........................................................................................1
Lines of Communication.......................................................3
Ashramic Group Relationships...............................................4
Archetypes.............................................................................9
Inner Archetype...................................................................11
The Light of Freedom...........................................................12
Maintaining the Connection................................................14
The World Situation.............................................................16
The Energies of Will.............................................................23
Shamballa............................................................................26
The Reservoir of Will...........................................................32
Group Impression................................................................34
Group Causal Body..............................................................40
The Turrets...........................................................................44
Direction of Focus................................................................48
Field of Expectancy..............................................................55
Radiation and Magnetism....................................................57
Surrender.............................................................................64
Group Integration................................................................67
Communion........................................................................70
Transmutation and Transfiguration......................................73
Mantram..............................................................................77
Seventh Ray Integration Formula.........................................79
Healing................................................................................84
The Creative Principle..........................................................86
Tension................................................................................89
Choice.................................................................................91
Group Identification............................................................94
Life......................................................................................98
 Fusion................................................................................102
Light of Life.......................................................................106
Group Soul........................................................................110
The Word...........................................................................114
Destiny and Purpose..........................................................117
Synthesis............................................................................121

Part Two.......................................................................................125
Decision.............................................................................127
Group Integration..............................................................131
Chakras of the Group.........................................................133
Time and Spiritual Experience...........................................137
Dragon and Serpent Energies.............................................140
Group Initiation.................................................................145
Spiritual Intimacy..............................................................149
Identification with Hierarchy.............................................152
The Group Crystal.............................................................157
Will, Consciousness and Manifestation..............................161
The Seven and the Five.......................................................166
Money...............................................................................171
Energy Transmission..........................................................174
Source of Strength..............................................................177
Liberating Light.................................................................180
The Fixed Cross..................................................................184
Abstraction.........................................................................187
Synthesis Ashram...............................................................193
Integration.........................................................................195
Light Supernal....................................................................196
The Ajna Centre.................................................................201
Sacrifice..............................................................................206
Formation of Esoteric Structures........................................210
Externalisation...................................................................214
Constellation......................................................................217
All is Well...........................................................................219
Organisation......................................................................222
Laying the Seeds.................................................................225
Part Three.....................................................................................229
Aries full Moon—The Empowerment of the NGWS.........231
Taurus full Moon—The Duality of Will and Purpose.........234
Gemini full Moon—The Three Spiritual Festivals..............249
Cancer full Moon—Christ and the Eighth Initiation.........257
Leo full Moon—The Nirmanakayas and Atmic Abstraction...264
Virgo full Moon—The Sacredising of Matter.....................271
Libra full Moon—The Construction of Living Ideas..........275
Scorpio full Moon—That Which Can Effect A Change.....279
Sagittarius full Moon—The Three-fold Soul.......................282
Capricorn full Moon—The One Life.................................288
Aquarius full Moon—NGWS Invocation to the Life Principle..293
Pisces full Moon—Sacrifice................................................307

Endnotes......................................................................................315

Dedication

Dedicated to The NEW GROUP OF WORLD SERVERS

and ‘The Glory of the One’.

i
Preface
This writing was received telepathically as part of a
broader series of transmissions presumed to be from the
ashram of The Tibetan Master, Djwhal Khul, and released
under the pseudonym ‘Mercury’.
These messages are essentially instructions to the core
group of Shamballa School received during the years 2001
to 2005 as the group was attempting to ground a school
at Highden Manor in New Zealand and then learning
to create and hold a field for the cyclic transmission of
spiritual energies.
They are being released in their original form as
they contain information which may be valuable to other
groups engaged in the experiment of group initiation in the
Aquarian Age.

Bruce Lyon
Shamballa School

ii
iii
Part One

1
2
18 April 2001
Lines of Communication
There are many problems occupying the minds of those
who see and guide on the inside. The capacity of humanity to
handle the Will is only one of them. Another is the response
to the Love Aspect. If you could but know the incredible force
which is being generated by the return of the Christ as the
ashrams externalise. This energy is what the world waits for
but because it does not know this consciously, except in the
higher echelons of the race, then the response to the inflow
of love is largely unconscious and forms the ‘urge to merge’
in many horizontal ways, sexuality being the most obvious.
Group formation, company mergers, currency mergers and the
like are also part of this process. Hence you also see the need
for the putting before the conscious mind of the public an
intelligent presentation of what is actually happening so that
they are able to respond more consciously to the inflowing
energies. This you can do—you have the psychological
training, the feet on the ground, the demonstration at
Highden of a careful approach to the inner worlds. You must
find a way to communicate this in an intelligent fashion. This
will also require sacrifice my brother, as you risk the ridicule
and misunderstanding of those who are mentally polarised
but not yet heart centred. Highden will continue to grow in
reputation and magnetic power. It will attract attention. We
will see to that. What you do with that attention is crucial.
Those lines of communication must be used to put before the
public an intelligent presentation of the fact of the spiritual
Hierarchy of the planet, the new psychology, the emphasis on
group and the assistance that is available at these crucial times.

3
25 April 2001
Ashramic Group Relationships
Today the message I have is aimed at stabilising the
life of the group there through understanding a little of the
ashramic group relationships. You are attempting to bring
together different ray energies and synthesise them in a
Seventh Ray way through focus upon a particular place and
project. Highden will represent a reflection upon the physical
plane of the inner archetype and the archetypal energies will
flow through the etheric body of the centre. Accordingly
you must be able to patch in to that pattern—Rule VIII for
Disciples and Initiates is important here and allows for the
flow of seven energies through the different levels:
Let the group find within itself response to the greater
seven groups which carry out the hierarchical will with
love and understanding. The group contains all seven,
the perfect group. The lesser seven, the greater seven and
the planetary seven form one great whole, and these the
group must know. When this is realised and the Law of
the Supplementary Seven is understood, let the group
understand the Three and then the ONE. This they can
do with the united breath and the unified rhythm.1
Eventually each chakra needs to have its own triangle
meditating on one of the different Masters and therefore
bringing in a particular ray energy. You might strengthen
the work of your student triangle in this regard. Your own
triangle is like the head or synthesising centre of the project
and so needs to be in close relationship with the other
triangles. This is an esoteric project so do not waste too
much time on gathering those who may appear to have
the necessary skills in the outer world but do not have the
4
inner alignment. This is an important point to remember.
What is manifesting here is from the inside out. The
archetype of Hierarchy expressed through human willingness
to align with that archetype.
You could visualise each of the seven chakras of the
centre as having a triangle in the middle with a central flow of
energy. Read Rule VIII and also the description of chakras in
Telepathy and the Etheric Vehicle.

The Centres and the Ray Energies

There is one aspect of the Science of Impression upon which
I have not yet touched and that is the place of the centres
as focal points, as transmitters or as agencies for the seven
ray energies. It is known to esotericists that each of the
seven centres comes under the influence or is the recipient
of some ray energy, and there is a general acceptance of
the fact that the head centre is the agent of the first Ray of
Will or Power, the heart centre is the custodian of second
Ray energy of Love-Wisdom, whilst the third Ray of active
creative Intelligence passes through and energises the throat
centre. These Rays of Aspect do find expression through
the three centres above the diaphragm, and—on the larger
scale—through Shamballa, the Hierarchy and Humanity.
It is, however, equally true that Shamballa is primarily
second ray as it is expressed, because that is the ray of the
present solar system of which Shamballa is a part; and that
the first ray, or its dynamic life aspect, is focused in the
heart, for the heart is the centre of life. The great centre
which we call Humanity is predominantly governed by the
third Ray of Active Intelligence. This ray energy arrives at
the throat centre via the head and the heart centres. I am
pointing this out for two reasons which must form part of
your thinking as you study this science:
5
 1. All the centres come under the influence of all the rays,
and this must surely be obvious in relation to average and
undeveloped human beings. Were this not so, such human
beings would be unable to respond to first ray, second ray
and third ray energy, for the centres above the diaphragm
are, in their case, inactive.
2. In time and space and during the evolutionary process, it
is not possible to say which centre is expressing the energy
of any particular ray, for there is a constant movement and
activity. The centre at the base of the spine is frequently the
expression of first ray energies. This is apt to be confusing.
The human mind seeks to make everything precise, stable,
to bracket certain relations or to assign certain centres to
certain ray energies. This cannot be done.
At the end of the world cycle, when divine purpose is fulfilled
and the evolutionary process has brought about the changes
and adjustments needed for the full expression of the Will
of Sanat Kumara, then the situation will be different and
men will know (as the Members of the Hierarchy know)
which centres express the seven ray energies. It must be
remembered also that the Rays of Attribute shift and change
constantly; for instance, humanity as the planetary throat
centre is under the constant influence of the seventh ray,
as is the solar plexus centre of the planet. To that sub-
diaphragmatic centre I give no name. Though the human
throat centre is primarily expressing the third ray, there is
an interesting situation to be noted in this connection: two
ray energies control this centre at this time.
The throat centre of the average integrated personality
is governed by the third ray and is strongly energised
by third ray energies (again seven in number), whilst
the throat centre of the spiritual aspirant, of disciples
6
 and initiates below the third initiation is responding
primarily to seventh ray influence, and this is peculiarly
the case now as the seventh ray is in incarnation. The
rays which are manifesting at any particular time affect
powerfully all the other centres as well as the one
through which they are normally expressing. This is a
point oft forgotten.
It is needless for me to point out that—as man progresses
upon the Path of Return—he consistently comes under
the impression of the centre of which he is an integral
part: that is, first of all, the planetary throat centre,
the human family; then, as a soul, he comes under the
impression of the Hierarchy, the planetary heart centre,
and at that point he begins to express the combined
energies of the intelligence and of love; finally, on the
Path of Initiation, he comes under the impression of
Shamballa, the planetary head centre, and becomes a
participant in the divine Purpose and an Agent of the
divine Plan.2
Endeavour to see and relate to the inner ashramic
archetype and this will order the mind and then the brain
in the same way. The seven head centres reflect this. Also
examine the externalisation process of the ashrams because
you are doing this in miniature.
Another point of interest for your endeavour is that,
being a Seventh Ray centre it is essential that you balance
the energies with the First Ray. Endeavour to form a deeper
and closer relationship with the Egyptian School which
exists potently in the etheric but will not manifest in the
outer world for several centuries. Nevertheless there is a
strong link between the work of the Seventh and First Ray
Schools and the inner School can be a source of energy,

7
inspiration and above all Purpose that will allow your
project to stay anchored upon the outer plane. The eye of
Horus is a potent symbol of this Egyptian School. Place it
in the triangle when energy of this type is needed.

8
09 May 2001
Archetypes
There is much going on within Hierarchy itself,
not to mention the agitations in your own group field. I
would once again emphasise the need for the archetypes
to anchor. Archetypes, Archetypes, Archetypes. Energetic
realities seeking to impress themselves upon the material
plane, gathering and ordering forms into conformity with
the law. The forms will protest of course. Listen to the
protestations but keep your will firmly on the side of the
archetypes.
Try and integrate the archetypal model of energy
with the geometric model of function or distribution of
that energy. Have regular core group meetings where you
consciously work with Rule VIII for Disciples and Initiates
to bring through the archetypal energies.
Brother, let me lift you out of your own sea of troubles
and introduce you to ours! Much is going on, as I mentioned,
within Hierarchy. Preparation for the Decision is everywhere.
The Wesak has been used to precipitate the crisis that allows
decisions to be made. Something is happening behind the
scenes which will bring a clear choice to many. It has to do
with the financial system, which is all I can tell you for now.
Vulcan is impacting Venus. The archetype is impressing itself.
The Hammer is coming down and causing the re-evaluation
of values. What is more important? Everywhere that question
is being asked and the answer wrought out in individual and
group lives will result in the hierarchical arrangement of the
groups for the future. There are not right or wrong choices,
merely choices and consequences of those choices. Highden
must be a place where the archetypes hold. Where spiritual law
has a footing as it were.
9
 This year will prove a watershed in the history of the
planet from the inner side. Seeds are being planted. Seeds
of destruction as well as seeds of construction. Endings and
beginnings upon the outer plane will all be able to trace
their roots back to this time and the decisions being made
today.

10
16 May 2001
Inner Archetype
With regard to Highden, the centre is undergoing
major external energy impacts over the next few weeks. It
is essential that you remain calmly connected to the inner
archetype throughout this time and rely upon your personal
and group meditations to bring in the archetype rather than
the myriad reactions and opinions of others. Meditate my
brother, meditate powerfully and allow those energies to
pour through your own nature via the head centres. I have
brought your attention to them for a very practical reason.
This is a synthetic process and the Seventh Ray is a
synthetic ray. Our intent is to have a number of sub-centres
as part of your centre and there will be a direct ‘line’ of
energy to each from the appropriate Master and ray.

11
20 June 2001
The Light of Freedom
The School is about to open. We who watch and
work from the inner planes stand with you in your
endeavour. You have succeeded in one most significant
area—the anchoring of one small part of the energy of
Freedom. It is this energy and this alone upon which all
outer success in your endeavour will depend. This is the
experiment which Hierarchy is undertaking through your
group labours. To introduce the energy of Freedom and to
ascertain whether or not there are those who will willingly
sacrifice their own wills in alignment with the planetary
Will for the sake of humanity—in group formation. Guard
this energy most ferociously—yes, that is the word. If the
light of Freedom goes out at Highden, all else will surely
follow.
Keep your triangle strong over the next two days—giving
of your own essence in the support of all those who struggle to
hold their point. Have compassion brother for the uncertainties
and pressures that they are undergoing. You have me for
support. They have only you and your co-workers. Lend them
your strength and my strength through you. The Hierarchy
stands. You have behind you the wisdom, love and power of the
full flower of the human race. Reach for our help. Allow us to
reach through you into the field that is being created. Love my
brother as you have never loved before. That is the saving force
and the only thing which will cohere a group in this endeavour.
Realise that, whatever the outer personality issues, each person
here has made tremendous sacrifices and has answered, however
faintly, the call of Hierarchy to serve humanity at this time.
Pour forth your blessing on them as we do to you. Forget not
the source of your success. Decide to surrender even more
12
deeply under this most limiting and liberating of laws—your
life to the life of this centre, your love to all those who embark
with you on this voyage and your creative power in finding
solutions to the many vicissitudes which you may encounter.
We are with you and will remain to the end of your power to
hold onto that which we all strive to serve.

13
18 July 2001
Maintaining the Connection
When the connection to Us is lost, the life of our project
begins to die. This is clearly apparent. Naturally there will be
cycles as there are with the soul and the personality. The trick
is to be aware and truthful about what these cycles are—during
the ‘dark’ cycles where disconnection occurs, be aware of the
disconnection and actively trying to shift and work through
those issues that lie at the root of the inability to connect. In
this case you have been partly successful and the whole process
will eventually become much more efficient as you gain in
confidence and experience. Your work is to assert the principles
and Life for which we stand. When you are out of connection
with this Life you may still remember the connection and
continue to foster striving.
Now, your process of integration as a core group: It
will be necessary for you to meditate together and to share
a similar understanding of what it is that you are trying to
achieve—ie. what is group initiation? Then the study and
application of the rules with this goal in mind can be more
readily carried out. A united invocative appeal to Us will be
the result.
Your group penetration projects belong in the global
arena and not everyone in the core group will be or should
be involved with these. The core group needs its own
process. I recommend a meditation upon synthesis and a
look at Rule XI for Disciples and Initiates:
Let the group together move the fire within the Jewel
in the Lotus into the Triad and let them find the Word
which will carry out that task. Let them destroy by
their dynamic Will that which has been created at the

14
 midway point. When the point of tension is reached
by the brothers at the fourth great cycle of attainment,
then will this work be done.3

I am one with my group brothers, and all that I have

is theirs. May the love which is in my soul pour forth
to them. May the strength which is in me lift and aid
them. May the thoughts which my soul creates reach
and encourage them.4
You must all make a united effort to contact me,
regardless of your personal connection to different Masters
along ray lines.

15
19 September 2001
The World Situation
At this time the Second Ray soul of the planet is
trying to exert influence upon the Third Ray personality.
The result as far as humanity as a whole is concerned is
the opportunity to take the First Initiation. The energies of
Vulcan and Pluto are at work to bring the resistant aspects
of the personality to the surface and break the long-lasting
and prevalent focus on materialism that humanity on Earth
is such an exponent of. One result may be the freeing up of
the world’s money supply.
What is needed from the disciples and initiates on
the planet is a demonstration of the magnetic power of
the Second Ray soul. Shamballa will awaken men from
their slumber in materialism, one way or another. This is
part of the decision being made at this time. Hierarchy
have decided that humanity is ready. That humanity can
intelligently understand and respond to the clear distinction
between the spiritual values and the material ones. The
educational work of the Hierarchy has seen to this.
Everywhere the two positions are being articulated clearly.
Whether or not humanity WILL choose is entirely up to
them. And I mean that my brother.
Hierarchy have decided that it is time to offer the
opportunity. We have set ourselves to respond as fully as
possible to help if humanity invokes our aid, which we
certainly want them to do. And we are prepared to offset
the worst effects of a decision by humanity to ignore the
spiritual opportunity and reinforce the old pattern of security
and materialism. However, humanity is genuinely on its
own in the decision-making process. How else could it be?
Everywhere leaders are coming forth on both sides from
16
within humanity representing the best and worst of the
developed human mind and heart. Humanity must and can
choose its future. Hierarchy have made their decision and it is
a defining one. They have decided to trust humanity to make
the right choice for the future of the race and the planet.
Consider this.
Remember that there are much bigger plans afoot
on the planet and in the solar system than the self-centred
problems which face humanity. Hierarchy have decided to
place these larger plans at greater risk from the free will of
man than has previously been the case.
Do not think that the power of free will, humanity’s
power can be arbitrarily applied—it cannot be given and
then withdrawn if it is not used how we would like it. That
would strike at the very root of the power itself.
Essentially, Hierarchy have decided that humanity can
be trusted. Trusted to, in the final analysis, cooperate with
the greater good. This is a tremendous statement and a
tremendous decision. We are saying that humanity has been
educated about the issues. They are informed, generally
speaking, taking humanity as a whole. Democracy requires
an informed populace. Hierarchy and the Second Ray
ashram has worked hard over the last one hundred years
to disseminate the information humanity needs to base a
decision on. Now is the time to make that decision.
The genuine giving of a free choice is an act not only
of trust but also an act that precipitates crisis. Somewhere,
semi-consciously, humanity feels the weight of the increased
responsibility. It is this which is creating the crisis because
humanity knows that there is no turning away from this
decision, and that either way it will be terminal.
What I mean by that is this: If humanity choose to
reassert the power of the Third Ray planetary personality,

17
this will result in the end of a cycle and the pronouncement
of failure by the planetary soul to achieve its intended
results in this cycle. Of course other cycles will provide
other possibilities but this cycle would be over, possibly
resulting in the destruction of the incarnated human family
in large part. We will have a repeat, on a smaller turn
of the spiral, of the failure on the Moon Chain and we,
collectively, will demonstrate that we have yet to overcome
the karmic effects of the materialising tendency within
humanity and the planetary personality.
If humanity choose to assert the power of the
Second Ray soul, it will result in the almost immediate
externalisation of the Hierarchy (and by immediate, I
mean over the next quarter century). For this, Hierarchy
have been steadily preparing. Do you see that it cannot be
otherwise? One possibility cannot exist without the other. It
is what you would call a ‘make or break’ situation.
I might tell you that there are those within Hierarchy
who have counselled against this decision to allow humanity
to wield that most precious of all solar energies, Freedom.
This should not concern you unduly as there are often
different points of view about the Way to proceed held
within an underlying synthesis of intent. The disagreement
arises from the very same issues inherent in the Second Ray
soul of the planet. You were told that the situation on the
Moon Chain resulted in the premature compassion of our
Planetary Logos in accepting the lives from that Chain that
had not demonstrated their readiness for the responsibility
of future evolutionary opportunities. There are those in
Hierarchy who think that humanity, now, is not ready for
the responsibility of cooperating with Hierarchy and have
therefore counselled against what they would term ‘the
overly inclusive tendencies’ of the Second Ray soul.

18
 There are those more along First Ray lines who think
Hierarchy should either ‘take a greater hand’ in world affairs
or withdraw their ‘crisis-producing energy’ until such times
as humanity is demonstrating a greater readiness. In both
cases the result would be a limiting of the full operation of
the power of free will, while still leaving humanity free to
choose its destiny within a more circumscribed arena. This
would mean that humanity would still make a decision but
would be protected somewhat from the consequences of
that decision—resulting in a slower evolutionary process.
(Humanity would not be destroyed on the one hand, and
Hierarchy would not externalise so rapidly on the other.)
Having carefully considered the issue from all sides,
the decision was taken to rely upon the positive strengths of
the Second Ray and attempt to minimise the tendencies for
over-inclusiveness. What this means is that the Hierarchy,
in giving more freedom to humanity, has decided to limit
its own. Hierarchy will consequently do everything that
it can to aid, if that aid is invoked by humanity. On the
other hand it has been agreed to severely limit our active
influence where that invocation is not present. Further, if
humanity as a whole does not call forth Hierarchy, which
would result in the externalisation, Hierarchy have agreed
to accept the consequences of that decision. Have you any
idea what this would mean, my brother? Some hint can
be found by imagining what it is like for the soul of an
individual to look on, unable to help while their personality
pursues a self-destructive path. This is what would occur
upon a planetary scale.
In either case—the externalisation, or the
withdrawal—the Second Ray soul of the planet, Hierarchy
itself will learn dispassion. Does this strike you as strange
that the Hierarchy as a whole has something to learn,

19
as does humanity? The soul has much to learn from
incarnation, likewise the planetary Hierarchy has much to
learn about overseeing humanity. And in the case of this
particular Hierarchy, much karma hidden within the history
of the Planetary Logos.
The decision was taken by Hierarchy on the Wesak
full Moon. The Libran full Moon has to do with humanity’s
decision in response to that of Hierarchy. Libra is associated
with Shamballa, and humanity’s decision will allow the
Shamballic force to be brought into play in one of its
two aspects. Either Pluto will dominate and thus purge
humanity in a rather drastic way and therefore set the stage
for a later cycle. Or Vulcan will dominate, called forth to
anchor the Hierarchy on Earth in response to humanity’s
decision to call in collectively the assistance of the soul.
This brings me to what can be done by a centre
such as Highden at this time. You are in a country whose
soul is responsive to the energies of Gemini—the main
constellation through which the Second Ray pours. Your
work could be valuable in consciously directing some of
that soul energy, (linking with the souls of Australia, the
USA and Britain in particular) towards those groups and
locations which are invoking. Hierarchy needs to work
through groups to reach groups. If you see yourselves as a
supply rather than as a recipient of Hierarchical energy you
must constantly ask yourselves the question: Where is the
demand?
Do not consider this question as a national one; you
are working with planetary energies but directing them
through the national soul and thus ‘colouring’ them with
the magnetic energies of the Second Ray. In addition—and
this is the crux of the value you can offer—Gemini is
connected with the etheric body. So is Uranus. Your centre

20
is working with both these energies strongly. You will be
able to direct the energies of the Second Ray soul into the
ETHERIC BODY of the planet. Your meditative work
should therefore concentrate not so much upon the mental
or astral planes, but upon the etheric. To do this effectively
you will need to strengthen your connection to atma. Use
the spiritual Will upon yourselves as a group so that you
may be a source of Love for others. Specifically, you will
be directing buddhic force into the etheric. The result of
this will be a strengthening of the bodies of humanity—a
sense of the pervasive love of the soul working on the
physical plane. Thus, you may find your invocative demand
arising from those places where the bodies of humanity are
suffering and where, as a result the emotions and thinking
of people are being adversely affected. It is hard, my friend,
to focus upon matters of the soul when the physical form
is starving or in pain. You are able to esoterically aid in the
easing of that pain, thus freeing to focus from the lower
bodies into the higher and aiding the collective focus on the
upliftment of the human spirit.
I would ask you, as a group, to think through some
of the ramifications of what I have said and consider for
yourselves its merit and how you may best be able to
respond to the opportunity. Please remember the voluntary
limitations that Hierarchy is placing upon itself at this
time—that of not exerting influence or energy unless it
is invoked or called forth by humanity. Therefore, if you
would aid in distributing Hierarchical energy, focus upon
where the real demand is. We stand behind you, waiting.
These relationships between Hierarchy and humanity,
such as the one between us and your centre, are decisive
ones for this time. Your destiny lies with humanity,
regardless of the outcome. You will stand or fall with

21
them. My destiny lies with Hierarchy. I will externalise or
withdraw with them. Will our destinies converge or diverge?
That is up to humanity at this time. The disciples and
initiates must do their very best to keep the channel open
between Hierarchy and humanity. They must do their best
to respond to the needs of humanity and the principles of
Hierarchy. They share in the responsibility of humanity but
also in a peculiar sense the active restraint of Hierarchy.
This time marks the advent onto the world stage of a
new and potent power—the massed intent of humanity.
This brings the sign Cancer into prominence—that sign
connected with the Fifth Hierarchy and the Fourth
Initiation on higher levels. Will the world disciple emerge
from out of the mass consciousness or will we return to the
domination of the Matter Aspect? We will find out together
and will not need to wait for very long.

22
05 December 2001
The Energies of Will
The message I have for you today is more personal
and directed towards the core consciousness or the ‘group
soul’ of those at Highden. In electing to align yourself with
the energies of Shamballa you have brought in consequently
a greater alignment with the First Ray and with Master
Morya in particular. This was not necessarily inevitable, as
the School could have taken other directions, however it is
a development with great potential and also increased risk.
You have effectively created a new and heightened point of
spiritual tension which will need to be carefully handled.
Morya works with ‘energy’ more than ‘consciousness’
and our ashrams cooperate in the following particular ways.
One of my major educational intentions is to provide
intelligent information about Shamballa and the energies
of Will. This serves to provide a ‘channel of conscious
inflow’ and can produce the beginning of an intelligent and
invocative response to Shamballa by humanity. The inflow
of Will into my ashram as a result provides the subsidiary
and necessary energetic stimulation and vivification of
Second Ray workers. The outer ‘failure’ of the groups of
nine were due to the inabilities of those within these groups
to effectively balance the First and Second Rays. The energy
of Will was too new to be handled lovingly. At the core,
it was the reluctance of the groups as a whole to FREELY
CHOOSE to invoke and use the Will that resulted in
the failure. This would have required a greater degree of
sacrifice. It is an occult truth that education results in a
greater capacity to choose, with fewer eventual options, until
the razor edge path demands everything. The further along
the greater the consequences of a slight error in judgement
23
or motive. We cannot put the power of Will into the hands
of humanity without simultaneously providing them with a
greater capacity for its misuse either through ignorance or
materialistic intent. This history bears out.
Consequently your choice to consciously align with
the Will is regarded as a promising sign and one that carries
with it its attendant challenges. It may be useful to you to
remind you of the lessons that have already been learned in
this regard.
1. Purity of motive—this is a fundamental requirement and
one that continues to need refining as the path is walked.
This is not so much a problem in your group field but
could become one if the power of the group increases.
2. The refusal to impose the Will. This is not for my ashram to
do. The work is to hold the energy of Will in reserve for others
when they consciously call upon it.
This may well be your most important lesson as a
group and it is more subtle than you first may think. The
energy of Will increases the power of the group mind. As
the group builds in power, its collective thought will be
capable of producing tangible results in the outer world.
Restraint and monitoring of thought will thus be an
essential discipline. Do not pass lightly over this one—
already the capacity to err here is present. Impose the Will
upon yourselves as a group, not on others.
3. Learn to work subjectively. The First Ray is the ray of
energy and of the occultist.
The most potent work you can do for the worldwide
group at this time is to strengthen your subjective work
and focus. There is, throughout my ashram, and as a result
of the close cooperation of the Master Morya, an ‘urge to
synthesis’.
24
 As a group you could cooperate powerfully with this
trend through subjective empowerment. As you build a
reservoir of Will in the group soul, this can be made available
to others upon their request. The way to work would be
to identify and work consciously with those who are also
a part of my ashram throughout the world. But do this
subjectively—hold them in your meditations and use the
Second Ray to help in the group cohesion and recognition
of themselves as an entity. Withhold, at this time, the urge
to initiate outer contacts and projects that are intended to
create synthesis. Maintain the ones you have already created
and work subjectively building the reservoir of Will. As this
subjective work bears fruit then those who recognise and need
the Will energy will be drawn in to contact with your group,
subjectively and in some cases objectively. The First Ray is the
most magnetic of all the rays. Work occultly, subjectively and
in occult silence my brothers, and you will see the synthesis
appear. It is not for you to try to create it. This is the most
important message I can give you at this time.

25
12 December 2001
Shamballa
This morning I want to speak of Shamballa and my
teachings along this line. They are the most important aspect
of the work I achieved with the help of Alice Bailey. They are
designed to help bring humanity into conscious relationship
with the Will Aspect and with planetary Purpose. You may
wish to consider the meaning of them being released to
humanity at this time. It indicates two things:
1. The readiness that humanity has demonstrated to accept
responsibility.
2. The requirement of the Planetary Logos that humanity
carry out his purpose.
It is worth contemplating these two ‘readinesses’ as twin
aspects of the same Inner reality. They mark a point of time
in the history of the planet where the planetary personality is
entering discipleship and is thus responsive to the Will of the
planetary soul and hence to the Will of the Solar Logos. By the
‘planetary personality’ I am not here referring to humanity but
to the entity which is the centre of consciousness polarised upon
the cosmic astral plane.
Humanity, Hierarchy and Shamballa form a trinity on
the cosmic physical plane. Through this trinity, the energy of
higher planes is able to express through the cosmic physical. In
the human situation there are diverse forces at work within the
etheric and physical body that drive it into activity. There are
the forces inherent in matter itself, then, that when some degree
of integration occurs between the etheric and physical body, the
physical body becomes the instrument that expresses the forces
moving through the etheric body.

26
 This is the process being carried on in the whole
cosmic physical plane as humanity and Hierarchy come into
closer relationship.
Once the etheric and the physical body become
integrated and can function as a unit, then this unit is used
to serve the consciousness operating on the higher planes.
Initially this is the desire or astral body, and then the mental,
and eventually the triadic and monadic energies are able to
direct the activity on the physical plane. A process of energetic
substitution takes place so that eventually the four ethers in the
human etheric body are under the direct control of the four
cosmic ethers.
The same process occurs upon cosmic levels. Initially
the four cosmic ethers are the recipients of energy flowing
from the cosmic astral plane, then the mental and so on.
Eventually, as solar evolution progresses, the buddhic plane
will come under the direct control of the cosmic buddhic
plane, the atmic under the control of the comic atmic,
and so on. The four ‘universal ethers’ will control the four
cosmic ethers which will control the four ethers on our
physical plane of the cosmic physical. Eventually then,
man is destined to be an instrument of the Will of the
Cosmic Logos of which our Solar Logos is a component
part, of which our Planetary Logos is a component part,
and of which we are a component part. A holographic
cosmic ecology.
The entering into the etheric body of the cosmic
energies is controlled for good reason. Just as in the
human situation the thoughtforms of the average man are
not permitted to precipitate into manifestation because of
the chaos and ugliness which would subsequently result,
so on cosmic levels the thoughtforms and the desires of
a Planetary Logos do not manifest easily until there is a

27
degree of personality integration and alignment with soul.
This bears thinking about.
If the desires originating upon the cosmic astral plane
were allowed full expression upon the cosmic physical plane
before this integration had been achieved one can imagine
the results. We must begin to see the Being whose body of
manifestation this planet is, as a composite being, just as a
human being is a composite being. He is currently polarised
in his cosmic astral body, developing in this system the
quality of Love expressed through cosmic desire.
A human being is wont to use his physical nature
as an instrument for the carrying out of his lower desires
before (and periodically after) some degree of soul infusion
has taken place. A non-sacred planet is in the same
position. Behind the battle between the forces of Light and
the so-called Dark Brotherhood lie the events occurring
upon the cosmic astral plane. The materialistic forces are
simply those energies and entities upon the cosmic physical
plane that are under the control of forces originating on
the lower four subplanes of the cosmic astral plane, which
are in their turn controlled by entities on the lower four
subplanes of the cosmic mental plane.
The White Brotherhood on the other hand are
working with energies pouring in from the three higher
subplanes of the cosmic astral and cosmic mental planes.
They are ‘working for’ the planetary soul rather than the
planetary personality.
The planetary personality and soul come into greater
alignment as the planet enters more fully into the discipleship
required to take the Second cosmic Initiation—in particular
the mastery of the astral body. This will eventually result in the
intelligent cooperation between the so-called White and Dark
Brotherhoods as the ‘solarisation’ of the personality occurs.

28
This will result in the lower four subplanes of each plane being
the vehicles for the carrying out of the Will of those entities
upon the higher three. Paradoxical as it might seem, the
destiny of the Black Lodge is to effectively and efficiently carry
out the Will of the White Lodge, all under the synthetic Blue
Lodge on Sirius. But the time is not yet.
Where we are now in the planetary process is the
taking of the sub-initiation of ‘Air’ which leads to the
mastery of the fourth subplane of the cosmic astral plane.
When this occurs—and it is imminent—then the fourth
subplane of the astral will serve as a relaying point via the
fourth subplane of the cosmic mental plane, for the energies
of cosmic buddhi, the fourth universal ether, to reach our
buddhic plane, the fourth cosmic ether. This in turn will
have major effects in the awakening of the etheric bodies
in human beings. It is this process which also underlies the
revelation of the fourth quality of deity. We may look to
2025 and the incoming energies of the Fourth Ray to bring
this realisation more fully into the consciousness, if not the
active expression of human life.
Thus we may see some of the importance in the
cosmic timing of things. If humanity became overly
responsive to the energies pouring in from the higher
cosmic planes before the Planetary Logos—working on
those planes—had achieved mastery, then the consequences
would be dire indeed for the ‘prisoners of the planet’.
The war in Atlantis marked the midpoint of the battle for
mastery of the fourth cosmic astral subplane. The second
World War was a recapitulation of this within the Fifth
Race, and the planetary sub-initiation immediately before us
will mark the point where mastery is achieved in the Fifth
Subrace of the Fifth Rootrace of the Fourth Round. Two-
thirds of the subplane matter of the fourth subplane of the

29
cosmic astral plane will have been mastered by the Planetary
Logos. When he masters two-thirds of the fifth subplane
and thus two-thirds of the whole cosmic astral plane, he
will take the Second major cosmic Initiation, and he will do
so in the next Round.
The teachings on Shamballa are given out to prepare
humanity to play an active role in this great event.
At the Second Initiation a human being receives a brief
but important contact with the monad. It is this contact that
provides the energy for the defeat of the forces of the astral
body. Between the Second and Third Initiation a man must
demonstrate his non-responsiveness to astral energy, and he
must demonstrate this through the outward expression of his
life in the three worlds. His actions must come under mental
control.
At the Second cosmic planetary Initiation the
personality of the Planetary Logos comes under increased
attention from the planetary soul on the third subplane of
the cosmic mental plane. It is this energy that will allow the
Earth to take the Second cosmic Initiation and become a
sacred planet, in demonstration.
At this time there must be a nucleus of those amongst
humanity who are capable of responding directly to the
energy of Shamballa and thus indirectly to the energies of Will
pouring forth from the Will petals of the planetary egoic lotus
on the cosmic mental plane.
This nucleus must be strong enough to hold the
activity of the human race in alignment with planetary
Will and in resistance to planetary desire. This nucleus
will be an effective global government. Today we have
only the rudimentary beginnings of such a body. For it
to form within humanity, humanity must be educated
about the Will and about Shamballa. The Externalisation

30
of the Hierarchy that results from this education will
lead eventually to the establishment of a divinely based
governing body on the physical plane in direct response
to Shamballa, and through Shamballa to the Will of the
Planetary Logos. When the Planetary Logos is able to
achieve this result in this, the second system, then he will
have taken the necessary preliminary steps which will allow
him to use his body of manifestation in the next system to
anchor and express a part of the Plan of the Solar Logos.

31
23 January 2002
The Reservoir of Will
This is precisely how the ‘reservoir of Will’ works.
What is held in the reservoir is the future synthesis of any
group, seen from the beginning by the central consciousness
who ‘sees the whole as one’. The component parts of the
group do not yet appreciate their interrelatedness and so
the Will of the centralising energy cannot be imposed
but is held until such time as the recognition and will to
cooperate of the component parts develops.
In this way the central energy of Will is both the first
and last energy of any system. It is the alpha and omega of
any group. It begins as the unknown, unseen and unsuspected
cause of coherence in any group field. It ends in a completed
demonstration of purpose brought about as the result of the
recognition in consciousness of that united purpose by each of
the component parts.
A reservoir of Will is created whenever a deeper and
more coherent relationship, in alignment with Hierarchical
purpose, is recognised and committed to by a centralising
consciousness. This recognition and commitment is the
source of future synthesis.
What I am asking you to do is both create such a
reservoir and learn how to distribute its contents in time and
space. The keys to its creation are:
• Vertical alignment with a higher synthesising point—in
this case myself as the centre of the ashram.
• A growing vision of the completed purpose for which the
ashram has been formed.
• A recognition of those other individuals and groups who
are also in vertical alignment with me.

32
• A commitment to aiding the achievement of the coherent
purpose.
• The taking of spiritual responsibility for the completion of
some part of that purpose.
The keys to the distribution are:
• A recognition of the stage of completion of the ashramic
purpose in time and space.
• An appreciation of the stage of awareness and
responsibility reached by others with whom you
seek to cooperate.
• The achievement of a balanced and commeasured
application of your own capacities.
• Skilful communication which requires the careful
balancing of the heart and the head.
When these two interrelated energies of the ‘Will
to Good’ and ‘Goodwill’ are in balance they create a
momentum which is the very life of the spiritual work—the
inbreath and outbreath of the ashram.

33
06 February 2002
Group Impression
The writing today is about the phenomenon of
‘overshadowing’ or ‘overlighting’ if you prefer, and its
utilisation in the process of externalisation. Hierarchy is
seeking stable and willing instruments through which
it can prepare the field of human consciousness for the
Reappearance. The key elements are:
1. The stability and level of integration of the personality.
The three vehicles need to form a stable triangle of energies
with the soul in control. The soul is the eye of the triangle
and is holding it at a point of tension. It is this tension which
is released upon the buddhic plane to another soul, usually a
more advanced initiate from the same ashram, or on occasion
the Master of the ashram. It is buddhi, or the element of air
that is able to pervade the three worlds and express itself in
synchronistic and spontaneously appropriate thought, speech
and action. It is in buddhi that the ‘communion’ of souls
takes place and therefore it is ‘normal’ for there to be a free
interchange between souls. Overlighting occurs when the soul
of one person is ‘worked through’ in the same way that one
light may shine behind another, increasing the overall light
intensity. In this case, the overlighting soul supports and lends
strength to the incarnated working disciple. In other cases the
disciple may actually step aside and thereby pass over control
of his three-fold personality to another soul. This is a different
phenomenon and involves a high level of synthesis between the
identities concerned—this synthesis is effected by a recognised
unity of purpose and an identification with the ashramic Plan
that means there is a unified response to any external situation
with the consciousness that is most suited to handle it.

34
 Imagine that an ashram is one consciousness united by
a single purpose. In order to fulfil that purpose, the ashram
has the use of a certain number of incarnated personalities
as well as a certain number of individualised souls, initiated
to different degrees. As the purpose flows through the
whole field of the ashram it ‘orders’ or organises the ashram
upon lines that are maximally designed for the efficient
externalisation of that purpose.
The greater the fusion in consciousness, the more
efficient the use of the resources and the more flexible the
ashram becomes in response to conditions in the outer, and the
more skillful therefore in implementing the Will of the Master.
2. The isolation of the personality vehicles. While it is
crucially important for there to be a high degree of ‘fusion’
and communion between the higher minds and buddhic
natures of the ashramic members, it is equally important for
there to be separation and isolation amongst their personality
vehicles. I have been teaching you about the ‘sealing’ of
the vehicles and this is done for a particular reason. Most
incarnated souls have lines of connection semi-permanently
attached between their minds, and particularly their emotional
bodies. These lines allow for the free passage of energy
between individuals and set up ‘patterns of connection’
and group behaviours. When triadal energy is poured into
any individual, it automatically runs down these ‘lines’ and
creates all types of effects in the lives of others. This is one
of the reasons for so much suffering occurring in the lives
of disciples, particularly around the Second Initiation, as
they attempt to cut these ties and establish relationships at a
higher level. The heart is loving but does not form the same
‘attachments’ as the emotional body.
When soul energy is flowing along the lines of
connection between one person and another, it is recognised
35
within the system of the person on the receiving end as ‘soul
energy’ although not exactly ‘their soul energy’ if one can use
such a separative term. The closer the ashramic affiliation
between the two people, the closer the recognition of the
energy. The problem is that this energy is responded to as
coming into the person’s system horizontally from within the
three worlds. This sets up an often unconscious response to
this energy. The emotional body of the person receiving has a
heartfelt response and ‘moves towards the source of the energy’
(the other person’s emotional body) seeking to establish a
lasting connection. This function is inherent in the emotional
body and is an aspect of the emotional desire for the soul or
the Christ life. Instead of being directed vertically through
the life of the individual (necessarily having to transform the
mental nature as it breaks up from astrality to buddhi), it is
directed horizontally to what it perceives as the source of its
nourishment in the three worlds. This phenomenon underlies
much of the experience of ‘falling in love’, especially among
aspirants, and also much of what occurs between teachers and
their devotional disciples.
Thus in order for ashramic energy to be safely
released through the personality of an individual, it is
important that the personality is ‘isolated’, otherwise the
magnetic potency of the energy will only serve to increase
the glamour and illusion in the persona and the group of
people with which he or she is affiliated. This isolation or
‘insulation’ allows for the energy to be transmitted between
the higher minds of individuals without activating so much
the lower mind and astral nature.
3. The alignment of the soul with the core purpose of
the ashram. This I have already touched on. The closer the
alignment between the soul consciousness of the individual
and the Master at the centre of the ashram, the more
36
easily his Will can flow through the soul like a lens into
the personality.
4. The opportunity presented by the personality life of the
disciple. Hierarchy are seeking to initiate certain changes in
the world and to condition the consciousness of humanity.
This requires opportunity. The more opportunity created in
the life of the individual, the more likely overlighting will
occur. This is a two-edged sword however, for the more that
an individual becomes known in the world and therefore of
greater influence in the affairs of men, the more likely that
his glamours and illusions will distort the inflowing energy.
Thus we seek those able to stand in isolation pure, and yet
connected with all the world.
Those whose souls thrill to the Will pouring through
the centre of the ashram and yet able to control the
effects of that energy on their personality. Those wise
enough to know those circumstances which warrant the
acceptance of inner aid, those where they should step
aside and allow the consciousness of a more experienced
worker to enter, and those which they are fully equipped
to handle themselves.
A more advanced phenomenon which will become
gradually more common as the energy of Aquarius increases,
is the overlighting of groups. This is being experimented
with now and it is envisaged that the group forming at
Highden can form part of this experimentation. Many of
the same criteria for individual overshadowing need to be
applied to the group process, with one major exception.
While it is important for the individual personality system
to be ‘insulated’ this will apply to the group as a whole but
NOT to individuals within the group. It is the group which
is ‘insulated’ from other groups and not the individuals
within it from each other.
37
 The group must be composed of individuals who are
able to insulate but can then consciously connect up with
each other not only with the higher mind but mentally,
emotionally and etherically as well. These groups will
eventually become personality entities as well as soul groups.
Many problems and difficulties will need to be worked
through in this process however.
Unconscious and co-dependent connections between
group members will undermine the process—they are part
of the group glamours and illusions and they need to be
dissipated and dispelled. All connections between individuals
that are personality based and therefore centre upon survival
issues, self esteem or the attainment of knowledge must
be broken. Can you conceive of the distinction between
connections that are personality based and soul based my
brother? The actual mechanism of the connection is the
same—mental astral and etheric currents connecting group
members—but the motivation for the connection and
the energies flowing through the connections are entirely
different. Think this through. This is why the unconscious
or semi-conscious personality ties must be broken and the
individual able to stand on his or her own feet in the light
of their own soul before true group work can commence.
That work proceeds from the top down rather than
the bottom up. Firstly, group members connect upon the
higher mental planes—this connection draws them into
relationship upon the outer planes. They then develop
lower mind connections as they work through ideological
differences—thus the manasic or Intelligence Aspect of
the soul begins to work through the group mind. Astral
connections come next as flows of buddhi or the Love
nature condition the emotional life of the group and create
a linking between heart chakras. Lastly the atmic or Will

38
nature of the soul begins to flow through the etheric body,
creating eventually a ‘body of fire’ for the group. This fire
body represents the Will upon the physical plane and is the
source of the capacity for group manifestation as well as the
redemption and purification of the form.
An initiated group will eventually be able to operate
as a spiritual organism united in ashramic consciousness,
moving in the inner and outer worlds, as a flock of birds
moves through the air, driven not by instinctual connection
that is pre-individualisation but by the spiritual Will of the
ashram which is post-individual and synthetic.
Groups can begin by consciously, forthrightly and
daringly exploring the connections that exist between
them—identifying those that are personality based and
gradually eliminating them—developing those which allow a
greater infusion of buddhi and ashramic consciousness. This
is a process of group purification and needs to be actively
and consciously undertaken by carefully selected individuals
over a period of time.

39
08 May 2002
Group Causal Body
We are beginning a new phase of work with you,
both as an individual and as a group field. Just as the time
comes when the focus of attention on the development of
the personality stops and then begins to occur as a by-
product of the use of the personality by the soul, so a
similar process occurs on higher levels. The soul builds the
causal body (develops it) over many lives and then there
comes a time when the development is complete and the
causal body is merely used as a transmitter of the energy
and Purpose of the monad. As a by-product, a result of the
flow through of energy, the causal body is thus brought to
the highpoint of its unfoldment, becomes radioactive and
is eventually destroyed in the process. This is the outcome
eventually of the ‘path of fire’.
Rather than spending time building more into the
causal field through study and contemplation, the emphasis
shifts to distribution. The ‘inbreath’ of the causal body does
not arise from the three worlds any longer—it descends
from the monad. The outbreath goes into the three worlds
and also throughout the abstract mental plane. As the
‘breath’ is brought down from the monad this allows the
‘identity’ to ascend. This is like the Seventh Ray equivalent
to an earlier Sixth Ray process when the soul attempts
to reach up or ‘breathe out’ to the monad. The link has
now been established and the flow is reversed. As monadic
energy pours into and eventually destroys the causal field,
the inner man is gradually released from the illusion of
a fixed identity. The Law of Fixation rules on the mental
plane and identity is ‘formalised’—firstly on the abstract
levels as the causal body from which the soul incarnates,
40
and secondly, in any one life as a personal ‘identity’ on
the lower mental, astral and etheric/physical planes. It
is monadic energy which will liberate the immortal soul
by destroying the illusions of lesser ‘identities’. This is an
important point—it is not the identity of the incarnated
soul-infused personality which is attempting to ‘ascend’
out of the mental plane. It is what is left over when those
identities have been destroyed. As an individual your work
will be to help others build this higher antahkarana—
firstly through the aspiring soul/personality and eventually
through the invoked descent of electric fire into the causal
field. Leave the work of instruction on building the lower
antahkarana between the soul and personality to others.
Attempt to spend more time ‘free’ from the causal field—
this can be done through the act of identification with the
ashram—attempt to ‘see’ your own causal body, those of
the group and those of the worldwide group with which I
am working as contents of one field. This is the view that a
Master has and can therefore support in your consciousness
if you are able to relax the ‘identity’ muscle. It is rather
like the ‘magic eye’ books—a certain relaxation of the focus
occurs and a three-dimensional image comes into view. A
certain relaxation of the identity occurs and then, firstly
the causal bodies of your group are perceived (this would
indicate a location of identity on the first subplane of the
mental plane) and then the ashram as a whole is ‘seen’
when the location of identity (or should I say when what
is left of the being once identity is taken away) is on the
buddhic plane. All discussion about whether or not there
is an ‘individual monad’ belongs to the mental plane.
On the buddhic plane there is only a shared realisation
of identity with the ashram and the perception of greater
‘identifications’ that will take place on higher levels. There

41
is a ‘science’ that relates to the building of the higher
antahkarana as well as the lower. Just as the soul becomes
actively involved once the personality has completed
the dedicated work of contact, so the monad becomes
actively involved once the soul/personality fusion has
reached a certain stage. Both the higher and lower strands
are completed from both directions. In fact it is only
consciousness which is being completed; the antahkarana
itself ever exists and is eventually recognised as the source of
Life itself when the consciousness is able to extend from the
monad to the base chakra of the personal self.
This higher science has everything to do with the
Shamballa mysteries. Shamballa energy is now impacting
humanity directly. This is equivalent to the monad
impacting the personality. In order to complete the triangle,
the personality must be able to respond directly, thus
closing the circuit. Man must be educated in his personal
waking consciousness about the relationship to the monad
but this must only occur when the soul and personality
have achieved a certain level of integration. The descent of
soul energy into the personal vehicles produces glamour and
illusion initially. The descent of monadic energy into the
soul produces crisis. The reverse is also true—it is the light
of the soul which is able to clear the glamours and illusions
of the personality. It is the life of the monad which is
able to resolve the crises of the incarnated soul. Before the
Second Initiation there is no contact of any real conscious
nature with the monad. The crisis of the astral nature at the
Second Degree is so great that the point of tension created
opens the channel to the monad for the first time. Crisis
invokes response. Once the disciple understands this process
they can eventually invoke monadic energy at will. Crisis
is now the result of the invocation and not the cause. The

42
soul is being in effect ‘evoked’ by the monad. The inflowing
‘Life’ has become much more attractive to the individual
and this attraction is strong enough to offset the negative
experiences that the lower nature endures as a result. This
process culminates in the Fourth Initiation.
In reference to your inner group work, I have asked
you to build consciously a ‘reservoir of Will’. You may
begin to see how this may be valuable to your wider group.
Just as, on the abstract mental plane, the jewel serves as the
transmitter of electric fire to the causal body, so we might
imagine the same process occurring in the emerging lotus
of the ‘schools’. The jewel is the last to be revealed because
all the petals enfold it. The causal body is built around the
jewel—it is both the source of its life and also, when the
time comes, the cause of its destruction. If you follow this
line of thinking you may understand more clearly the role
of Shamballa School as an energetic entity. The more you
are able to concentrate the energies of Will flowing through
the centres of the ashrams on the buddhic and monadic
planes, at the centre of your project, the faster the ‘petals’ of
the project will form. Once you have learned the technique
it is something you will be able to offer to other projects.
You will also be able to directly assist ‘on the level’ (ie. on
the same subplane of energy) those other initiatives around
the world which resonate with your work and are part of
the same ashramic initiative.

43
31 July 2002
The Turrets
The subject of this paper is the link between the
monad and the personality. It is this relationship which lies
at the core of the teachings in the new esoteric schools.
The soul is studied and developed within the context of it
being a linking mechanism whose purpose is to build this
bridge between the essential spiritual man and his reflection,
the personal self. The opening of the higher turret room
at Shamballa School is an outer symbol of this inner focus
on the monadic life and represents the beginning of a new
stage of work within the life of the School.
Just as the Fifth Creative Hierarchy is essential to the
building of the lower antahkarana and creates the causal body
out of its own substance, so the Third Creative Hierarchy is
responsible for the building of the Higher Way. These are the
Triads, the “flower of the earlier Eight” and the bestowers
of the principle of immortality upon the Fourth Creative
Hierarchy, the human soul.5
We might consider the work of the ashram on the
buddhic plane in the following way: The ashram receives
the Will Aspect from the Chohans through the Fifth Degree
initiate or Master at the centre of the ashram. This Will which
is really the creative outgoing aspect of the Purpose which is
held at Shamballa, is distributed throughout the ashram by the
Fourth Degree initiates and then focused into the three worlds
through the work of Third Degree initiates operating both in
and out of incarnation. Electric fire from Shamballa is thus
‘solarised’ by Hierarchy through the ashrams and then ‘focused’
into humanity through the work of its advanced members.
Thus a Third Degree initiate is considered an advanced member
of humanity (being a Master of the three worlds), but only an
44
entered novice in the life of Hierarchy. A Fifth Degree initiate
is considered such from the point of view of humanity and
Hierarchy (being a Master of the five worlds) but is only a
novice in Shamballa, and so on.
This same pattern is replicated in the causal body
itself between the jewel, the petals and the permanent
atoms. It is this pattern or archetype which is in the
process of forming in the life of the School. The upper
turret represents the jewel—it is an eight-faceted crystallised
expression of the triadal lives, and it is through the jewel
that the energy of Shamballa and of Sirius is able to
permeate the group field at certain cycles. At present the
full Moons of Leo and Aquarius are the times in the year
when group approach can be made. The Taurus and Scorpio
full Moons can be added over time.
It must be remembered that the ‘jewel’ transmits fire
and is destructive to the causal body and so this energy
should only be worked with when the urge to ‘sacrifice’ is
strong within the soul itself, as the following quote makes
clear:
The Jewel itself remains occultly static, and does not
circulate. It is a point of peace; it pulsates rhythmically
as does the heart of man, and from it ray forth eight
streams of living fire which extend to the tips of the
four love petals and the four sacrifice petals. This eight-
fold energy is atma-buddhi. It is this final raying forth
which produces the eventual disintegration of the body
of the Ego. The knowledge petals, not being the subject
of the attention of this central fire in due time cease to
be active; knowledge is superseded by divine wisdom
and the love petals have their forces equally absorbed.
Naught is eventually left but the desire to “sacrifice,”
and as the vibratory impulse is akin to the nature of
45
 the living Jewel, it is synthesised in the central living
unit and only the Jewel of fire remains.6
The Mantram of Fire, The Technique of the Presence
and the Higher Octave of Meditation One and Two are
all useful in preparation for working with this abstracting
and liberating energy. The ‘jewel’ is also ‘archetypal’ in
the spiritual sense of that word. Its facets each represent
one aspect of electrical energy and are hence intensely
‘impersonal’.
The higher turret should also be used for the work
of building ‘a reservoir of Will’ within the core of the
School. This reservoir can be used upon occult demand
from units of consciousness within the School itself and also
increasingly by other centres in the process of externalising
on to the outer plane.
In the language of initiation, the jewel is first
contacted at the time of the Second Initiation, can be
approached at certain cycles thereafter, becomes stable in
the consciousness at the time of the Third Initiation, and
results in the final shattering of the causal body at the
Fourth.
The central turret is primarily an egoic heart centre
within the life of the School, transmitting qualities of
triadal consciousness from soul to soul and into the
personality life of the centre. As such it is a twelve-fold
centre when fully functioning, and should be used for all
aspects of the subjective life of the School. The ‘petals’ of
this centre will be composed of disciples at different levels
of causal development, but united in their efforts to build
certain qualities into their ‘Temple of Solomon’ and to
live a life of service dedicated to the development of other
souls and the integration of personalities who are attending
the School.
46
 In initiation terminology the egoic lotus should be
utilised by a range of disciples, from those close to the
Second to those preparing for the Third Initiation. Their
work will be to receive soul impression from the ashram
and to pour the light, love and power of the soul into the
three worlds. The Great Invocation can be used here with
full potency in this regard.
The lower turret room is akin to the permanent
atoms. It is where the Third Aspect of the life of the School
is maintained and developed. All individuals can use this
turret as part of their outer life expression, but there will
likely be an organisational structure revolving around three
key individuals who take responsibility for different aspects
of the operation of the centre at Highden. These individuals
should be disciples competent in executive functioning and
the distribution of soul force in the three worlds.
The three levels of the turret, viewed from the First
Aspect are: Distributors of electric fire, solar fire and fire by
friction as focal points for the monad, soul and personality
of the centre.
When viewed from the Second Aspect they are the
three-fold solar heart: Distributors of atma, buddhi and
manas through the crown, heart and throat chakras of the
centre.
When viewed from the Third Aspect they are: Three
octagonal shaped rooms placed one on top of the other at
the centre of a stone mandala laid out in the rose gardens
at Highden.

47
28 August 2002
Direction of Focus
This has been a significant week. You have been
learning a little of the paradox of freedom and also
continuing your learning about Trust. The group process
has entered a new phase now and so has your work
with me. By committing and dedicating more of your
time to my work the result will be beneficial to all.
Your consciousness will be more free from your outer
responsibilities but it will also be less free as the focus
required for this inner work will be more demanding. One
of the things that you are getting used to is the change
in direction that the soul is required to sustain. When the
soul is working its purpose out through the mental plane
and expressing therefore the Will and Plan as the soul
perceives it, there is an experience of power by the soul-
infused personality. The searchlight of the soul is focused
outwards into the three worlds. The change you must get
used to is the refocusing of the soul towards the three
higher planes instead of the three lower. For a time there
is an experience of ‘powerlessness’ in this change of focus.
The capacity to affect and direct the outer work must be
given up in order to allow a flow through of monadic
energy into the three worlds.
Let me explain this more fully. There is the period of
personality control where the soul is working behind the
scenes to integrate the personality into a fit vehicle for soul
expression. The personality is aspirational and the soul is
downward focused. Then there is a period of gradual soul
infusion climaxing in a crisis of soul control and afterwards
the soul is able to express directly through the personality
completing the fusion process. It is the energy of the monad
48
which allows the soul to complete the fusion process. Once
this is complete the soul must reorientate towards the
monad. The ‘direction’ of the soul’s focus must turn one
hundred and eighty degrees. This is a difficult transition. Of
course there is always an inbreath and an outbreath. When
the prime focus of the soul is towards the three worlds then
the outbreath is the main focus. Now the prime focus is
towards the monad so the inbreath must be the prime focus.
One of the reasons for the difficulty of the transition
is the perceived lack of ‘power’ in the three worlds, and yet
paradoxically the result is an increase in effectiveness. A second
reason is that the soul is moving in the opposite direction
than those whom it is the responsibility of the soul to serve.
A similar difficulty is experienced by a personality struggling
to aspire to the soul when surrounded by personalities who
are focused on the fulfilment of personality desire. You must
remember that the correct focus of the soul whose goal is the
Third Degree is outward into the three worlds. This focus will
be much aided by the Seventh Ray, and the incoming of this
influence will allow many to take initiation through group
work much more rapidly than before.
At the Third Initiation however the focus of the soul
must shift and this can be experienced by the individual
soul as well as those souls around them, as a lessening
of commitment, of focus, and of spiritual power in the
world. The interest in the expansion of outer projects ceases
and yet in this cessation something peculiar occurs. As
the abstraction process occurs it creates a stronger vertical
alignment to the monad, and along this channel greater
spiritual energy can flow into those projects which have
already been initiated in the world. The outer result is
the expansion of the very projects that the soul was once
focused upon achieving due to the inflow of monadic power

49
as a by-product of the soul’s focus on the monad at the
same time as staying in connection with the personality.
Eventually nothing at all is trying to be achieved in the
outer world and yet the achievement reaches its full flower
at the time the Fourth Initiation is undergone.
There is a mystery here that also can be applied
to the Externalisation process. Humanity is apt to think
that the Hierarchy is externalising to take control of the
outer worlds in response to the needs of humanity, and
this is true from one perspective. There are also members
of Hierarchy whose job it is to maintain the link with
Shamballa. Together they are part of a project undertaken
by the Christ which has as its goal something far vaster
than the inauguration of an age of spiritual enlightenment
within the civilisation of Earth.
In the work of occult schools the pupil is the soul
and not the personality. The soul is being educated in group
formation and under Hierarchical inspiration to develop its
capacity in three directions:
• Outward into the realm of the personality, the mental,
emotional and physical/etheric planes. The result is
the full expression of the soul’s individual creative
project in the three worlds. God creates.
• Within the three worlds of the triad the soul consciously
develops its group relationships and ashramic
contacts. The result in the three worlds is
cooperative group effort as the ashrams externalise.
God loves.
• Inward to the three worlds of the monad as the soul
consciously develops its relationship to Shamballa.
The result in the three worlds is the expression of
the unknown, unheard, unseen Purpose of Sanat
Kumara. God Wills.
50
 For disciples and initiates all three directions are
developed according to the stage of evolution and ray
tendencies. On the path of probation and discipleship, the
pupil is really the personality struggling to come under soul
control. On the path of initiation, the soul is learning to
control its instrument and true occult education can begin.
Not education about the soul, but the education OF the
soul. At the First Initiation the soul takes control through
the throat centre and begins to create in the three worlds.
At the Second Initiation the soul takes control through the
heart centre and cooperative group effort becomes truly
possible. The soul is now developing conscious contact with
others causally and beginning to respond to its ashramic
note. The monad is contacted at the high point of the
crisis of the Second Degree. At the Third Initiation the soul
takes control through the head centre and brings the soul
expression through the personality life to fulfilment. The
soul is now working in all three directions and beginning
to focus more fully on the monadic life. At the Fourth the
monadic focus becomes paramount and all outward focus
ceases, although the soul is a powerful transmitting agent
within the triad. At the Fifth the education of the soul
ceases and the education of the monad begins.
In the preparatory schools soul education takes place,
and the result of the work of these schools will be the
empowerment of souls into full expression in the three
worlds. They will join the conscious creators, the educators,
the leaders of their generation and help inaugurate those
projects within the outer world which will form the seeds
of the coming civilisation.
In the advanced schools which will come later, the
work will be more removed from the outer plane. This
should not be interpreted as being ineffective in the outer

51
world however. On the contrary, the spiritual impact of
those working within these schools will be significant.
This is because their students have already initiated their
own projects in the three worlds in this life (and in some
rare cases, in earlier ones), and they will be consciously
energising and empowering those projects through their
meditative work. Of course they will be involved in many
other meditative activities as a part of their training,
but each will have a very specific project that they have
created and now continue to serve to inspire, through
direct telepathic contact with those who are currently in
charge of its functioning in the outer world. And of course
these initiates are inspired in turn by those more advanced
than they, who laid the seeds for their own self-initiated
endeavours just as I have laid out the seeds for the School
with which you are engaged, and in turn am inspired. Such
is the conscious Hierarchy of the Aquarian Age.
Think this all through. At the Third Degree an initiate
creates his outer ‘masterpiece’ which is the summation of his
soul’s experience over many lives in the three worlds, and
is self-initiated in alignment with ashramic intent. Looking
around the world many of these can be seen. They are the
humanitarian organisations, the religious movements, the
modern businesses, the soul-inspired literature and art. Each
soul-inspired project has at its core at least a centre of solar
fire and in some cases a ‘jewel’ of monadic fire. This fire is
‘fanned’ from the inner worlds, stimulating the ongoing life
and inspiration for the outer work via the minds and hearts
of those who are in outer ‘control’. When those in control
are conscious of their inner inspiration much more can be
achieved, and we will begin to see this success demonstrated
as more and more initiates move into positions of outer
authority.

52
 Of course those who create soul-inspired projects
in the outer world have karmic ties to them. They are
responsible for their birth, growth and eventually when
they have served their purpose, for their death. This
death occultly occurs triadally when the inspiring soul
life is withdrawn. The power of the planet’s Third Ray
personality tends to keep organisations going in the three
worlds long after any inner life has gone out. They are
best left, like the Moon, to allow the decaying process
to take its own time. As the Second Ray soul begins to
externalise more fully, it will be the work of Hierarchy to
restimulate those organisations that still have a purpose
to fulfil—for example the Master Jesus has the task of
revitalising and transforming the Christian Church. He will
do this through inner inspiration of outer initiates from
the Fourth Degree down, and eventually when the time is
right he will take outer control. This outer control should
not be understood as meaning however, that he will sit in
an office somewhere and dispense instructions. Of course
he is engaged in much larger work than the executive
functioning of an outer organisation on Earth. What it
does mean however is that he will be recognised as the
source and inspiration for the spiritual life which sustains
the outer church, and therefore will be internally consulted
and invoked on matters pertaining to that life.
The Masters are those who have a lineage of creation
on this planet. They can trace back their Hierarchical work
to the creative project completed at the Third Initiation.
Even this project will have its seeds in earlier incarnations,
and many of the strengths and weaknesses of their work in
Hierarchy have their roots far back in evolutionary time,
just as tendencies in the adult can be seen in the child.
There is a constant refinement process going on and do

53
not forget that the requirements for becoming a Master
are gradually increasing as evolution in this Fourth Round
proceeds. The Christ has said, ‘greater things than these
shall you do’. (See John 14:12) Hierarchy often looks with
amusement at the perceptions aspiring humanity has of
us. We ask for respect, yes, to be heard, yes, but to be
elevated to some godlike status above the reach of human
experience, never. This latter attitude is often an excuse
to live a life with the glamour of contact but without the
requirement to be worthy of it through achievement. We
offer, not so much a helping hand, but a hand up. We are
pleased when you take it by raising your own with a little
more effort.

54
04 September 2002
Field of Expectancy
Now I have some things to communicate about
the centre at Highden. It is essential that the core energy
is stabilised. You must prepare for an influx of others,
beginning gradually but accelerating to a level which will
surprise you all. This could be extremely destabilising
to the whole project unless the central group is able to
hold and sustain the energy field. This is an experiment
that is potentially on the brink of a significant success
and therefore there is considerable interest and assistance
available from those who watch in the inner worlds. There
is an opportunity here that is larger than you are able to
comprehend and so I would ask each of you to entertain
this hypothesis. That something is trying to occur that is
far beyond the sum of your individual capacities and level
of development. This would mean that you would have to
hold your minds open to far greater possibilities than would
seem logical to you, without losing sight of the day-to-day
practicalities. What I am advocating is to create a ‘field
of expectancy’, a field of ‘openness to receive’, a field of
acceptance of energies that are trying to assist.
The limitations to the help we can give are those
limitations of what you believe is possible and which you
hold as a group thoughtform on mental levels.
I am not advocating an attitude of undiscriminating
idealism; I am advocating a scientific process whereby
the group endeavours to offer itself up as a vehicle to be
used within a purpose beyond its current understanding
or conception. This requires a level of ‘trust’ and of
surrender which can be very challenging to the concrete
mind. I merely ask you to experiment with coming under
55
my impression as a group and being used more fully as a
stable unit within the ashram. This will not detract from
your work as a School but will expand that work more
consciously in scope and range. But first the group must
stabilise and deepen the level of ‘recognition’ of itself as a
group. Nothing need be ‘done’ to facilitate this except for
a willingness to come together and invoke your connection
with me. From that point it is a process of being willing to
release whatever is in the way of a deeper and more potent
realisation of the core energy that has brought you together
and sustains you. Experiment with letting my presence and
the presence of the Christ principle more fully into your
group life.

56
11 September 2002
Radiation and Magnetism
The theme this morning follows on from what you
were touching into this morning ‘as a group’—the theme of
radiation and magnetism. The direction that you are taking
as a group must continue as you realise that you have all been
brought together under the impression of your souls as they
are cooperating with the work of my ashram. My ashram links
through the Synthetic Ashram with that of the Christ which,
taken as a whole is the ashram of Sanat Kumara. While you
each have other affiliations, it is your connection with me that
is the synthesising factor. Thus it should be clear to you that
spending time together as a group trying to come consciously
under my impression will enable you to more fully contact and
discover the unifying factor at the core of the group life.
The relationship between the First and the Second
Aspects holds the key to the mystery of magnetism and
radiation. Part of my work is to reintroduce the rules for
working within the etheric system—this has a natural
application in the field of healing at the human level through
the Law of Correspondences. However my real work lies
within the etheric body of the planet and increasingly of the
solar system. The flow of energy through the chakras and
nadi points of the planetary life necessitates the working with
groups as ‘functional wholes’ within greater wholes. Thus as
I have tried to point out with my teachings, the work of the
Aquarian Age is fundamentally about groups realising their
synthetic identity within a larger whole.
This process of identification with the larger group can
be speeded up quite substantially if disciples will only follow
the principle of occult obedience. Surely the whole purpose of
coming under the influence of a Master is to take instruction
57
and thereby to negotiate the path more quickly. Spiritual
evolution will proceed one way or another as a direct result
of the planetary and solar Will. Accelerating that process is
part of the experiment in group initiation I have undertaken.
It involves the education of sections of humanity about the
purposes and plans of the greater lives of which they form a
part. This education is not designed for the mental satisfaction
of those who receive it, but so that their conscious cooperation
in planetary evolution may be evoked. This is the great Second
Ray educational experiment which I am undertaking. While
I am primarily a Second Ray Master I am also a part of the
Synthetic Ashram which includes the First and Seventh Rays.
It is the relationship between the Second and First which I
want to address.
Education resulting in conscious cooperation is the
Second Ray method. Within certain groups however I
am trying to apply a more First Ray approach with the
conscious cooperation of Master Morya. This approach
involves obedience to the Will. Simply put it is ‘doing what
you are told’ not out of devotional or fearful obedience, but
out of a great love for the whole and a deep respect for the
spiritual responsibility accepted by one who seeks to serve
the same Plan and Purpose as you do.
I do not ask for blind obedience but for groups to
willingly engage in an experiment—groups willing to ‘try and
see’ whether the maxim ‘an initiate knows because he works’
is a fact in reality. Education without application is a great
problem in the world, and one of the lesser reasons for the
early extraction of the Fifth Ray and for the implementation
of the new esoteric schools. It can be offset by groups willing
to apply the principle of ‘application without education’ or
simply doing what you are asked to do and trusting that the
understanding of the reasons will follow. The First Ray drives

58
forward in a straight line while the Second Ray works in spiral
motion. The application of the First Ray to the Second Ray
method produces a radical increase in speed and therefore
spiritual evolution. The result of the integration of these two
rays is demonstrated through the Seventh Ray as spontaneously
loving action in the three worlds, rhythmically undertaken. The
keynote of these energies interacting together is ‘grace’.
Let me describe for you how the group process can
be speeded up if you are willing to try an experiment.
Firstly I would ask for a change in consciousness in the
way that you view your identity. Once you pass through
the stages of ‘acceptance as a group’ that Rule II indicates,
there must be a change in identity—just as the ray of the
personality becomes a subray of the soul, and the ray of
the soul in turn becomes a subray of the monad, so your
personal identity becomes a subset of the group identity. It
is right here that the division between those who are ready
for this advanced experiment is made. To the personality
this injunction sounds like an attempt to limit personal
freedom and individual ‘sovereignty’, and to the extent
that one’s identity is still focused in the personality there
will naturally be resistance. The soul however is inherently
group conscious and it is this group consciousness that has
brought you together in the first place. The greater always
includes (and brings in to full active and aligned service)
the lesser. Try to identify yourselves as one consciousness.
This will do more to open your causal fields to each other
and increase the telepathic interplay in the group life.
Secondly, begin to think of your purpose as a group
as a subset of my purpose. There is really only one Purpose
that we all serve and that is the Will of the Solar Logos.
This Will is gradually realised however, just as consciousness
is gradually expanded. The Will is however the ‘Life’ Aspect

59
and therefore ‘Life’ is increased by aligning with the Will.
The will of your soul is already aligned with my Will,
which is why you are working together. Reading my words
may increase your consciousness; the application of the
purpose behind the ideas will bring the First and Seventh
rays into play. You may increase your contact with the ‘Life’
Aspect by studying my purpose as I have laid it out to you
in the various books. Study this purpose and adopt it as
your own. Identification with My purpose stands between
you and identification with higher purposes than mine.
My purpose is your ‘alignment’ with those higher purposes.
Therefore meditate on my purpose as a gateway to “Life
more abundant”.7 Therefore study my purpose and adopt it
as your own. This will increase your level of consciousness.
Therefore attempt to apply some portion of that purpose
in the three worlds. This will increase your usefulness to
the Plan. Just as you take the focus off your individual
identity by focusing on the group identity, so you must take
your emphasis off your group purpose by focusing upon
the purpose of the ashram. This will facilitate a greater
integration of your group into the wider group for which I
am responsible.
Thirdly, take group responsibility for a piece of my
work and gradually increase the level of that responsibility.
There is a difference between ‘identification’ with my
purpose and responsibility for implementing a piece of
it. Identification allows the consciousness to blend with
the Purpose of the greater whole. Responsibility allows
that consciousness to implement that Purpose within a
circumscribed field of service. These two concepts are
intertwined in the Law of Freedom. To take responsibility
for the outcome of a piece of work in the three worlds that
is far greater than can be accomplished with the existing

60
resources at your disposal requires that you work with the
Second and First Aspect together. The soul allows the group
to work subjectively with consciousness and to connect with
and develop the soul principle in others. Contact with the
monad allows a process of spiritual underwriting to occur.
This process is loosely tied up with the idea that a Master is
karmically responsible for the actions of his disciples; but let
me try to explain the process more fully:
A Master seeks to educate others in alignment with
his purpose, which is aligned in turn with higher Purpose.
He seeks to do this in order to speed up the process of
evolution according to the Plan. The principle of free will
however means that the opposite of his purpose can just as
easily result without discrimination. Education can be used
as a way of slowing down evolution by those who receive
it. It is for this reason that the planetary purpose is closely
guarded in Shamballa. If the purpose was revealed to those
who have their wills set upon resistance, then knowing the
purpose would only increase the power of that resistance.
Similarly, esoteric information can be used as a means of
inflating the personality of disciples and slowing down the
evolution which would have naturally occurred as the doubt
and uncertainty about life drove them in search of deeper
meaning in service. Spiritual underwriting means that one
takes responsibility for the actions or non-actions of those
whom one educates, while at the same time leaving them
totally free to take whatever actions they choose. This
responsibility ties the Master to his group until such time as
they achieve liberation through right application.
The educational initiatives for which I am responsible
have naturally incurred negative karmic responsibilities
as well as positive ones—although you will find that the
terms ‘positive’ and ‘negative’ here have no real meaning

61
because they have no real independent reality. If you think
through this information you might understand more
fully my reasons for standing behind such a project as
Shamballa School. This project will succeed to the extent
that it demonstrates the power of alignment to the Will
Aspect through occult obedience and the application of the
teachings to life. These are the First Ray and Seventh Ray
principles I am trying to introduce through example into
the wider Second Ray field of my responsibility. I have
given you much here that warrants your wise consideration.
The acceptance then of spiritual responsibility involves
the acceptance of full responsibility for the ‘will’ of those
in whom you choose to invest your consciousness. This
responsibility must be accepted without any authority,
obligation or subtle control over the decisions of those you
take responsibility for. It therefore does not in any way
‘interfere’ with their independence but it does ‘underwrite’
their eventual alignment with Purpose. In effect you are taking
some of the responsibility of the Planetary Logos when you
willingly accept the responsibility for the liberation of certain
units within His field of overall responsibility. Their liberation
will only come about through their alignment with his Will
and therefore it becomes your responsibility to ensure that
eventually takes place without infringing in any way the
principle of Freedom.
Just as surrendering ‘identity’ and thus sovereignty is
difficult for the personality, so the surrender of ‘freedom’
is difficult for the soul, even though this is only an
apparent freedom—just as the personal sovereignty is
only apparent and in fact is totally dependent for its
independent existence on the soul. So the freedom of the
soul is only apparent and ‘bought for it’ by the sacrifice
of Sanat Kumara. Surrender of that freedom through the

62
acceptance of greater spiritual responsibility is what opens
the higher bridge between the soul and the monad, and is
also what allows for the principle of magnetism to operate.
Identification with the Love principle allows one to see the
soul in another, despite the fact that they are not currently
identified with the soul in themselves. This seeing allows the
release from the personality into the soul. Demonstrating
the Love principle which they essentially ‘are’ at a deeper
level to the separated personal self allows it identification
with the Will principle—which allows one to rely upon
the monad, the essential divinity in another. Taking
responsibility for that which they as souls are not yet ready
to accept, is a way of affirming the monadic principle
which lies at the heart of the soul.
In effect you, as a soul, take responsibility for the
eventual fulfillment of their soul purpose until such time
as they willingly accept it for themselves. They experience
this inner experience as a lifting of their own inner sense
of responsibility, and therefore as a type of ‘freedom’. The
experience of this sense of freedom is a powerful magnet
which calls souls into the vortex where that spiritual
responsibility has been accepted. There is a science here
which is difficult to explain until the understanding and
experience of the Life principle is more fully anchored in
your consciousness. I run the risk of you misunderstanding
and misinterpreting the monadic principles in terms of
the personality, which would only increase the very karmic
responsibility I am attempting to educationally allay.
There is a correct timing for everything and so in
the meantime I would urge you as a group to consider the
three things I have asked you to do and to undertake an
experiment, which if successful will bring immediate results
in terms of an increase in magnetic and radiatory power.

63
18 September 2002
Surrender
The theme which is alive in the group field is that of
surrender to the Will of God. I would seek to point out the
difference between submission and surrender. In submission
the identity of the submitter is retained. The little ‘I’ is
consciously overriding its own will in order to conform with
a greater Will, whether this be the will of the soul or the Will
of a Logos. There is thus a sense of duality present summed
up by the statement of the Christ ‘Not my will Father, but
thine be done’. In surrender there is no experienced separation
in will. There is no lesser ‘I’ that must submit to the Will
of a greater ‘I’. There is only the Will of God in action. For
surrender therefore to occur what must be surrendered is
any remaining ‘identification’ with a lesser ‘I’. In the group
process what is gradually surrendered is a lesser identification
of the individual soul with its own ‘soul purpose’ and creative
inclinations. There is only one soul purpose after all. The
result of this synthesis occurring in the IDENTITY of a group
is not, as the lesser self might think (in this case the lesser
self being the incarnated soul and not the personality), an
increase in the uniformity of the group life. There is in fact an
increase in the differentiated expression of the group emerging
out of the realised unity of purpose. But this differentiated
expression does not arise out of the individual proclivity of
group members (which would increase individual identity),
but arises out of the single ‘will’ expressed by the unified group
field adapting itself to unique expression through the material
offered up to be worked through. Ultimately the single ‘Will’
is that of the Solar Logos expressing via the monad through
the Planetary Logos. The unified group field is the ashram
on the buddhic plane and the ‘material’ offered up are those
64
conscious incarnated souls willingly surrendering into their
originating source, the ashram. It is important to note the
different perspective from which the causal body is viewed.
From the perspective of the personality, the causal body is
viewed as the soul, something to be aspired to and reached at
high moments of contact. From the perspective of the monad,
the causal body is the lowest form of contact—it is the Third
or Matter Aspect of the monadic life and thus is expressive
of individualised purpose. Just as the presence on Earth in a
physical body is an indication that the soul on causal levels is
trying to express some purpose or develop some quality on the
physical plane, the presence of a causal body on the abstract
mental levels is the indication that a monad is incarnated
through a much longer cycle in order to fulfil its purpose.
That incarnated purpose (incarnated on the mental plane,
not necessarily on the physical) is fulfilled at the time of the
Third Initiation when the soul completes its masterpiece in the
three worlds, bringing a small piece of ashramic purpose into
expression.
Now I am about to give you a new piece of
information. You are aware of the fact that a soul which
has individualised upon the mental plane undergoes a long
series of physical incarnations culminating in the expression
of soul purpose. Do you consider it reasonable that the
monad has only one incarnation in which it expresses
itself through a causal body? Of course the teaching must
be presented sequentially so as not to overwhelm the
gradually expanding human mind. Consider the length of
a monadic incarnational cycle and then consider the fact
that the Second, Third and Fourth Initiations may be taken
in a single physical incarnation within a subrace, within
a rootrace, on one globe, in one chain, in one scheme,
in one solar system. Does it not seem more reasonable to

65
consider the whole process of individualisation (the building
of a causal body to express an aspect of monadic purpose)
resulting eventually in initiation (the release from that
causal body), to be a cyclic process occurring over and over
again in the life cycle of a human monad? Just as the soul
in the causal body has many incarnations in the physical,
interspersed with incarnations occurring on the astral and
mental planes, so the monad has many incarnations in
causal bodies, interspersed with incarnations on the higher
two planes of the triad. Causal bodies are sequentially
taken by a human monad in order to unfold the monadic
purpose over a much longer cycle than the lesser soul cycle.
They are the many mansions of the Father’s house. These
monadic incarnations take place on different chains and
schemes, and are themselves completed when the equivalent
to the causal body on atmic levels is destroyed at the Sixth
Initiation. It may seem incomprehensible to you when I say
that the monad stores ‘purpose traces’ (I don’t know what
other words to use here) of previous incarnations (by this I
mean the monad incarnating in a causal body) in the atmic
body or Temple of Ezekial, in the same way that the soul
stores ‘quality traces’ of previous physical incarnations in
the causal body or Temple of Solomon. This is a significant
piece of new information which will form part of the new
teachings on the monad and, if pondered, will open up a
whole new field of inquiry and speculation concerning the
unfoldment through time of planetary and solar Purpose.

66
23 October 2002
Group Integration
The educational initiatives for which I am responsible
have naturally incurred negative karmic responsibilities
as well as positive ones—although you will find that the
terms ‘positive’ and ‘negative’ here have no real meaning
because they have no real independent reality. If you
think through this information you might understand
more fully my reasons for standing behind such a project
as Shamballa School. This project will succeed to the
extent that it demonstrates the power of alignment
to the Will Aspect through occult obedience and the
application of the teachings to life. These are the First
Ray and Seventh Ray principles I am trying to introduce
through example into the wider Second Ray field of my
responsibility. I have given you much here that warrants
your wise consideration.8
With this paragraph from an earlier transmission I
seek to begin a series of instructions along the lines of those
given out in the books Discipleship in the New Age I and
II. The difference will be that these instructions will not
be addressed to a group of individuals but to the group
individual. Mark this change clearly, for it distinguishes the
Aquarian process from the Piscean. I seek to address the
group as if it were a single entity rather than a composite
entity—as if group fusion had already taken place. This is
the way that the soul integrates the personality.
The group is larger than you might think, with
many inner workers assisting the seven of you currently
working on the outer plane. You must begin to think of
yourselves as a chakric system through which the energy

67
of the ashram is able to flow. In addition you must
begin to view yourselves as an outer entity as well as one
in consciousness. If one member is undergoing psychic
difficulty, or financial hardship or an initiatory experience,
then the group is undergoing the experience to a greater
or lesser degree. Relate to each other from this perspective
and the group will grow in power, radiance and functional
capacity.
Your next task is to ‘accept each other’ in this deeper
way as integral parts of one being. As your Master I may
have accepted you ‘as a group’ but this does not yet mean
that you have accepted each other. For my work to be
successful I require a unified field of consciousness. The
energies which must move through the group soul are
transpersonal, archetypal energies. They require a stable
field of transmission, and this field must be created in your
inner life together. Begin to think of this aspect of the
group work in terms of energy rather than consciousness or
activity. You are a centre within the worldwide group for
the absorption, circulation and distribution of a particular
type of energy—the energy of synthesis operating within a
Second Ray field and directed towards manifestation on the
physical plane. Think this through.
As a group then, you are at the stage of ‘accepting
discipleship’. The lower antahkarana has been built and the
bridge between your inner and outer life has resulted in
the integration of your personality into a functioning unit
serving the soul. There is a stage in the individual journey
when the incarnated soul must build the higher antahkarana
to access the energy of the triad. This comes about when
the soul itself requires more energy as a result of successful
contact and integration of the personality life. In the case
of a group, there comes a time when the outer group

68
integration process is far enough along that the group must
consciously build a deeper connection with the inner group
and the ashram. The inflow that you have been expecting
as a group must come from the inner worlds first. After a
period of integration you will then have a much stronger
energy reservoir which will be able to hold together a larger
outer group.
I would like you then to do two things to accelerate
your integration process.
1. Strengthen your will to view the group as an entity.
Make the change in consciousness that is required to
decentralise yourself within the group life. The result will
be greater love and an increase in the telepathic functioning
of the group mind. Not only will you begin to view each
individual differently as part of the group entity, but the
group entity will then begin to live more fully in each
individual consciousness so that each member IS in some
developing way, the group.
2. Make space in your inner life for the inner group. These
are a group of souls which I have brought together for
training in the same way as I have brought you all together
as a group. I seek to bring you both, as two units within
the ashram, into relationship at this time. This requires
from you that you make time to attempt this connection.
The inner group is ‘orientated’ towards you at this time,
and you will find a sure response to a genuine invocative
appeal.
When these two tasks in consciousness have been
fulfilled then we may progress further.

69
30 October 2002
Communion
I want to emphasise a distinction in your attempts to
work with and contact the ‘inner group’. I am specifically
referencing contacts upon the buddhic plane which can
of course be made with those in or out of incarnation,
but are more common with those who are not also
working through a body in the three worlds. Much of the
communion that occurs between disciples in incarnation
is telepathic and is happening on the causal levels of the
mental plane. The energy from the ashram is stepped
down into ideas, which are really geometrically crystallised
ashramic intention. Disciples around the world who are
affiliated with an ashram receive similar impression at
certain times. This is a form of horizontal communion—a
type of translation of energy through a certain ‘band’
or plane. The type of communion that I would like
to emphasise is a more vertical one—it is a linking
communion with a group who have been formed specifically
to serve in this capacity as intermediaries between a group
in incarnation and the ashram as a vortex of Hierarchical
consciousness and Shamballic force.
It is the type of link that has as its prototype
the link between the Fourth and the Fifth Hierarchies
or between Mercury and Venus. The result will be the
group equivalent of the divine hermaphrodite—a group
grounded in the ashram and yet able to express upon
causal levels of the mental plane. This necessarily requires
the cooperation of two hierarchies and also of groups in
and out of incarnation. This communion is an essential
part of the process of ashramic externalisation for which
I am responsible. It is an attempt to consciously connect
70
the cosmic ethers with the consciousness that is contained
but not limited within the three worlds. A useful analogy
would be the relationship between the physical structure
of a rose and its ensouling devic life. The inner group is
your outer group’s ensouling deva. The devic life builds
the structure and imbues it with the colour, quality and
purpose of its archetype. Your group has been built in the
same way—it has been brought together through resonance
to an archetype, and through the inner promptings of each
of you as a soul experienced in your causal bodies during
meditation.
As you build a structure of connection—your outer
work together as well as your inner thoughtform building
and meditative life—there comes a point of time where that
structure is stable enough to be ‘informed’. You can expect
to experience this ‘information’ in the following ways:
1. A greater telepathic rapport arising between you. You
should attempt to recognise the underlying archetype which
is the source of this rapport.
2. A more powerful infusion of energy in your meditative (and
increasingly your day-to-day) life. In a peculiar way the ashram
can be seen as the energetic substance of your connection. It
is what brought you together and what holds you together. As
you become increasingly aware of this, the energetic container
that you form part of will become increasingly apparent. You
might consider this the wine of the ashram being poured into
the group chalice; or a more accurate image might be the
crystallisation which occurs within a saturated solution. The
chalice has no separate existence from the wine. It is, in fact,
formed inside the wine barrel so that the wine may be held
and experienced by those whose consciousness is as yet limited
by the three worlds.

71
3. A greater flow of energy between your own etheric and
physical bodies. The link between the inner and outer
groups has its direct analogy in the link between your
etheric and physical bodies, and results in the activation
of a particular group of agnichaitans which serve a similar
function in the interface between the fourth and fifth
subplanes (counting down) of the physical plane.
4. A sense of ‘surrender’ of perspective as you recognise
your group as the externalising point of a descending
mountain rather than the apex of an ascending one.
Consider these words. Your students should have the latter
perspective and the core group the former.
These schools are points of ashramic entry into the
three worlds. You should begin to see yourselves in this
way and to hold as your highest priority the maintaining
of an open conscious link between the higher mental plane
and the ashram on the buddhic plane. This will necessarily
bring you en rapport with the inner group, at first during
the high points of your meditation, but increasingly in the
day-to-day life of the School. Your group has in fact no
separate existence apart from the ashram. You are the effect
of one of the first stages in the externalisation process. Your
conscious recognition of this fact and acceptance in the
group life of the consequences of this reality will do much
to assist in the next stage of the process unfolding.

72
06 November 2002
Transmutation and Transfiguration
There has been much progress over the last
week, and a closer relationship between the inner and
outer groups is readily apparent. You must get used to
considering and consulting the inner group with as much
consciousness as you now consider and consult each
other. When this relationship has been further solidified
something new will become possible. My responsibility as
a Master is to transmit energy from the monadic plane
through the ashram and into the three worlds. Groups of
causal bodies therefore form the most externalised point of
the ashram. They are the ‘tip of the sword’ as it descends
from Shamballa. This energy of Will, stepped down
through the Synthesis Ashram, is a most potent force and
as you know can also be destructive to the forms through
which it passes. This is why it is imperative that the inner
and outer group form one fused whole (fused through
the principle of Love and shared commitment to ashramic
purpose) before Shamballic energy is allowed to flow too
freely through the group. Prior to this the dangers of
cleavage are great due to the Great Illusion. Your work as
a group is to sustain the perspective of the ashram, thereby
overcoming the tendency to think from the bottom up. If
your identity is polarised in the three worlds then you will
be on the receiving end of the destructive power of the
Shamballic force instead of allowing it to pass through you
and remove all outer obstacles to the externalisation of the
ashram. Think this through most carefully. Consider what
there still is in your own nature (and by this I mean areas
where your consciousness is still wrongfully identified with
an aspect of one of your vehicles) as a group that tends to
73
‘occultly absorb’ the Shamballic force rather than allow it
to pass through.
When you have determined this you may adopt
the method of ‘purification by transfiguration’ which is in
reality the purification that results from the intense inflow
of spiritual energy rather than that which precedes it. This
purification must be done consciously by isolating with
clarity the areas that need to be purified, and then allowing
them to absorb the higher energies during the transmission
process. The result will be the short but potent cleavage
and rebellion of those parts of the group or individual
which absorb them through wrong identification. For this
technique to work there must be a strong field of love
present in the group, and the cleavages must be expected
and recognised when they occur. They will essentially
be cleavages in consciousness and must be offset by the
increase in the deeper unifying energies of the Life principle
and through steadfast connection to the ashram.
In a similar way this is the function that the group
is serving in the field of the School. Those elements of the
student field which are in resistance to the dominant soul
culture of the centre must be brought to the surface and
transmuted. Those elements which are in the core group
that are resistant to the perspective and spiritual culture (if I
might use that term) of the ashram must be identified and
transfigured.
In the case of transmutation, the resistances are lifted
up into consciousness and redeemed through the light and
love of the soul. In the case of transfiguration the resistances
are isolated in consciousness and then annihilated by the
inflow of spiritual Will. To use the latter technique there
must be the realisation that nothing truly real can ever
be destroyed. What is being annihilated is the wrongful

74
identification of the soul with the form, thus liberating
the soul and preventing the more potent energies of Spirit
from damaging the form. Damage to one or more of the
three vehicles is not the result of the inflowing Life but the
refusal or inability of the consciousness to disidentify with
the vehicle concerned. Think this through carefully as it
imperative to understand this process when working with
Will energy.
If you consider what is happening in the world
arena in the light of the above information, some deeper
understanding of current events with respect to the
terrorism focus may be apparent in this time in Scorpio.
Pluto rules the purification of those elements of the
global psyche which are over-identified with the form
side of life through the process of cleavage and rebellion
resulting either in release or annihilation. If the group is
to fully anchor a portion of the Shamballic force upon the
physical/etheric plane, this energy must of course be passed
through the consciousness of the group. I am able to
direct the energy into the causal field but the group must
pass that energy through from the abstract mental plane
through the concrete mind, astral body and eventually
into the etheric body of the physical site. This of course
is only one aspect of the work. Much can be done and is
being done through transmission of this energy laterally
upon the plane of abstract mind. This energy is that which
connects and inspires groups via the jewel in the lotus.
As the Externalisation process necessarily will extend to
the physical plane, it must also pass vertically through the
vehicles as well as laterally. This vertical descent results
in the transfiguration of the personality, both of the
individual and eventually, of the group. This is the Sword
of Shamballa descending to Earth, and I have outlined

75
some of the technique required to do this in Rule X for
Disciples and Initiates:
The rules for work within the veils of maya are known
and have been used. Let the group widen all the rents
within those veils and thus let in the light. Let the Army
of the Voice be no more heard, and let the brothers
onward move within the Sound. Then let them know
the meaning of the O.M. and let them hear that O.M.
as it is sounded forth by Him Who stands and waits at
the very centre of the Council Chamber of the Lord.9
This descent of Shamballic energy onto the physical/
etheric plane has particularly to do with the Seventh Ray part
of the Synthetic Ashram and hence the experiment in the field
of New Zealand. You might like to consider the cooperation
of the First, Second and Seventh Rays in this externalisation
process and to make sure that they remain balanced within
the group life, albeit with them each being emphasised
sequentially in the development of the centre. One may take
precedence at a particular stage but all are required and the
balance between them must be held.
At the current stage of the externalisation process it
is imperative that the union between the inner and outer
groups continue towards fusion and that the energies of
resistance are brought to the surface and eliminated. Proceed
slowly and carefully, running the energy of the ashram
through all obstacles and making sure that the alignment
is maintained at all costs and in the face of externally
presented realities.

76
13 November 2002
Mantram
I would like to give you a mantram to use. It
is seemingly simple and yet its power is great if used
consistently and with intent.
There is no soul.
There is no time.
There is no space.
There is only Life.
One Life.
This Life I am.
My will is for all my lesser selves
to know me at their core as the essence,
the beginning and the end of their existence.
It is thus, as the One Life, I LIVE
The purpose of this mantram is to aid in the conscious
building (or should I say realisation) of a reservoir of Life
at the core of the group process. It is this and only this
which will be able to sustain and hold the soul of the group
steady as it begins to draw to itself as part of the creative
process those elements of personality life which will create
a manifesting container. Just as Hierarchy must advance
towards (and therefore begin to be absorbed by) Shamballa
at the same time as it externalises and expresses through
humanity, so in the soul life of a group, any attempt to
externalise must be balanced with an equal attempt to
be absorbed in its higher centre. Without this the inner
resources of the group, carefully built up, can be swept into
and exhausted by the activity of the Third Aspect. Many
groups have ended thus. What is lost is the functioning of a
vertical channel which can be used for the sustainable inflow
77
of spiritual energy. This can be avoided by paying equal
attention to the First and Seventh Ray energies of the group
at this pivotal time.

78
27 November 2002
Seventh Ray Integration Formula
I would refer you this morning to the Integration
Formula for the Seventh Ray. The group is beginning to
realise more fully its relationship to the inner group and to
my work. The inflow of energy from the ashram is having
a destructive and purifying effect prior to the energies of
organisation coming into fuller expression. This organisation
must be an externalisation of the ashramic organisation
however, and it is with this point that I am most
particularly concerned. I would like you to consider the
Formula from the point of view of an integration between
the inner and outer groups. The outer group, composed of
members on location in physical bodies, is the ‘personality’
expression of the School. The inner group, carefully chosen
and comprised, is the ‘soul’ expression. I am endeavouring
to integrate these two ‘fields’ so that they form one field
which will faithfully express in the three worlds the
Hierarchical archetype.
The Seventh Ray as you know, is the ray of synthesis
that can implement the work of all the other rays. It has
a particular affiliation with the First Ray and hence the
opportunity to manifest the School and work in some
small way with the Shamballa force. The outer School
must consider itself as a Seventh Ray externalised piece of
an essentially First Ray archetype. The primary capacity
that needs to be developed then amongst those in the
outer ‘field’ is the capacity to listen to and pass on the
SOUND as it is stepped down from Shamballa through
Hierarchy. In order to offset the hard line energies flowing
from the First to the Seventh Ray I have placed particular
emphasis on the organisation of a predominantly Second
79
Ray field to serve as the inner group. The Seventh Ray will
be strong in the makeup of those drawn into the outer
part of the project and hence the necessity for correct
‘orientation’ and alignment. Those coming into the centre
need to be gradually educated that they are being called
into the outer ring-pass-not of a great LIFE which has at
its centre the Will of God. They must be reoriented as
soon as they have been somewhat stabilised in the field
to ‘face outwards’ and allow the energy of the Life to
pass through them as it is safely stepped down through
Hierarchy and the inner and outer group associated with
the School on the physical plane.
At the core of the inner group of mainly Second Ray
workers there can be found a small group of more First Ray
workers whose job it is to work with the Shamballic Will.
They are the holders of the ‘ashramic reservoir’ of Will, just
as you have your own ‘Will’ triangle in the School.
The whole outer group must learn to see itself as an
essentially Seventh Ray part of this ashram. The ‘pentagram’
that you stand in is the causal body and it is from there
you work. That ‘standing’ in the causal field must be
maintained and all outer connections must be referred back
through this ‘standing’ to the central point of the ashram.
Nothing in the three worlds can be seen to be of greater
‘orientating’ priority than the ashramic centre.
This will require a continual ‘decentralisation’ in the
consciousness of the group. The decentralising from the
personality to the soul should already have largely taken
place in group members. The ‘recognition’ of the group
soul as a centre and its relationship to the inner group and
the ashram is becoming a greater functional factor in your
consciousness. At the centre of the ashram is found that
point of tension which I hold as a Master. It is this point

80
of tension which has semi-consciously called you forth into
the field of service for which I am responsible. It is this
central Will or Purpose for which I have taken responsibility
that links me to the Master Morya and to the central
Purpose held in Shamballa. Your conscious relationship to
the Purpose sounding at the centre of the ashram is the
triangulating point that will allow you fuller access to the
inflow of monadic power emanating from your essential
being.
My work as a Master is to educate those ‘units’
(referring to groups and not individuals) working in the
externalising periphery of my ashram, so that they are
able to more consciously respond to the central Purpose
and be distributing agents for that Purpose into the three
worlds. Consequently you have available to you an array of
experienced inner workers who will operate, if you allow,
as your teachers and your healers. Their job is to work
primarily with the energy of buddhi, while your job is to
hold a steady centre within the causal field. The job of the
Seventh Ray worker is difficult for he must work within
Matter and yet not be identified with it. All planes below
the buddhic plane are ‘material’ with respect to the Spirit/
Matter duality, therefore those who work there must be able
to sustain their alignment. As ‘the workers in the furtherest
fields’ they must keep their spiritual supply lines open
and functioning, and hence the emphasis on the teachings
concerning the antahkarana.
I would ask you therefore to begin to more
consciously live as though the ashram was the ‘centre’ of
your life. If you are able to hold this inner alignment on
a more continuous basis, decentralising yourselves from the
soul and the group, you will see the Plan take form and
understand more fully your role within it.

81
 It is the Seventh Ray Master within the Synthesis
Ashram that provides the energy for the successful
externalisation. The material fields must be ‘conditioned’
so that they willingly reorientate to the solarising influence
of Hierarchy. When you remember that the buddhic plane
is the fourth cosmic ether it will be clear why the Seventh
Ray rules over the inflow of buddhic force into the three
worlds which make up the physical body of the Logos. It
is the Seventh Ray which allows form to birth the Christ,
and hence the relationship of Mary to this energy. It is the
capacity of the Seventh Ray to ‘orient to the Will of God’
while still within the three worlds that allows grace to enter
and thus sacredises Matter through the ‘surrendered Will of
the fiery stone’.

Integration Formula
“’I seek to bring the two together. The plan is in my
hands. How shall I work? Where lay the emphasis? In the
far distance stands the One Who Is. Here at my hand is
form, activity, substance, and desire. Can I relate these
and fashion thus a form for God? Where shall I send
my thought, my power the word that I can speak?
I, at the centre, stand, the worker in the field of magic.
I know some rules, some magical controls, some Words
of Power, some forces which I can direct. What shall I
do? Danger there is. The task that I have undertaken
is not easy of accomplishment, yet I love power. I love
to see the forms emerge, created by my mind, and do
their work, fulfil the plan and disappear. I can create.
The rituals of the Temple of the Lord are known to me.
How shall I work?

82
Love not the work. Let love of God’s eternal Plan control
your life, your mind, your hand, your eye. Work towards
the unity of plan and purpose which must find its lasting
place on earth. Work with the Plan; focus upon your
share in that great work.’
The Word goes forth from soul to form: ‘Stand in the
centre of the pentagram, drawn upon that high place
in the East within the light which ever shines. From
that illumined centre work. Leave not the pentagram.
Stand steady in the midst. Then draw a line from that
which is without to that which is within and see the
Plan take form.’”10

83
18 December 2002
Healing
The message today concerns ‘healing’ which as you
know is also a strong emphasis of my ashram’s work. The
perspective I seek to give however is of group healing.
There are great healing devas who seek to work at national
and international levels. They seek to heal and restore those
areas of energetic conflict that exist within the mental,
emotional and etheric vehicles of nations as well as of
groups and organisations. This is a great Second Ray work.
At the time of the coming full Moon, falling as it
does just before the Solstice and Christmas, an ashramic
effort is underway to pour healing energy into the mental
field. Astrologically this process is signified by the trine
between Jupiter in Leo and Pluto in Sagittarius. The
unifying energy of solar fire is being used to absorb and
heal those uprising unresolved issues within the fire by
friction of the group mental field.
To make this information useful to your group I
would like you to consider the worldwide field of those
who are working within the specific thoughtform I have
created through the writings of Alice Bailey. There is an
energetic opportunity to deepen and emphasise the unity
that exists between all these minds working to uncover
the energy of buddhi which lies behind the words. It is
not an opportunity so much for synthesis (that will come
later) but for unity. Consider how, as a group you might
assist with this project in both your subjective and outer
communications.
To the world wide group who work with my
teachings: Brothers, whatever your differences of view or
emphasis, this is a time to recognise your shared response
84
to the note of Love-Wisdom. It is this response that has
called you into a resonance with these teachings and in this
response is the promise of a deeper and eventual ashramic
unity. As a global field of individuals and groups united
on the abstract mental plane and crossing over all lesser
boundaries and obstacles of race, gender, culture, economics
and politics you have a unique opportunity to sound that
note of Love-Wisdom in the world. This note is not only
sounded by the dissemination of the teachings but more
importantly by the demonstration amongst yourselves of the
effect of the teachings as they are worked out in practical
cooperative endeavour. I call you to the demonstration of
Love-Wisdom. The Uranus/Saturn trine will allow for the
breaking up of old separative thoughtforms and the Jupiter/
Pluto trine will allow for the healing of old emotional
wounds. Love. Start on the mental plane and work
outwards through form.
To the Highden group: You are a microcosm within
the larger field. Work where you are. Examine that which
exists of a separative nature in your mental and emotional
fields and attend to it. Use the alignment with the inner
group. From the inner worlds the divisions within the
group field are more apparent and with invocation, much
that is old and deep can be released, not only from this
incarnation but from periods of old association. As you
achieve some liberation and unity within your own field
you may be able to contribute healing to the wider group.
Call on the inner group, call on me, call on the Christ.
Love wisely my brothers.

85
22 January 2003
The Creative Principle
We begin now a year in which the Third and Seventh
Rays are emphasised in your group life. During the first
year you worked with the energy of Will because this
energy was needed to ground the School in the midst
of many forces that were resistant to this process. In the
year just passed the emphasis was upon the Love principle
and its relationship to the Will. The personal relationship
dynamics created the opportunity and necessity to develop
this principle in the group life. And so the third year will
be an opportunity to develop the Creative principle.
This opportunity is presenting itself through the need
to fund the School which is pressing at this time. Adopt
the view that the current circumstances are a positive
development that indicates the very ground needed in
which the seeds of creative living can germinate. The occult
generation of money requires need, love and magnetic
power all present at once. Love and power have been the
focus of the first two years. Need will be the driving force
for the keynote of this one. This need is not an indication
of any failure but of success and readiness to learn about
a new principle. Need brings forth Creativity. The crucial
point is to see that this creativity emanates from the soul
and not the personality.
The creativity of the personal self (operating on
its own) is driven by fear, arises in the base centre and
expresses through the sacral, attempting to draw to itself
that which is needed. The creativity of the soul operates
through the crown and expresses through the throat chakra
as creative expression and living. The Third and Seventh
Rays are involved. When the Seventh Ray is reoriented to
86
the Third (a reorientation demonstrated in Hierarchy and
therefore assured for humanity in the graduation of the
Master R from the Seventh Ray Master to Mahachohan)
then the sacral centre serves the throat and can be used in
group formation to attract resources for the soul.
This is an important point to remember. This joint
operation results from soul-personality fusion.
You have been told that the first three initiations
involve the sacral/throat, solar plexus/heart and base/crown
respectively. This is the view from the personality. From the
soul’s perspective, in the act of manifestation the situation is
reversed. In the first year the emphasis was crown to base.
In the second the heart had to control the solar plexus. In
the third year the emphasis will be on the control of the
sacral centre by the throat. The sacral centre has been called
‘the court of the money changers’. At this time the Third
Ray ashram, and in particular that Master named ‘adjuster
of finances’ is working through the emerging Seventh Ray
ashram to reorientate the world financial situation. This
reorientation and the consequent reprioritisation of values
is something which must be demonstrated in your group
life if you are to serve as a model for the new archetypal
pattern.
I have drawn your attention to the integration
formula for the Seventh Ray in a previous message and I
re-emphasise this. It is only through standing steady in the
pentagram and drawing a line “from that which is without
to that which is within” that the work can proceed.11
Principally, do not leave the pentagram driven by the forces
of fear aroused in your own nature arising from apparent
outer circumstances. You have the support of the ashram
which cannot be registered through fear-based thoughtforms
and astrality. Any outgoing energy emanating from the

87
group must contain the creative flow of the ashram and
therefore be sourced there. The purer the alignment, the
greater the love the more potent the response will be. Fear
will only result in activity that diminishes the capacity and
quality of alignment and love. The Third Aspect, humanity,
the personality, is divine. It need only overcome the fear
of survival inherent in incarnated life and stand steady in
its orientation to the soul to prove this fact and become a
living testament to the glory of God. Such is the challenge
and the opportunity before you this year.

88
29 January 2003
Tension
You are entering into a period of intensity as a group.
This is not separate from the global situation and represents
your portion of the challenge in front of Hierarchy and
humanity in the current stage of the externalisation process.
Periods of intensity bring to the surface those semi-conscious
and unconscious ‘complexes’ within the psyche and allow them
to be examined in the light of the soul. The issue of war is
making people examine the roots of their thinking and feeling
life in such a way, and if rightly handled may bring, as a result
of conflict and tension, a unified world view into conscious
focus in the life of humanity as a centre.
In your own group work, the tension and uncertainty
over whether the School will own the property provides a
similar opportunity. If you allow the process to work through
at a deep level you will find that it brings up the primary issues
underlying the Spirit/Matter dual paradox in each of your
natures. The result could be a confrontation with and victory
over what has been called ‘the Great Illusion’.
What is necessary is to hold a point of tension long
enough in order for the core issues to become very clear.
There will come a time however when the tension has
borne fruit and the time for decision and action comes.
Right timing is a key Seventh Ray skill.
In both cases Hierarchy may inspire, educate and
guide but the responsibility for the decision must be
left with humanity, and in the School’s case, with the
outer group. In no other way can all three Aspects of
divinity enter into proper relationship with each other.
Responsibility and power are intimately linked. Neither can
exist long without drawing the other into being.
89
 Your group must begin to operate more fully as an
esoteric centre—think of the distinction between the way
that the physical body operates and the way that the etheric
body operates. The latter is esoteric to the former and
underlies its functioning.
As a group, you are seven energy centres which must
come into right functioning relationship with each other in
order to inform and organise the outer environment with
the higher archetypal energies of the ashrams.
Pay attention to clearing the flows of energy between
you as it is these energetic flows which underlie and can
reorient the thoughts and feelings, which to the inner
being are material and dense. Do not seek to materialise
the concept of your energetic interplay too early but stand
steady on causal levels and work outwards from there.
Remember that the key to working with the Great Illusion
is to recognise the unreal for what it is and not attempt to
work within it. It may be beneficial for you to consider the
rules for the physical/etheric plane in A Treatise on White
Magic.

90
05 February 2003
Choice
This has been an important week in the life of the group
and in the magical process. What should have become clear
to you at this time is the necessity for the group to function as
one unit or entity as well as the importance of each individual
within the group attending to his or her own purification work
which naturally arises out of the correctly held tension in the
group life.
The group is also only a unit within a larger group,
and as the synthetic process that is occurring in the ashrams
continues, then it will become clearer how each group fits
within the whole of which it is a part—just as your own
synthetic process gradually reveals the key role that each
individual must play in your group.
Your question is about Highden and whether it
will be the ongoing site for the School. I would seek to
answer that by stressing once more the need for you to stay
together in this process as a group. Highden came about
because those involved were willing to stand in the stream
of Will, of Shamballic force really, and so allow a point of
anchoring upon the physical plane. The key note here is
willingness to serve the Will of God. In some sense it is the
willingness to serve as best suits the need that allows the
Will to work most potently.
How many disciples are there who are willing and
able to just pick up and move in order to be a part of
such a project? It is this very ‘willingness’ that brought you
into this group in the first place. The Purpose is fixed but
the Plan is ever changing in order to conform as closely
as possible to that Purpose. It is the work of Hierarchy
through the ashrams to continually work to bring humanity
91
in line with that Plan. There are two types of workers we
seek to use as ‘pivotal workers’ in times of change.
The first type is so firmly anchored that they
become stable centres or vortexes of force in a particular
location. They usually have deep karmic roots in place,
families, livelihoods etc and they are not ‘moveable’ in the
‘relocatable’ sense.
The other type of pivotal worker is the MOST
‘moveable’ in the physical sense. They have so adjusted
their outer lives that they are available to pick up and
move according to inner direction from the ashram. They
become ‘connecting points of ashramic force’ rather than
the ‘anchoring points of ashramic descent’. These workers
are able to either stay or go, as directed by the need of the
ashram.
You are in a period of time where choice will be made.
As a result of that choice, you have the potential to become,
either individually or as a group, one or other of these types of
‘pivotal worker’. From the point of view of Hierarchy, we can
use either type of worker to advance the sense of synthesis. If
you anchor more fully at Highden, we can begin to use this
centre as a stable point to which we can send other workers
who will either stay and strengthen the anchor or move
through, bringing new energy when they arrive and carrying
the synthetic energy when they leave.
The important point for this process to work is that you
realise the importance of your own ‘will’ as an outer group. It
is not acceptable for you to merely submit to what you might
call the ‘Will of God’ in the sense of ‘what will be will be’. This
is an avoidance of responsibility which denies the divinity of
the Third Aspect. You must choose and then hold that choice
lightly in surrender and alignment to the Ashram.
Here are your choices as they appear to me:

92
1. You choose to take your stand ‘as a group’ at Highden.
This will result in success or in failure in the sense of
achieving the desired result of being able to purchase or
stay long-term on the property. Success will mean that the
project will be able to be used by the ashram as a stable
vortex. Failure will mean that the group can then choose to
offer itself as a unit for other service, or choose to disband
and reform in other ways. Remembering of course that
there is no true ‘failure’ in any spiritual work undertaken
with aligned intent.
2. Or you choose ‘as a group’ to offer yourselves to be used as
a unit within the Plan as most serves the spirit of synthesis and
Hierarchical intent at this time. The result of this choice will be
either that the group relocates to another site or indeed several
sites, or that the group is directed to stay at Highden or disband.
The first option gives surety of intent but uncertainty
as to outcome. The second option gives surety of outcome
(that you will be used collectively and/or individually for
the highest good) but uncertainty as to direction or intent.
The important point here is to take the decision as
a group. This decision is in fact a part of your initiating
process. Humanity must learn to use the Will, beginning
with its own personal will, and we see that process at work
right now upon the world stage. In your case as a group, it
is not so much a distinction between right or wrong use of
the Will. The only wrong use would be to not ‘choose’ and
thus not use the Will at all. The distinction is whether to
use the Will as a descending force that anchors in matter or
as an ascending force that abstracts. Both directions bring
forth the other as a consequence, but the outer appearance
is not the same.
Choose my brothers. We await your decision.

93
12 February 2003
Group Identification
You are in a process of group initiation. Is not that
the central intention of an occult School? In making your
decision you have chosen to reorientate your consciousness
and in so doing you are in a process of shifting your core
identity from humanity to Hierarchy, from the Third to
the Second Aspect. Initiation of the consciousness from the
personality to the soul is always ‘self-initiation’.
The Third Aspect becomes sacred and demonstrates
its divinity when the consciousness identified with the form
(and remember thoughts are forms) wilfully chooses to re-
identify with the soul. This you are in the process of doing as
a group. Initiation occurs in consciousness and it is changes
in consciousness that subsequently have an effect upon the
form life. Sometimes the consciousness changes so radically
that the old forms no longer serve and must be transformed
or released. The death process is always an opportunity for
initiation. Consciousness either clings to the form resulting
in an ‘unconscious’ death, or joyfully releases and takes part
in the abstraction process, in which case you have a conscious
transition.
Having taken the decision as a group, you are now
in a process which has not completed and therefore you
cannot know what the outcome will be. I may only help
to guide the direction of your consciousness in the same
way that there are guides which help the soul negotiate the
transition at the time of death.
There is no such thing as an individual soul, just
as there is no such thing as an individual ‘wave’ in the
sea. There is really only Soul—the one great ashram of
Hierarchy. Within that vast sea there are the ray ashrams
94
and sub-ashrams, focalising points of ‘quality’ within the
overriding quality of ‘Love-Wisdom’, impressed by Will and
working out in Intelligent Activity.
In the same way there is really no such thing as
the ‘soul’ of Shamballa School. There is merely a focal
point within the ashramic sea—a wave that has lifted
in alignment with a specific purpose and drawn various
individualised consciousnesses into the orbit of this
centralised purpose.
From above the buddhic plane, all form is seen as
illusory, even those soul forms which exist on the abstract
mental plane which consist of groupings of causal bodies.
Group souls form as a way of leading consciousness
identified with the illusion of a single causal body into
the more expansive illusion of a group soul. Eventually
all distinction in consciousness, all groupings and sub-
groupings, must disappear under the realisation of the one
Life which substands all consciousness. The Seven Rays of
light are blended into the great synthetic indigo, and behind
this is the darkness of pure Spirit out of which all light is
birthed.
In time and space however, illusions are mastered one
at a time as larger and larger spheres are transcended within
the one sphere of the planetary life. Having succeeded
somewhat in the fusion of your individual consciousnesses
into a group entity, the direction that your group
consciousness must now expand is into the global ashramic
group. The individual entity finds its proper function within
the greater life when the consciousness of that entity has
expanded into the larger field.
I advise you now to consider the group soul as
the form life of your ‘project’. This form exists upon the
abstract mental plane. The transition you are making, little

95
though you realise it, is the transfer of your awareness of
form or ‘body’ from the physical location of Highden to
the causal ‘body’ of the group on abstract mental levels.
The subjective life or consciousness of the group is likewise
being transferred from the group astral body to the buddhic
‘body’. The group ‘will’ is likewise shifting from the
concretised ‘thoughtform’ of the Shamballa School project
to the Will of your Master as it is focalised upon the atmic
plane.
If you follow this thinking through you will see that
the identity of the group is shifting from the three worlds
of the group personality into the three worlds of the triad.
This transition may or may not result in the loss of the
outer personality, not just of the project but also of the
group (ie. those individual personalities which make up the
‘outer’ group). Whether it does or not depends upon three
factors:
a) The degree of attachment that still exists within the
group consciousness to the forms on all three personality
planes. Consider in this regard not only your attachments
to the physical place but to the group astral and mental
body.
b) The capacity that the forms have to serve as containers
or expressions of the triadal life of the group.
c) The overriding considerations of the ever changing
Hierarchical Plan which serves the unchanging Purpose.
Two further suggestions I give you at this time:
1. Seek to expand your consciousness of the ‘group’ soul.
This will lead you into greater ashramic perspective and
therefore an understanding of the precise function that your
group has the potential of performing. This is a buddhic
96
function leading to Pure Reason, and indicates Love moving
through the causal heart and not so much the astral heart
of the group.
2. Transmit Purpose. This is a different thing my
brothers than ‘aligning’ with Purpose. You can align your
consciousness with Purpose by reading and meditating upon
those articulations of my purpose that I, as your Master,
have indicated in the books and in these transmissions,
and this I urge you to do. This process conditions the
mental field and brings it into alignment with the atmic.
Purpose however is not a concept but an energy. It is the
transmission of this energy which ‘transfigures’ the mind
and releases thereby the consciousness imprisoned by the
Great Illusion.
In conclusion, I encourage you to put aside all
thoughts of failure and concerns about the future and to
redouble your effort and focus at this crucial transition
time. Work as a group, as a group soul, on causal levels
with the same degree of one-pointedness that was required
of you on the physical plane three years ago when the outer
project commenced.

97
19 February 2003
Life
The transmission this morning concerns Life. Aquarius
is the time when the theme of “Life more abundant” is
worked with.12 This ‘Life’ originates in the Purpose which
brought The Lord of the World into incarnation on this
planet. It is this Life which sustains the livingness of all
kingdoms, although the impress of this Life affects the
lower five worlds in two different ways through the energy
of ‘Will’. In the lower three subplanes of the cosmic plane
this ‘Will’ energy is directed to the physical survival of
the form. In the realms of the triad this energy is directed
towards the fulfilment of triadal purpose. These two ‘focal
points’ of ‘Will’, one on the atmic plane and one on the
physical plane, are in direct opposition to each other. They
are the ‘will to survive’ and the ‘will to purpose’ of the base
and crown chakras. These two ‘wills’ can only be balanced
by the third centre which transmits ‘will’—the ‘will to be’
of the heart chakra.
The origin of this third and synthetic ‘will’ is the
energy of Life itself which originates in the incarnating
purpose of the Planetary Logos and is then transmitted via
the monad, through the ashrams on the buddhic plane,
through the jewel in the lotus and finally through the
central group of petals in the heart.
These three centres of ‘will’, the crown, the base and the
heart, make a triangle within the Third Aspect through which
the energy of the fourth quality of deity can flow. They relate
to the planets Vulcan, Pluto and Earth within the solar being.
It is through this triangle that the energy of solar Will can be
transmitted via the planetary Will. Thinking this through may
shed some light on the role of this planet within the greater system.
98
 The causal body is in the centre of the five worlds and is
the heart chakra of the monadic system. It is through the heart
of the causal body that ‘Light Supernal’ must flow. This ‘light’,
related as it is to the combined energies of Aquarius and the
Seventh Ray, has a particular relationship to the planet Uranus.
Light Supernal can flow from the atmic plane to the physical
only when the two energies of the ‘will to survive’ and the
‘will to purpose’ are synthesised by the third energy of the ‘will
to be’ flowing from the monad but originating on the logoic
plane of the system. This brings the energies of the first, third
and seventh planes together via the ‘bodies’ on the second and
fifth planes.
The true significance of Venus in Capricorn and its
relationship to the Third Initiation has to do with the role
that the Fifth Hierarchy plays in integrating the three ‘wills’
that operate through the First, Third and Seventh rays of
Capricorn. The Fifth Ray is the bridge provided by the causal
body of the energy of ‘Love’ that comes via the monad or
planetary heart centre directly from the solar heart. It is
basically the energy of Love ‘fixated’ upon a hard line or ‘Will’
plane. Thus it is the representative of Second Ray synthesis
working within the 1, 3, 5, 7 alignment thus allowing the
‘highest and lowest’ to meet.
Venus is the energy of sacrificial solar Love that descends
to aid the ‘will to be’ of the planetary deity. The significance
of this in your group life should be apparent. The energies of
anchoring and abstraction are apparent in your process. By
deciding as a group to be moveable rather than immoveable
you have chosen the ‘will’ emanating from the crown over
the ‘will’ emanating from the base and therefore effectively
transferred your point of equilibrium from humanity to
Hierarchy. The point of transition occurs in the causal field of
the group. The issue now is whether the existing forms that

99
the group has been working through, the mental, astral and
etheric/physical sheaths can be transformed or must be let go
of altogether.
The transformation is not a gradual process but a
sudden one. Transfiguration is the sudden drenching of the
group soul with the energy of ‘Life’ itself. This energy is so
potent that it either serves to fuse the soul and personality
together or results in the death of the personality. The
fusion process occurs within the form through the heart
chakra and is in effect the fusion of two ‘wills’, the will of
the soul and the will of the personal self into one ‘Will’.
The death of the personality, or really the breaking apart
of the forms which compose it, indicates that the form is not
able to contain the transfiguring energy of Light Supernal. This
is why the initiate at the Third Degree is called “The Conqueror
of death”.13 He understands that the energy of Light Supernal
is ‘Life’ itself. He knows not whether the descent of that
energy will result in the shattering of the carefully constructed
and conditioned forms or whether it will result in their
transfiguration. The image of a potter placing a cup in a kiln is
a good one. He knows not whether the fire will result in a fused
or a broken container when he puts it in the fire.
The experiment at Highden is ‘in the fire’. The result
will be a transfiguring or a shattering. There is no other option
when you call on the energy of Life which is also death. Either
the energy of Light Supernal will pour through the group
causal body and find its way through to the etheric plane and
the outer project thus anchoring on the seventh plane, or it
will find its passage blocked in the mental, astral or etheric
life of the group personality and result in the destruction of
those fields. If the latter is the result then the group soul will
return to the ‘drawing board’ of the ashram. In either case the
‘location’ of the group centre will shift to causal levels but it

100
may or may not have a group personality to work through.
From a triadal perspective the group ‘personality’ consists of a
particular energetic configuration of individual causal bodies.
The real group soul is the ashram.

101
26 February 2003
Fusion
I have said that the ‘personality’ of the group should be
understood as that coherent causal identity that forms on the
planes of the abstract mind. To understand this process it is
helpful to view the three-fold development of consciousness—
individualisation, initiation and identification as three aspects
of one process seen from different levels of experience.
Group initiation for example, involves identification
where the individual causal soul is concerned. The
individualised solar consciousness ‘identifies’ as the group.
The process is ‘initiation’ to the group as a whole and
individualisation from the perspective of the ashram. A
piece of ashramic purpose is ‘individualised’ through the
geometric arrangement of a group of causal bodies on the
higher mental plane.
This individualisation process is no different in essence
from that which occurred in the Third Rootrace as solar
angels ensouled or individualised animal man. At that time
there was a great destruction of the forms in the three worlds,
while at the same time there was a fusion process occurring on
causal levels which resulted in an ‘individualised’ identity—an
identity which would be sustainable for a whole series of outer
lives and would eventually make possible a lasting connection
between monad and personality through the process of
individualisation, initiation and identification.
Thus an ‘individualised’ personality from the ashramic
perspective is a group of causal bodies which is formed into a
stable pattern which will last through several incarnations in
order to carry out a specific piece of ashramic purpose. It is an
externalisation of a part of the ashram on to the mental plane
where the energy of Purpose is ‘fixated’.
102
 This process requires the willing acquiescence of the
individual causal soul. It is the Leo principle surrendering
to Aquarius so that a greater Leo or Sun of consciousness
may result.
This process occurs under the Law of Destiny rather
than the Law of Karma. There are many groups who are
drawn together out of karmic association for the purpose of
education, healing and growth. A group that comes together
under the Law of Destiny is formed because of a united
recognition and commitment to an ashramic purpose which
will be fulfilled at a future date. Upon fulfilment of that
destiny the group causal body is then shattered and the
consciousness is transferred to the ashram.
This purpose is always multi-incarnational and is
recognised in different degrees by the members of the
group according to the stage of development of their
own antahkarana. From the time that this fusion or
‘individualisation’ process takes place then it is the united
commitment of the souls of group members that carries the
project forward.
Up until that moment of ‘individualisation’ it is the
purpose and cohering consciousness of the Master or initiate
that holds the group together. Once it has taken place
then the initiating consciousness is freed from its holding
function and can then overlight and work through its
‘creation’ as necessary.
I want you to see this very clearly. As an outer group you
have been brought together and linked with other souls who
are not currently incarnated to form a group field which can
be used to externalise a portion of my ashramic purpose. This
process requires identification on your part as individuals—
each individual must ‘identify’ themselves with the whole and
not with their individual identity (which is why I address you

103
as a group entity and not as a collection of individuals). It
requires initiation as a group entity—the group soul is what
initiates the individual consciousness with that of the whole
group. And it involves individualisation—it is a portion of
the energy of Purpose which comes via the monad which is
‘incarnated’ into the coherent field of consciousness of the
group soul.
This is the real experiment being undertaken and
it requires the ‘will’ of your incarnated soul (which is the
solarised personality) for it to be successful. I can only bring
you together and educate you in the process. You must throw
your ‘will’ in the direction of mine for a successful outcome
to occur. Let me put this plainly. Are you willing to give up,
not only your personality acquisitions, but something which is
much more precious to you, the accumulated harvest of many
lifetimes—your causal body, the Temple of Solomon in which
you have carefully stored the essentialised experience of an
individual soul? Each of you is a soul with much experience,
and you are all capable of functioning somewhat as souls or I
would not have been able to gather you together for this work.
Will you become one soul, not in theory but in fact? Will you
allow your individualised purpose incarnated as it is in your
causal self to become one with a larger Purpose?
Pay no attention to what is happening in the three
worlds at this stage—the outer will only begin to repattern
itself once the inner decisions are made. If fusion takes place
then the forms that are required for the implementation of
that purpose will be built or attracted. All the ingredients for
fusion are there save one—the willingness of you all to throw
yourselves forward into this new experiment, the willingness
to let go of all thoughtforms and attachments and individual
projects into the energetic centre of this experiment. As a
result the energy of Purpose emanating from Shamballa will

104
be birthed through the group soul as a by-product of that
surrender. The energy of Will must be applied by the initiate,
not to others but to himself; and this law also applies to the
group initiate.

105
05 March 2003
Light of Life
There is a type of light which is called the ‘light
of life itself ’. This light is beginning to break forth in
the group field. It has nothing to do with intelligence or
consciousness which is how we would normally understand
light, but is associated with the Will and with the purpose
of the Planetary Logos. It is not a light which illuminates
so much as ‘vivifies’. It is the Light Supernal which awakens
the ‘secret light’ within the form. I would ask you to focus
more consciously on this light and to ponder upon its
significance to the group process.
There has been a rapid reorientation within the group
field that has centred around the core concept of what an
esoteric group really consists of. This reorientation has been a
significant blow to what is called the Great Illusion and should
have introduced to the members of the group an experience
of isolated unity—that strange experience where the disciple
stands seemingly bereft and yet unified—alone and yet with all
the world. Each individual member of the group is becoming
in a practical and experiential sense, the group itself. This
allows for a greater separation amongst the personalities of the
group members while at the same time indicating a deeper
fusion at soul levels.
This fused group has become ‘individualised’ through
the initiatory process. What this means is that a ‘seed’ from
the ashram can now be planted within the group, to inhabit
the group soul form as it were. This seed carries within it a
particular purpose which is a subset and a ‘working through’
of ashramic intent.
In order for the ‘light of life’—a ray upon which
this seed is planted—to be maintained, the seed must
106
have access both to its mother and father. The fused group
soul is the mother principle—the ashramic purpose is the
father principle. The group must nurture the seed through
conscious loving attention—this is carried out through
rhythmic meditation. A container is thus created and
maintained. The seed develops intelligence in the world
through the various activities of the group. These activities
are the ‘roots’.
When a group member is inspired along a certain
path of service in the three worlds their attention is focused
outward. This outward attention carries the ‘root’ further
into the earth of the three worlds. However the root also
allows for nutrients to travel back to the seed and make it
more ‘intelligent’ in the sense of being ‘informed’ through
outer action.
Most outer groups have their attention focused outwards
in the extension of the ‘root’ structure and occasionally lift
their attention through inspiration and meditation to the
seed. I am drawing your attention to a higher process where
the work in the three worlds is undertaken with a different
‘direction of consciousness’. The gaze of the group member
must be kept upon the ‘seed’ rather than upon the earth. The
root will grow and grow faster and in more magical ways than
would be possible if the attention is directed outwards. You
have just had this demonstrated to you as a group.
I want to restate this because it is likely that you
will need to remind yourselves again and again about this
reorientation until it becomes stable in your experience. The
activity of group members is designed to bring intelligence
and nutrients to the seed and not to achieve any outer
manifestation in the three worlds. You are not to focus
on achieving specific outer projects as goals in themselves.
This will of course be almost impossible for you but

107
gradually will become easier. The teaching and writing and
manifesting work of the group is NOT about bringing the
teachings to humanity but about bringing humanity to the
teachings. Think this through. From humanity’s perspective
Hierarchy is externalising, bringing to humanity the light,
love and power of the inner worlds and inaugurating a
golden age of brotherhood on Earth. From Hierarchy’s
perspective, humanity is food. The soul needs to extend its
roots through the personality to gain enough nutrients to
flower upwards to the monad.
Consider serving the needs of Hierarchy rather than
the needs of humanity. The greater always includes the
lesser and you will find that the help to humanity is great
but as a ‘by-product’ of the focus of your attention.
This reorientaion makes the First Aspect of personality
focus the Third Aspect of triadal focus and occurs upon
the mental plane. Meditation upon the soul is normally the
First Aspect in the trinity of meditation, study and service,
but is the Third Aspect in the trinity of Intelligence, Love
and Will. This does not mean that study and service are
not undertaken but they are undertaken with a meditative
orientation which directs all acts in the three worlds to the
service of the soul’s growth.
The Second or ‘Love’ Aspect is developed through
‘communion’ as a soul—in this case as a group soul. In
the same way that individuals within the group learned to
identify as the group through causal body communion, the
group soul must consciously open itself in communion to
other fused group souls within the wider ashram. Your new
meditation work as a group will be along these lines.
The First Aspect of ‘Will’ is related to atma and
keeps the electrical flow between the group purpose (which
is expressing through the facets of the individual soul

108
purposes) and the purpose at the heart of the ashram which
is the purpose of your Master. You need to articulate this
relationship to yourselves mentally but of course the real
interplay is energetic and it is the dynamic thrilling energy
which charges through the group soul and can be invoked
and evoked. This is the reservoir of Will.
The light of life itself is a synthesised light which
operates through the three lights of the triad in the same
way that the soul light operates through the three lesser
lights of the personality. It comes through the monad in the
individual sense, in the group sense through the Chohan or
Sixth Degree initiate in whose ashram your Master finds his
place, and through Shamballa in the planetary sense.
In closing I remind you that the current progress in
the affairs of the group life has come about through the
taking of your focus off the outer project and allowing
the power of the ‘seed’ to draw to itself those elements
and ingredients it needs for growth. I have said before
that the capacity for this project (and now I mean soul
project) to grow is restricted by the limitation of your
thoughtforms. I now add the element of ‘direction’. It is not
only your thoughtforms (which are merely containers for
consciousness) but the direction of those thoughtforms—are
they ‘manifesting’ thoughtforms that you become attached
to implementing or are they ascending thoughtforms,
surrendered once they are constructed to the ‘seed’ at the
centre of the group soul? I am not asking you to become
abstract. Continue to operate in the three worlds. Do what
must be done but let your consciousness remain in the high
place of the soul and enter more and more frequently into
the ‘secret place’, the inner court of the group soul which
contains the seed.

109
12 March 2003
Group Soul
It is only when forms go that we are able to fully
realise our attachment to them. This is true whether it is an
individual, a place, a thoughtform or a relationship pattern.
This is the gift of death—the release from our illusions and
our ‘investments’. Nothing real dies. Nothing real ends.
This is eternally true and yet must be learned over and over
again at different levels—for forms become more and more
subtle as the soul evolves and grows in experience. Old
forms become ‘incorporated’ into new forms better able to
express the inspiring consciousness and the indwelling life
which is but one Life.
You are in a deathing process as a group and must go
through the stages of this process until the stage of joyful
acceptance and harvest is reached. What has been created
together at the level of soul cannot be uncreated. It cannot
be threatened nor does it need to be preserved. It simply is,
and will reveal itself through new forms as time proceeds.
What I am talking about is the ‘entity’ that is a group
soul and contains within it the seed of ashramic purpose.
This is an entity on causal levels—a jewel around which
twelve petals will form. Naturally this entity will have outer
incarnations—forms which reflect and express the inner
archetypal pattern—but the entity should not be confused
with any of its forms nor with the personalities of those
who form a part of them.
There is almost no way to explain the process of the
building of a causal entity for a School within the causal
body of a nation without that process materialising in the
minds of those to whom I explain it. Nevertheless I will
make the attempt.
110
 The ashrams exist on buddhic levels as you know. The
externalisation of those ashrams becomes possible when there
exists within the higher mind of humanity those lighted
thoughtforms which are responding to the ‘note’ of qualified
purpose which defines the ashram. These ‘thoughtforms’ are
a bridge between the emotional body of humanity and the
‘buddhic body’. On the lower mental plane the thoughtforms
are more ‘material’ and have at their root the identification
with a form, be it an individual or a nation. On the higher
mental plane, the thoughtforms more fully reflect the
archetype, however they still have threads of connection into
the physical and emotional plane.
The ‘soul’ of a nation is that amorphous entity which
is composed of the combined thoughtforms that have built
up over many generations on the higher mental plane.
When this thoughtform begins to approximate an ‘inner
archetype’ which exists on the buddhic plane, then a flow
of energy can begin to take place from above downwards,
and the causal field becomes more ‘defined’. When this
causal field reaches a certain stage then a ‘seed of Will’ can
be sown into it. This seed originates from the monad and
contains the Purpose which will be carried out once the
consciousness has been more fully developed.
The second solar system is developing the Love or
consciousness principle so that a seed of solar Will can be
planted which will form the basis for the third system. In a
similar way a planet, a nation, a group and an individual are
‘seeded’. Individualisation is related to the planting of the seed,
initiation to its flowering and identification to the deathing
process.
The anchoring of the archetype of the ‘School’ has
occurred within the causal body of the nation. A small portion
of Shamballic ‘Life’, a ray of Light Supernal has ‘formulated’

111
or become ‘fixated’ upon the higher mental plane within the
field of the national soul. This will form a reservoir of Purpose
around which a ‘body of egoic light’ will form. None of this
has anything really to do with the personalities involved in the
anchoring. In the same way, the individualising of animal man
did not have much to do with the actual outer identity of the
animal man which was ‘individualised’. In most cases the outer
form perished however a ‘whirl’ of identity became fixated
upon causal levels from which many incarnations subsequently
were ‘launched’.
The ‘entity’ of the School has utilised your causal
bodies in the same way that a potter utilises a ‘mould’ to
create a form. The mould must be able to hold a coherent
form into which the waters of buddhi containing the seed
of ‘Life’ can be poured. Once the pattern has been ‘set’
or ‘fired’ then the mould is no longer needed and can be
broken or reused. It is the solidified pattern which remains
and not the mould into which it was poured. Think this
through. Of course the form is always developed and
evolved as a result of consciousness operating through it.
It would be useful now to distinguish between a
‘group soul’ and the causal bodies of group members which
may from time to time operate within the aura of that
group soul.
A group soul is NOT just the combination of the
consciousness of the causal bodies of those who comprise it.
Nor was it ‘formed’ from the causal bodies of group members
although it did ‘incarnate’ into the group. It is an independent
triadal entity which has a purpose and a consciousness which
transcends its manasic vehicle. It existed before ‘incarnation’
within a particular group of causal bodies, will survive the
coming and going of individual units within that pattern on
the higher mental plane and indeed the pattern itself.

112
 This causal ‘entity’ requires a physical ‘anchor point’
in the same way that individualisation and initiation can
only occur during a physical incarnation. In a peculiar way,
this entity is as closely related to the physical location of
Highden as it is to the causal bodies of those who formed
part of its ‘mind’. Will is anchored along the lines of
1, 3, 5, 7. Those who come to Highden will come into
the etheric ‘aura’ of this entity whether or not they are
equipped to contact its consciousness or purpose. Similarly,
the soul life of this ‘entity’ can be contacted by those who
may never visit the place or indeed be in incarnation at all.

113
19 March 2003
The Word
Pisces is the sign of endings and beginnings—the
comings and goings from the Father’s house. If you examine
carefully the events in the group life over the last two
months you will find a keynote emerging. This keynote
expresses itself in many ways and can be summed up in the
phrase ‘the Word has sounded forth’.
This Word is the light of Life itself, the First Aspect.
It is the Word that gathered the group together in the first
place in response to the great Sound. It is the Word which
carries the Life energy from the personality to the triad. It
is the Word which IS the electric fire at the centre of the
jewel. It is the Word of Death and the Word of Life. It
is the Lost Word of Masonry and the secret of alchemy.
It is the Word of God which carries one shaft of the Will
of God from Shamballa through the ashram into outer
manifestation.
What can be expected when the ‘Word has sounded
forth’?
Firstly, something has begun. ‘In the beginning was
the Word’…something has been set in motion, a genesis,
a creation has occurred which will now run its course and
produce in time and space outer forms that will eventually
express that Word.
Secondly, something has ended. The Word is also the
‘trumpet of Jericho’. The Word is simultaneously the Word
of Life AND the Word of Death. These are not separate
words but ONE. The same Word causes the destruction
of those forms which are not able to adequately hold and
express the Life, and the beginning, the cohering of those
new forms which can contain the Life energy. Life energy
114
enters and Life energy leaves at the ‘sounding’. The Word
itself is a vortex that allows for the movement of the
essential energy in two directions.
You can observe for yourselves the working out of this
Shamballic ‘sounding’ in the world at this time.
In the anchoring process of the School ‘the sounding
of the Word’ could be said to cover the first two and a half
years, the ‘reciting of the mantram’ the middle three years
and the ‘repetition of the formula’ the last two and one half
years of the seven year manifestation cycle.
The ‘reciting of the mantram’ is the response of
consciousness to the ‘sounding of the Word’—the reflex
action if you like—and this response is dual. One aspect
moves towards the ‘source of the sound’ and the other
carries the ‘sound into matter’. You might consider these
dualities the two aspects of the School which are forming in
response to the issuing forth of the Shamballic note. These
two aspects form, nevertheless, one sphere of consciousness,
harmonised at the centre corresponding to the buddhic
plane within the triadal sphere. The OM becomes the AUM.
Consciousness, starting as a duality becomes a triplicity.
The ‘repetition of the formula’ is the intelligent
‘formulated’ response of the Third Aspect to the initiating
Purpose and the dual workings of consciousness.
I invite you to examine the process of manifestation
over the entire seven year period regardless of the comings
and goings of individual personnel and the apparent outer
situations and events. If you think this process through
in advance, many difficulties may be avoided through the
recognition and fostering of the archetype which is seeking to
express according to law.
The middle three years in this process, like the
middle three rootraces are primarily concerned with the

115
development of consciousness. In the middle of the Third
Rootrace, individualisation occurs. In the Fourth Race a
conflict between the forces of light and the forces of dark.
In the Fifth Race the process of initiation is instigated.
Think this through.
You have, in the creative work of manifesting a
School on the physical plane, the expression of a divine
archetype. If you pay attention to the manifesting Will
of this entity then the process of manifestation can be
accomplished with grace and joy.

116
26 March 2003
Destiny and Purpose
Progress continues. As with all ending processes there
is a period of discrimination required which allows for the
separation of the self from the not-self. The soul becomes
aware of its misidentification with the sheaths and releases
them one by one. The sheaths contain in the very substance
of which they are composed, the seeds of karma. It is the
soul’s destiny which expresses its relationship to the monad,
and the soul’s karma which expresses its relationship to the
forms which it has built and inhabited in the past.
Shamballa relates the soul to the monad and so I
ask you to consider your destiny. Base any outer group
cooperation on your capacity to fulfil that destiny. If you
could but see it from my perspective you would be aware of
synthesis operating in the inner life of the group—resulting
necessarily in an increased outer differentiation of group
members. Think this through.
You are at that stage, as a group, where a shared
purpose should not be focused on. Isolated unity should be
becoming a reality in the consciousness of each member.
When the personality is trying to contact the soul,
it needs to develop soul qualities—essentially qualities of
Love-Wisdom. As the identity shifts to the soul then these
qualities are realised as innate. Essentially the personality is
a subset of the soul and so is inherently (inheriting from
the Son) Love.
When the soul is trying to contact the monad, it
develops qualities of Will and Purpose until it realises it is
inherently (inherited from the Father) Purpose. The light of
Life breaks forth into the soul field and the reality of Being
Purpose is experienced. This is the significance of the Third
117
Ray word of power “PURPOSE ITSELF AM I”.14 This is
the reality the soul experiences on the atmic plane, just as
the personality experiences the reality of itself as soul on the
mental plane.
The soul realises that it IS Purpose and that there is
no separation from the Father inherently—there is no need
to construct or create a ‘purpose’. Purpose already exists.
This ‘realisation of inherent Purpose’ shapes the three
worlds automatically once the antahkarana is built to bring
them into alignment with the Purpose and reveal it in
matter. This is a later stage than when the soul seeks to
condition and then fuse with matter in order to carry out
its realised or apprehended purpose in the three worlds.
This is an important distinction to make. On the mental
plane the soul knows itself as Intelligence, on the buddhic
plane as Love or Pure Reason, and on the atmic plane as
fixed design or Purpose.
There is a difference between ‘having a purpose’ and
‘being Purpose’. This is a difference you should seek to
cultivate at those high moments of integration and fusion.
Be Purpose.
The atmic plane ‘fixates’ or formulates Purpose in
the same way that the mental plane ‘fixates’ consciousness.
Purpose is really then a monadic quality, just as consciousness
is a soul quality. The soul’s purpose is really that portion of
monadic destiny fixated on the atmic plane that the triadal
soul is seeking to express in a ‘solar cycle’. Similarly the
causal body contains that portion of the soul’s consciousness
which the personality in the three worlds is seeking to
express in a lesser cycle.
Just as there comes a time when the causal body
becomes a limitation and must be transcended, there comes
a time when, on the Higher Way the ‘atmic body’ becomes

118
a limitation and must be transcended. This is why we are
told that Purpose is only an energy held within the confines
of the Council Chamber.
Consciousness, held in the ashram of Hierarchy on
the buddhic plane, is ‘fixed’ in an individual causal body.
Purpose, held in the Council Chamber of Shamballa on the
monadic plane is ‘fixed’ in the atmic body.
The accumulated wisdom stored in the causal body or
Temple of Solomon over many lives is but a grain of sand
compared to the Pure Reason of the ashram which harvests
millions of causal identities.
The ‘purpose’ stored in the atmic body or Temple of
Ezekial is tiny compared to the energy of Life itself stored
in Shamballa. This great reservoir of Life is that portion of
the solar Purpose which can be utilised by the Planetary
Logos in any cycle. When you contact this Life directly,
all lesser purposes are lost in that blinding ‘light of Life
itself ’. This is the true significance of the Second Ray
‘word of power’ “I SEE THE GREATEST LIGHT”.15 This
light is the ‘light of Life’ contacted on the monadic plane.
Some tiny portion of this light has been released into the
container of the group soul. If this energy is to be utilised
it must be allowed to alter not only the orientation of the
consciousness of the group but the consciousness itself.
It is the ‘dark light’ which must appear in the very
centre of the light of the soul. It is not a mental ‘will’
(which is the reflection of atma into manas). It is not even
the ‘will’ of the soul (which is purpose defined on the atmic
plane). It is in a peculiar way the absence of ‘will’ which
allows the energy of ‘Life’ of solar Purpose to enter the soul.
This ‘Life’ is held in a reservoir—a kind of ‘liquid Purpose’
before it becomes focused and wilfully directed into the five
worlds of human evolution. Seek you first the Life.

119
 Once this energy has become revealed in the
consciousness of the soul then the process of working
synthetically with all three vehicles—monad, soul and
personality begins to become faintly possible. The soul must
learn to circulate the energies of Life, Love and Intelligence
in such a way that a fourth quality of deity can become
present. It will be for groups who come later to work
consciously with this fourth quality. Nevertheless groups
such as yours can begin to work with it unconsciously
and by that I mean they can become vehicles that allow
the entry and distribution of this quality into the field of
humanity by focusing on the synthetic work. The analogy is
the bee who focuses upon collecting pollen without realising
the pollination that is occurring as a by-product of his
activity.
Just as the energy of Will has been largely
unconscious to groups and to individuals and yet operates
through humanity as a whole and some key individuals
(and indeed causes all activity regardless of consciousness),
so this fourth quality can operate and does operate in the
planetary life. It can be sensed in operation even if not
known or understood.

120
02 April 2003
Synthesis
This series of transmissions to this particular group
is over. They will be valuable for other groups who are
working at this particular phase of the group initiatory
process and they will be valuable for individual group
members as they begin to form and initiate their own
groups. Let me summarise the process for you.
A group forms, based largely upon destiny or a
synchronous response to a shared purpose, rather than
based on karma as is the case in earlier stages of the group
process. The individuals in the group are each called by
the synthetic central point of the group life—the Master
or initiate who is forming the group. The group establishes
a synchronous meditative process forming an entity on
abstract mental levels—the group soul. This group soul
contains archetypal energies which need to be brought
into relationship with each other in order to recognise a
deeper synthesis. First the one, then the three, the five and
the seven must reach a stage of recognised fusion before
the inner mystery can be revealed. This inner mystery is
related to the jewel and also to the Life Aspect. The many
groupings of souls on the mental plane are externalisations
of the forty-nine ashrams on the ashramic plane which are
themselves externalisations of the seven planetary ashrams
whose centres are found on the monadic plane. These seven
have three synthesising—the First, Second and Seventh Rays
and are all synthesised by the Second Ray of Love-Wisdom.
It is the fused energies of all seven rays which creates ‘Light
Supernal’ which is an expression of the light of Life itself as
it is focused and directed into the five worlds via the atmic
plane.
121
 When Light Supernal is released into the group soul
during the process of group initiation then this seven-
fold synthetic energy is ‘seared through fire’ into the field.
Different individuals may be at different stages of the
individual initiatory process and so will respond to this
event differently, however these responses only appear to be
different in time and space. By this I mean that an initiatory
event has taken place—this will be registered differently by
the individual consciousnesses that make up the one unified
consciousness of the group entity, however that does not
change the fact of the event. An analogy would be a new
scientific discovery. Such a discovery may be registered and
understood by only a few, however it may quickly change
the lives of many through its application. The Theory of
Relativity for example, is still not well understood by the
masses and yet it underpins much of modern society. As
each consciousness grasps in their own time and space what
Einstein once grasped during the formulation of the theory,
they are coming into relationship with a living reality which
lies outside of their normal day-to-day consciousness.
A similar process takes place in group initiation. A
new energy enters (new to this group) and is sequentially
registered in consciousness but—and this is important—has
unconscious influence regardless of its apprehension by
individual members of the group. Think this through as it
is an important point to grasp.
Light Supernal is a seven-fold synthetic energy which
(speaking within the cosmic physical plane) issues from the
monadic plane, is distributed in the three worlds through
the jewel in the lotus, and finds eventual expression in the
Aquarian Age upon the physical/etheric plane.
Each individual in the group process now becomes
a carrier of this synthetic energy which has individualised

122
holographically in the group field. The degree of
unfoldment of their individual lotus will condition their
conscious application of this synthetic energy in time and
space.
Over time the archetype will repeat itself. Each
member should be aware of this whether or not they
are seeking to consciously support this process. Each
individual will gradually become part of a triangle which
will eventually become a seven-fold field which will undergo
a similar initiatory process. Thus the seven-fold synthetic
energy will produce in time and space a forty-nine-fold
field. This will happen because it is in the very nature of
the energy itself. How quickly this occurs is up to you.
Humans can cooperate intelligently with this process and
group initiation is an experiment in accelerating this
cooperation through experience. You have just had such an
experience and now I await your cooperation.
No further transmissions will be directed to you as
a group at this time. Instead a period of gestation and
integration in which I would ask you to review your
experience and to review the transmissions that have
been given. You might find it useful to write out your
conclusions and learnings and to formulate very clearly,
each on his own, the synthesised mental proposition which
will serve as the core ‘seed’ that is able to contain on the
abstract mental plane the particular quality of Purpose that
it will be your job to externalise through a seven-fold field.

123
124
Part Two

125
126
30 July 2003
Decision
You have had now a four month period to integrate
the above information and to analyse your experience to
date as a group. I would like to propose now a further
experiment. An experiment that will require your greater
aligned conscious participation as a group. This must be a
free and cooperative process and so I would like to propose
a number of questions to you—as individual members of
this group experiment. The answers will help clarify for
you whether or not this next experiment is one you would
choose to be involved in.
After carefully considering the experience of the
last year and the information received through these
transmissions, is it your assessment that this group is
actually under the impression and guidance of a member of
the Hierarchy?
Your answer to this question may of course be
qualified, but you must make a decision based upon your
experience at this point in time. I am asking for you to
exercise your honesty and discrimination. And then to
choose. This is part of the use of ‘occult power’.
If your answer is a qualified NO—in other words you
are not prepared to make the above assertion even though
you may be sure that there is something going on, then I
would ask you to say so and then withdraw from the next
stage of the experiment.
Do not be concerned that you might be letting the
group down in some way if you withdraw—the archetype
can draw replacement members who, after some integration
into the field will be able to carry forward the work.
Also be aware that I am only referring to this particular
127
phase of group experiment and NOT other activities of
group members, nor their individual soul alignment and
connection to the ashram.
If your answer is a qualified YES—in other words you
may be only 51% able to make the assertion affirmatively—
then I would invite you to consider the next question.
If the group is under the direct guidance of a
Member of Hierarchy then are you willing to increase the
priority that you give to this experiment in your lives?
Specifically, I am asking for a time commitment as
follows. One hour on Wednesday morning from 10am
which is given over solely to this work of deepening contact
with me. This hour should take precedence over all other
outer activities save genuine emergencies.
More significantly I am asking for a commitment
in consciousness. This will require a decision of the inner
being and the practical use of the Will. Having made the
decision that this process is under my direction, I would
ask you to then so discipline your mental vehicle that this
belief is able to hold steady for a period of six months. This
is linked to the capacity to ‘hold the mind steady in the
light’. I am not asking you to suspend the discriminating
function of the mind nor to accept things blindly—I am
asking for you to be responsible in your consciousness
towards the experiment. Having made a decision, I am
asking for you to hold to that decision and not review it
(even, and especially, in your own mind) during the period
of the experiment. This requires a degree of detachment
and the capacity to direct thought. You have this in various
degrees but I would not ask it of you if I did not think
you were capable, individually and as a group, of carrying
out such a discipline. This is the discipline of ‘occult
silence’. It is essential to the experiment because a stable

128
focus of consciousness is the platform from which the more
advanced work I am attempting to do with you is built.
If the foundation fails the pillars will surely fall. At the six
month period leading up to the Aquarius full Moon I will
ask you again to assess the process without any restriction
on thought.
The third ingredient that is a prerequisite to a
successful experiment is your willingness and commitment
to follow through and act upon the information and
instructions given. Group initiation is an acceleration
process under the direct guidance of Hierarchy. By
definition you will not understand or even necessarily be
inclined to carry through with instructions and suggestions
I give. I am requesting that you keep the priority of the
work in mind, give me the benefit of the doubt and
follow my guidance until you have determined through
experimentation whether it is wisdom or folly. This in
no way encroaches on your free will as a soul—in fact it
relies upon it. As a soul you must freely choose whether to
attempt the acceleration of your learning in this way. This is
the discipline of ‘occult obedience’.
In closing, let me give you some insight into the
purpose of the experiment. My previous work with you
was primarily to do with achieving a fusion, at least
momentarily, in consciousness, at the causal level. This
fusion results from the soul’s recognition through revelation
of the seven-fold nature of the underlying synthetic Life.
I addressed myself to you as a group because it was the
underlying synthesis of the group life I was trying to
achieve. What I seek to do now is to consciously use the
group as a unit within the larger group life. This requires
that the group is a synthesised and therefore differentiated
unit. It is a seven-fold archetype which can be trusted

129
to operate as a prism and refract the one underlying life
expression into seven streams of consciousness. From a
technical perspective, it means that the seven causal bodies
are linked together by the individual soul will of group
members and the purpose emanating from me—a purpose
which will not be fully apparent to the group soul but will
be revealed as the soul distributes the Life aspect.
I will seek to impress the whole field in unison on the
higher mental plane rather than through the transmission
of information through one receptive causal field. This
means that you will experience my energy as a pressure in
consciousness on the causal body and I would ask you each
to attempt to open more fully into a direct relationship
with me. The linking of the causal field enables me to
work with you safely as the energies are spread through
the field—it also enables me to convey much more potent
energies and concepts than any one soul is able to grasp.
For such energies to be grasped consciously by the group, it
will require an increase in both telepathic communications
between you as well as outer sharing of impressions.
And so I propose two questions, the second involving
three commitments. I invite you to meditate upon them
carefully and share your decisions with each other.

[At this stage in the group process one member decided not
to continue and another member joined.]

130
06 August 2003
Group Integration
One of the signs of group integration is when
individual members who form part of the group are able
to come and go without disturbing the essential coherence
of the causal field. This demonstrates that the emphasis of
identity has shifted to the group soul rather than focusing
on the individual. This in no way negates the importance of
the individual, in fact the reverse—it allows the individual
soul a greater appreciation of the particular differentiated
energy it contributes—the greater always includes the lesser.
I foresee little difficulty in this group beginning the
next phase of work together. One hint I would give to help
facilitate the fusion process—pay particular attention to
any ‘contraction of consciousness’ when you are meditating
together as a group. To understand what I mean by this,
imagine the fusion process as a spontaneous flowing
outwards of fire between your causal bodies forming a
sphere of fire which is the group field. If this flow is
blocked in any way or meets resistance in the abstract
mental field it will result in ‘thought’. Thought in this
context, when you are meditating or rather ‘communing’
together, should be seen as an indication that some part of
your consciousness has ‘contracted’ or begun to concretise
itself in layers of mental matter. You may counter this
by refusing to take whatever you find yourself thinking
seriously.
Pay attention, as a group, to the sphere of fire that
you are forming together or rather is evoking you. This
sphere is as important to your work together as a vessel is
to a group setting sail to a distant land. You will become
used to checking the integrity of your ‘boat that sails the
131
ocean of Buddhi’ and making any adjustments necessary
before you journey. This requires the recognition of three
essential aspects:
1. Each individual has a responsibility to ‘sound’ clearly
their own soul note and therefore hold the particular point
within the larger whole.
2. The relationship between the points must be such that
there is no impediment to the flow of fiery energy which
provides the coherence of the field.
3. The field as a whole must be increasingly responsive to
the key note emanating both from the centre of the field
AND the centre which the field forms a point within—the
note of Purpose.
Clear your own field, clear your relationships as a
group, clear your relationship to the centre, to me your
Master, at least in this experiment, and then THROUGH
that centre begin to form a relationship with the larger note
of Purpose that your whole field circles around.
This latter relationship of resonance between the
internal centre of any entity and the external centre around
which that entity circles is peculiarly related to the buddhic
plane and fourth-dimensional consciousness. Attempt to
make this relationship a factor in your group meditative
work. It is the key factor which will open the door to the
next phase of work I have in mind for you.

132
13 August 2003
Chakras of the Group
Light Supernal is a seven-fold light. What I am
seeking to do is release this light through you ‘as a group’.
The analogy is between the soul in the causal body (myself )
and the seven chakras of the etheric body. This will be the
most useful analogy for you to use in your current work as
a group. The soul works through the different chakras with
different emphasis at different times. The focus of the soul
is not on the chakras per se but on the purpose it is trying
to achieve in the outer world by way of the flow of energy.
The chakras themselves may not be aware of this purpose
except through the experience of the energy as it moves
through them. Their work is simply to open in response
to the inflow and to be transformed as a result (you might
think of your causal bodies as the chakras in this analogy,
and your own chakras as petals—rather like the Sun and
the seven Planetary Logoi). In addition the soul will activate
different flows of energy between the different chakras at
different times according to its overall purpose—this is the
science of ‘triangulation’. There will also be flows of energy
through the central channel equivalent to kundalini flow in
the system.
I have drawn you together as a group—although
this gives the impression of too personal an approach—in
effect the drawing together occurs under law as a natural
expression of the way energy works—you have been drawn
together BECAUSE you already contain the differentiation
of energy necessary for this seven-fold process to work.
Synthesis differentiates and it is important for you each
to sound your own ‘note’ without undue comparison. A
throat chakra does not compare itself to a crown chakra,
133
it merely expresses its innate quality of energy and finds
itself cooperating with other energy centres. The difference
between seven levels of etheric chakras is not so great when
compared to the difference between the etheric body as a
whole and the soul. If you will simply sound your own
notes generated out of your individual alignments to me,
then the group work can progress as a whole. This is the
‘Leo’ emphasis that is necessary in order for the Aquarian
group initiatory process to have full effect.
In Telepathy and the Etheric Vehicle I have provided
some good information for the science of impression. The
key to understanding this is to realise that the etheric
vehicle I am talking about is the planetary etheric vehicle.
This work involves the linking of the etheric vehicle (the
planes of Shamballa and Hierarchy) with Humanity. The
place of this linking is the abstract mind or groupings
of causal bodies. The aim of this linking is to produce
consciousness on the buddhic plane where the four lower
ashrams are to be found. The Fifth Ray ashram is on
the abstract mental however, and this should not just be
understood as a ‘scientific’ ashram. The science of esoteric
psychology is a Fifth Ray science and the whole process of
linking the higher with the lower is part of occult science.
The Fifth Ray rules the Third Initiation and it is at this
initiation that the soul is freed from the Great Illusion and
begins to be able to function more and more freely on the
buddhic plane.
This group contains the necessary range of soul
quality and development for it to play a useful role in my
work and the work of the Synthetic Ashram. The telepathic
interplay between you will develop under the impress of
Purpose. It is the Will behind the manifestation of Light
Supernal that drives it towards the etheric plane and

134
manifestation. That Will must work through causal bodies
in a seven-fold way. This is why I have asked for your
occult ‘obedience’ in this experiment. Your work during
the Wednesday sessions is to ‘allow’ this flow of energy to
work through the group—as it does so it will naturally
create those telepathic connections and synchronicity of
thought impulses which express its underlying synthesis.
Synthesis does not need to be created. Synthesis IS. The
group will experience it, not by doing or creating anything
on its own but through the willing surrender to the higher
Will of Hierarchy that is seeking to work through it. Think
this through, as it will be crucial to the success of the
experiment.
Your work as a group is to hold the channel open.
To do this you will need to pay attention to your own
individual alignments, the group field and the alignment
with Purpose. Once these preliminary steps are achieved
then it merely requires you to let go and ALLOW the
synthetic energy to work through the field, NOTICING as
it does the effects on your consciousness ie. both buddhic
and manasic, and the direction that the energy is seeking to
move. Gradually the group will develop sensitivity in this
process and be able to greatly assist the process by using
the group mind to consciously FOCUS the energy in this
direction. But the time is not yet.
At this time I would like to place the emphasis on
your individual alignment to me within the context of
this experiment. I need eventually to relate to each chakra
independently within the overall field, so do not rely upon
the group process alone but seek each in your individual
meditation to will and be willing for contact.
It is a paradox that in early stages of the group
initiatory process there was no focus on the individual but

135
merely upon the group. Once the group has differentiated
however, there is a greater focus on the individual but
ONLY as that individual forms a chakra within the
overall field, and ONLY as that field itself has significance
in the wider purpose of the entity in which it forms a
part. Thinking this through will shed some light on the
importance of this planet at the moment within the larger
system of which it forms a part.
One last thing I seek to convey: The emphasis upon
transmitted Purpose is an emphasis upon ‘function’. It is
the ‘organisation’ power of Shamballa as it is channelled
through a group crystal or prism. As such it is conditional,
ie. conditional upon the capacity of the group (and even
an individual in a group) to transmit it. The one Life
permeates all, but the transmission of the Purpose of that
Life is confined to those structures that are able to carry
the current. This transmission relies upon the fact that the
development of the Love aspect and therefore the self-love
aspect has already taken place. Therefore see to it that your
connection with your essential divinity, and therefore your
own intrinsic value as a soul, is strengthened and remains
strong in order to balance the conditional nature of the
transmission of Purpose. Your value as a worker in energy is
commeasured. Your inherent value is unassailable.

136
20 August 2003
Time and Spiritual Experience
The subject is time and spiritual experience in the
three worlds of human evolution. I want to try and give
a perspective from the reality of the higher planes, the
etheric planes of the system. As you know, in the process of
White Magic, the soul brings the completed thoughtform
only down to the etheric level and then allows the
natural processes of manifestation to result in the eventual
externalisation on to the physical plane. The same exact
process is carried out by the Planetary and Solar Logos as
they practice White Magic within the cosmic planes.
The thoughtform or ‘idea’ which the Solar Logos is
seeking to externalise from the cosmic mental plane, inspired
in turn from the cosmic ashram, is precipitated through the
seven Planetary Logoi. This idea—or to put it another way,
the Will of God—eventually organises itself upon the buddhic
plane, the fourth cosmic ether. Here it takes the form of a
pattern: the forty-nine ashrams. This is the lowest conscious
expression of the planetary purpose as it responds to the solar
purpose. This consciousness of course has ramifications on
the lower three planes, but this is an inevitable working out
process that takes place under the Law of Economy. Humans
incarnate within the three worlds and appear to have free will
in this working out process…they can respond or not to the
externalisation of these ashrams into outer manifestation.
This free will is circumscribed however to the beings upon
the higher planes who operate in a totally different time
continuum. The Plan must work out…the experience of
that Plan working ‘in human time and space’ is dependent
upon human response. The reason the Plan must work out
is that the Plan is the very substance of all life in the three
137
worlds. This is difficult to understand from the perspective
of consciousness operating in the three worlds, however let
me give you an analogy: A soul can be initiate without being
conscious of that fact, or even expressing that reality within
the three worlds. A group soul can be initiate without the
individual members of that soul registering it. A planet can
be sacred without fully expressing that sacredness in the
three worlds. These truths all have reference to the realities
experienced on the etheric planes of the cosmic physical plane.
When I say for instance, that the planet Earth is sacred,
you might ask why the money supply has not yet been shared
equitably. When I say that your group has undergone an
experience of group initiation, an individual member might
ask why they have not experienced that fact. The reality is that
in the three worlds, you are in the effect of higher causes...
in the working out of inner realities that are inevitable. This
does not mean that they will work out in a predictable time or
way, only that the blueprint is set and therefore the eventual
outcome is set because it is irrevocably built into the very
substance of the consciousness that is working it out.
Within the solar system there are those Planetary
Logoi who are termed ‘rebels’ thereby demonstrating the
principle of free will in action in the solar sphere. This
free will is circumscribed however, because it can only arise
out of, or in response to, the underlying Will of the Solar
Logos. The Solar Logos sets his purpose, thus providing
the very substance of Will energy within the system. A
Planetary Logos can utilise this energy by aligning with it
or opposing it, as an expression of his independent will. But
this conscious rebellion only forms a part of the working
out of the higher Will. Within any system of seven you will
have three aligning and three opposing, with a fourth in the
middle position. The forces of opposition are merely a part

138
of the working out of a higher Will. This is why it is said
that on the Sun the Black Lodge and White Lodge are seen
as one—dual aspects of a spirit/matter continuum whose
purpose is the working out of a Will that underlies, and in
fact gives substance to, the duality.
I am now going to make a statement that, if fully
engaged, will operate as a liberating key.
All solar consciousness that is expressing within
the lower three planes of the system is in rebellion
to the purpose of the Logos.
This willful rebellion results in the working out
of a higher Purpose.
Herein lies the Peace of God.
A further hint lies in the contemplation of the two
groups in Shamballa...the Registrants of the Purpose and the
Custodians of the Will. The Will is a seven-fold expression
that is focused through the atmic plane.

139
27 August 2003
Dragon and Serpent Energies
The Monad is the source of light, not only to the human
family, but it is the receiver of light from the threefold Sun;
it is the lens through which the light of the solar Logos
can flow to the planetary Logos, preserving and holding
steady in that light the vision, the purpose, the will and
the creative intention of the planetary Logos.16
This quote has real relevance to the second round, the
coming of the Dragon energy and the reptile kingdom. Let me
make some correlations for you:
Second Sixth
Plane Monadic Astral
Scheme Venus Jupiter
Chain Venus Mars
Chakra Ajna Sacral
The second round is ‘pre-conscious’. The third, fourth
and fifth rounds are for developing consciousness, and so
we must wait for the sixth round before the mystery of the
second round is fully revealed. When we are developing
consciousness it is easy to ignore the divinity of that which
lies outside our sphere of awareness. These things that
are hidden from us lie in both directions—that of the
superconsciousness and of the subconscious. They form a
matched pair, matter and anti-matter. They are the solution
to each other. The purpose that is revealed in the later
rounds requires the energy that was stored in the earlier
rounds in order to be completed.
There is a peculiar pairing of the lower two chakras
in the same way that the higher two are paired. The serpent

140
and dragon energies relate to this pairing. One is active, one
latent or sleeping. Just as the ajna centre can be used by the
personality to block the flow of soul energy through the
over-development of the mind, so the sacral centre can be
used to block the kundalini energy from rising. Both chakras
ultimately have the function of directing the energy emanating
from their pair into the system. The sacral centre lifts the
energy of kundalini. The ajna centre directs the will of the soul
into the three worlds.
The development and full functioning of the third eye
in man requires that right relationship is developed between
these two pairs of centres and that the antahkarana is built
between them, via the three thorax centres which equate to
the central three rounds where consciousness is developed.
The energy stored in the lower chakras must recognise
its polar opposite, which it cannot do until the vibratory
strength of the higher is such that the lower must respond
under law. When speaking of the relationships between
chakras it is important to make the distinction between
consciousness and will. You are familiar with the traditional
linking of sacral and throat, solar plexus and heart, base
and crown. This is a relationship in consciousness, having
to do with the soul. The will relationship is solar plexus
to throat, sacral to ajna and base to crown, with the heart
being the central and synthetic point in the system. This is
why the heart is viewed as both a Second Ray and a First
Ray centre. If you think this through much light will be
shed upon the difficulties and paradoxes that arise in the
teachings concerning in particular the relationship between
the second chakra and plane and the fourth chakra and
plane. 24 is the number of Shamballa and this is a centre
of both Love and Will found upon the monadic plane or
second cosmic ether.

141
 I cannot be more direct as this concerns initiatory
matters, but I can give you hints to follow—the middle
principle is built out of the relationship between the third
and the fifth kingdoms, creating as a result the fourth or
human kingdom. This involves an inversion. It is in this
fourth kingdom and on the fourth plane that the at-one-ment
between the second and the sixth takes place. As a result the
serpent energy of the reptile kingdom is restored to its destined
functioning. More I cannot say.
In the next chain, the Mercury or fifth chain,
individualisation will occur in the sixth race of the second
round, and can do so because the fifth principle has done
its work. Similarly in this the fifth root race, sixth race egos
who came in during the second round can individualise.
The initiation of one kingdom is contemporaneous with the
individualisation of a higher. They are both part of a dual
process that, when seen together, is recognised as identification.
Let me return to the first quote and link this together
with the information I gave you last session. The monad is the
way by which the Will of the Solar Logos sustains the will of
the Planetary Logos regardless of whether or not that lesser
will is in conscious alignment with or rebellion to the higher
Will. The serpent energy is the energy of Life and therefore
of the monad regardless of whether or not the consciousness
operating in the system acknowledges this fact. Because this
energy is so powerful it is repressed by the consciousness until
such time as the antahkarana has been built and the monad
has been accessed. Then Saint George can slay the dragon-
serpent with the sword of Will because the lower energy has
been met with its higher counterpart. It is dangerous to wake
the serpent unless you have with you in consciousness the anti-
matter antidote to its power. This is why the monad must be
reached before the Second Initiation can take place.

142
 Consider this process globally. The repression of
the serpent or dragon energy via the Sixth Ray was a
necessary development in the consciousness of humanity
(although its demonisation was unnecessary and regrettable).
The planetary antahkarana must reach a certain stage of
development in this fifth root race before the monadic
energy is able to flow in to offset the power of the lower
energy and evoke its surrender through the process of
initiation and individualisation—which is really, seen from a
higher perspective, merely identification, as the two energies
recognise their mutual origin.
The Seventh Ray allows for the inflow of the Will via
the Shamballic impacts. This impact progressively results
in the surrender and upliftment of the serpent power via
the sacral to the ajna, generating the New Group of World
Servers, who then collectively act as the lens through which
the will of the Planetary Logos is made manifest. A similar
process happens on the cosmic etheric planes and involves
the monad. It could be said that the soul aids in the
distribution of the will of the Planetary Logos into the three
worlds, and the monad aids in the distribution of the solar
Will within the planetary ring-pass-not of the cosmic ethers.
Let me now relate this information to your group
process. You as a group are preparing for the Second
Initiation. This in no way indicates the initiatory status of
individual members. A group composed of individuals all
post the Second Degree does not necessarily make a Second
Degree group. However the reverse is true. Think this
through. Remember that the experiment we are engaged in
is the initiating of this group ‘as a unit’ into a wider field.
In this experiment, I as the Master represent the monadic
point, you as a group unit—the soul or consciousness
aspect. The lower energies that I am seeking to relate to,

143
identify with, to redeem, through this group are not so
much in your lower natures (those have been quelled by the
individual souls) but in the wider group of which you form
a part. Your training is not for your benefit, but so that
something of wider import can be achieved. An initiate,
even a group initiate, ‘knows because he works’.
Therefore, if you are being used as a conscious relating
factor between the energy of Will and synthesis (emanating
via me) and the astral serpent energies that exist unmastered
within the wider field then IT IS ESSENTIAL that you
develop and maintain your alignment with me. This is why I
asked for your commitment to this process before it began. It
is that commitment in consciousness to maintain a relationship
with me, and if that relationship is not directly experienced,
to assume it is there and hold the attitude of loyalty to that
assumption during the course of our experiment. It is only in
this way that the antahkarana which you must become can be
kept open enough to allow others to accelerate their initiatory
process as a result of the inflow of Shamballic Will.
One last point—it is not your work to engage and
master the group astral energies yourselves. You are a
relating factor via the soul. The energy of Will pouring
through your group is distributed via the will petals and
the jewel, causing a strengthening of the Will energy in
those souls with whom you are karmically connected and
related to as part of this experiment. Thus, once again it
is important for you to maintain the point of conscious
focus as high as possible, and not to direct it into the astral
plane itself. The experiment is the clarification of the astral
plane via the empowerment of souls using the Will and
identification. This empowerment will assist them to clarify
and master that portion of the astral plane for which they
are responsible, and thus result in their initiation.

144
02 September 2003
Group Initiation
I have said that you are preparing, as a group entity,
for the Second Initiation. This is primarily an initiation of
‘decision’ related as it is to the Fourth and Sixth Degree
initiations. The First Initiation resulted in the breaking
forth of Light Supernal within the conscious heart of the
group soul entity. The Second requires that this ‘life’ is
consciously ‘chosen’. Discipleship is a conscious process,
and that is why I have asked you individually and
collectively for your greater commitment and the active
participation of your will.
The soul is group conscious and operates primarily
on the triadal levels, from where it attempts to solarise
and fuse with the personality fields. When speaking of a
group initiation I am talking primarily about events taking
place on the triadal planes. The ‘First’ Initiation then is the
breaking forth of the synthetic Life principle within the
‘mind’ of the group—the causal body is the heart chakra
on mental levels, just as the etheric heart chakra is on the
second subplane of the etheric. This allows the mind to be
held ‘steady in the light’. You are practicing this as a group
presently. The Second group Initiation concerns the buddhic
plane. There is a simultaneous ‘lifting’ or liberation of the
consciousness of the group into the ashram on the buddhic
plane. This is accomplished through a united focus on the
Purpose of the ashram, represented by the Master on the
atmic plane, which opens up for a moment an inflow of
energy from the monadic plane—a microcosmic Shamballic
Impact that is consciously invoked by the group entity
for the purposes of liberating consciousness from the three
worlds.
145
 In reality there is only one initiatory process occurring—
that of the Planetary Logos. The perception of different
individuals and groups undergoing different levels of initiatory
experience is only valid from the fragmented perspective of
the three worlds. There is only one group, that great ashram
of Sanat Kumara, and only one initiation. This experience
is spread though time and space and consciousness in such
a way that this group is progressively made more aware of
the synthesis of the process. The value of the teachings given
by Hierarchy is that they allow humanity to understand
something of this synthetic process—resulting either in
more intelligent cooperation, or rebellion to the process, by
humanity. This is the choice offered.
I am attempting to work through this group in order to
achieve something of the purpose for which I am responsible. I
seek to educate the group in order to facilitate greater capacity
for cooperation and therefore a more accelerated achievement.
The whole experiment in group initiation is dependent
primarily upon the conscious alignment of wills. It is a
forcing process, but not in the sense of one will (mine) forcing
compliance of another (that of the group). The forcing process
results from the cooperation but is not the cause of it. In order
to cooperate, independent will has to be developed. This is
why it was so important for you to decide, as a group, whether
you were committed to be an anchoring group or a moveable
group. This was an expression of independent will without
influence from me. When the capacity for independent
will exists, then the capacity for group initiation using that
will becomes possible. If the group will is consciously and
deliberately surrendered to the will of the Master then that
group becomes an outpost of that will.
The Master Morya is the head of the One Fundamental
School. It is therefore an outreach of his will that lies at the

146
core of each and every esoteric education initiative that forms
part of the One School. In order for his will to exist as an
energy at the core of a group soul, there must be elements of
that group soul who are ‘surrendered’ to that will. Will-lessness
is not surrender. Willfulness is not surrender. I ask you to
contemplate the true meaning of surrendered will.
There is indeed no separate soul or Love principle—it
is the Christ who loves in us. There is only one Life and
therefore one Will. It is Sanat Kumara who Wills in us. The
capacity of an individual or group soul to allow this Will to
work through them is what is meant by commeasurement.
I would invite you to develop your capacity to work
with the seven-fold energy of Will in the following way.
Attempt to understand the interactions of consciousness
between you according to the simple chakra pattern below.
1. B — Crown
2. D — Ajna
3. V — Throat
4. S — Heart
5. B — Solar Plexus
6. J — Sacral
7. S — Base
I am not here talking about flows of etheric,
emotional or concrete mental energy but of abstract mental
thought. Try to be aware of those inner flows on causal
levels from an impersonal point of view. You will gradually
become aware of threads of energy that are linking and
triangulating different chakras at different times as the group
becomes more aligned as a miniature expression of what
is occurring between the ashrams on the buddhic plane.
Begin to view any interaction between this group and other
groups in the same way, until you are able to appreciate the

147
particular chakra this group forms within the larger field of
which it is a part. This is a discipline in non-precipitation.
What I mean by that is the conscious resistance to
manifesting flows of energy into concrete thoughtforms
or interactions between you. Instead, attempt to lift these
flows into the light of buddhi—seeking to understand the
archetypal pattern behind them. The buddhic field must free
itself from the abstract mental field in the same way that
the astral body must at a certain point be able to function
free of the etheric. You will be able to take your conscious
functioning place as a group unit within the etheric body of
the planet and thereby your Second group Initiation, only
when you are able (as a group) to free yourself from manas.

148
10 September 2003
Spiritual Intimacy
I consider my work with you in this most recent
experiment has just had its first harvest, its first significant
success. This of course is from my perspective and in the
context of the purposes I am trying to work out and in
which the group can play some part if it is ‘willing’. I have
been able to utilise the group as a ‘centre’—a stable field
for both distribution and abstraction—for a centre ever
has a dual function in allowing energy to move through it.
I would like to continue this process over the full Moon
and so ask you to stay closely attuned to my energy and
sensitive to my will over this time.
Sensitivity to Will is a new phenomenon in groups
and is part of the experiment I am attempting. It is
connected to ‘spiritual instinct’, and when fully functioning
in the centre that is this group, will result in that
independent yet synchronous activity of each member as
they respond to the Will in its seven expressions. The group
purpose is thus ‘revealed’ to you through the realisations
and actions of each member seen synthetically. It is not
derived from the consciousness of the group but is revealed
to the consciousness of the group. In this way the grip of
manas is sequentially broken.
Self consciousness and independent will are hard won
evolutionary successes not to be given up easily. Group
consciousness and the surrendered will can only occur
truly when the individualised consciousness has become
impressed beyond all doubt with the greater value, wider
perspective and more inclusive purpose of the Higher
Way. This is why I have asked you to experiment and to
‘sacredise’ the experiment through commitment over a
149
period of time. At the end of that time you will be able to
seriously assess the results.
In the process of opening yourselves more deeply to
the experiment it is important that you do so vertically
first and horizontally second. What I mean by that is
your opening as souls first more fully to me as the central
impulsing energy, and then to each other as parts of the
same field. I do not refer to the meditative building process
which builds from the bottom up, but to the revelatory
process which proceeds from the top down. Your deepest
soul intimacy should be with me, and then you should be
unafraid to open more vulnerably to each other.
Presenting subjective realities to the concrete mind of others
is never an easy process, and indeed when done from the right
motive it is an act of sacrifice. When what you have contacted is
real then you are sharing a piece of the Christ mind—offering
it up to be crucified on the cross of the lower four subplanes of
the mental plane. It is this crucifixion however that redeems the
lower, and gradually releases doubt and fear from the mental field
altogether. Keeping your vertical alignment will give you greater
wisdom about what to share and when to share it.
On the other hand when something is being shared
into the field by another, you must have your discriminating
mind functioning but infused with the quality of love. You
will quite naturally observe those places when the archetype
is coloured by glamour or illusion—which can be your own
or the other person’s—and this will have a reflexive and
purifying effect upon the group field. The focus of your
attention should however be on those threads within the
sharing that are truly numinous and carry the archetype in
its highest expression. You will be amazed at how quickly
the archetype can manifest through a group when it is
heralded and honoured in such a fashion.

150
 There is a deep intimacy and trust that can occur
within a group that is the precursor for instinctive telepathic
interplay—it occurs when you truly accept one another—
which does not mean that you accept everything they think
say or do, but that you accept that they as souls are called
by me into this field, and that they are committed and
capable of holding their point in this experiment. In short,
that they are ‘worthy’ of your love and respect. Please do
not pass over this comment lightly. I ask each of you to
deeply and sincerely examine your attitudes to each other at
the core of your relationship. Do this leading up to the full
Moon time with the aim of purifying the field so I will be
able to utilise it with greater potency.

151
17 September 2003
Identification with Hierarchy
Purification in its triadal sense is a destructive process
and an expression of the Shamballa force. It is in effect
a forced substitution, consciously invoked by the soul,
of the lower by the higher. It is linked to the process of
‘individualisation via the Will’ which is the individualisation
method of the third system. What is substituted is the very
matter of the lower vehicles. In the etheric as you know,
the four higher subplanes must eventually offer unimpeded
resistance to the flow of energy from the four systemic
ethers ie. buddhic, atmic, monadic and logoic energy. In
this system when monadic energy is able to flow through
the centre of the heart chakra on the second ether then
we have the capacity to anchor the Will of the monad,
and therefore Shamballa, on Earth. This begins to become
possible on brief occasions after the Second Initiation, and
more stably after the Third when the personality vehicles,
including the etheric body, are ‘transfigured’ with triadal
energies. In other words their very substance is changed.
These changes naturally also have flow-on effects to the
physical body, which takes much longer to adapt itself to
the increasing fire of its substrate, the etheric.
Consider this process from the cosmic perspective.
The mental plane is the gaseous subplane of the logoic
body. The cosmic ethers—the four higher planes—are also
being transfigured in their turn by the Soul of the Sun
who is undergoing the Third cosmic Initiation. The result
is a corresponding inflow of cosmic fire into the planes
of the triad and monad. This energy has in turn major
effects upon the physical body—in this case humanity
is part of that physical body. The agnishvattas are the
152
cosmic equivalent of the agnichaitans that build with fire
the substance of man’s body and are released as part of
the kundalini rising to meet the higher fires. Follow this
analogy through and you will see why it is possible to
release increasingly large numbers of human ‘solar angels’
from the mental plane.
There are direct analogies here that you would
find useful to explore. In the same way that one of the
most dangerous points occurs for the White Magician
when he seeks to bring his creation into contact with the
three ancient fires—the same is also true for the Logoic
Magician. The human mind is the ‘ancient’ gaseous fire
of the Logoic body. The Magician risks ‘burning’ and
must call on the solar angel to dispel the Grand Illusion.
I recommend to you all the re-reading of Rules XIV and
XV in A Treatise on White Magic with the above analogy
in mind. They apply directly to the stage that the group is
at in the grounding process of the thoughtform which is
behind Shamballa School. This refers to a number of outer
‘projects’ such as Highden and S......... as well as to the
inner process of revelation of new soul energies. The new
teaching thoughtform is a ‘fire’ which when introduced into
the mental plane as a whole will result in a ‘burning’. To
prevent this burning from turning into a conflagration and
destroying the new thoughtform and attacking the minds
of those who are introducing it, one most important thing
must be done—the calling in of the soul.
In your own case as a group, the soul is the planetary
soul—Hierarchy, and in particular that inner group which
are primarily associated with your project. Your only
protection is to deepen your connection to your inner
group, to call on those energies that initiated the creative
process in the first place—your Masters. You must realise

153
that you are part of a planetary White Magic process which
I have termed the Externalisation of the Hierarchy. One
aspect of this Externalisation will be the Restoration of
the Mysteries, and it is with this latter that the group is
particularly involved. Your group must enter into a new
level of self-forgetfulness—the self now that needs to be
forgotten in favour of a higher, more expansive self, is the
self of the group. Let the group ‘protect’ itself through
sacrifice of the thoughtform of the group. Does this make
sense to you? Your only protection is Hierarchy. Therefore
you must become Hierarchy, at least for a moment in time
and space, via the process of ‘identification’. This is different
from identifying with Humanity—itself a divine centre.
In fact ‘identification’ with Humanity at this crucial stage
would only increase the danger of burning. Identification
with Hierarchy ‘lifts’ for a time your ‘identity’ from the
lower worlds. It is this ‘identity’ which channels energy.
Think of an analogy with an electric bar heater. If the
curtain is too close to the heater when it is turned on
then it will burst into flames—if there is enough distance
between the element and the fabric then heating will result
but not flame. The human soul is an element; the three
worlds are the curtain. When current is run through the
element of the group it is important that there is enough
distance to prevent conflagration.
Therefore, when the creation is taking to itself an outer
fire sheath, the ‘identity’ of the Magician must be moving
towards the spiritual centre of Hierarchy and the safeguarding
central fire of Shamballa while the ‘attention’ is focused
outward to the creation. Think of the group as an ‘eye’. That
eye must focus the light from the higher planes into the lower.
I, as your Master, am at the central point. My identification
with Hierarchy is unshakeable and so if each of you is able

154
to maintain a link with me then you will participate in that
identification. This is why I have made a definite attempt at
this time to deepen my contact with you as individual centres
within the group centre. The eye must stay open. It is closed
or clouded by the weaving of the lower mind. If this happens
then the spiritual thoughtform is separated from its parent,
loses its vitality and is stillborn. Conversely if the impress of
Shamballic fire is too great then conflagration results as the
fires of resistance from the mental plane rise up and destroy
it. The answer is an increase in ‘solar fire’. Let the energy of
Hierarchy pour through the group. Take refuge—that is, allow
your ‘identity’ to rest back and merge into the Hierarchical life
for a time—let the drop join the ocean and solar energies will
flow through the abstract mental plane of the wider group,
conditioning it to receive the impact of revelation.
A birth in the three worlds is an exit from the
inner worlds due to the separation created by the Great
Illusion. Only a soul who has passed the Third Degree is
able to transition through this great veil and maintain the
connection. Thus every human baby that is born into the
world is simultaneously a revelation anew of the Christ—
and therefore of Hierarchy to Humanity—AND an exile
from Hierarchy. Every new expression of the teachings is
simultaneously a revelation within the gaseous body of the
planet (ie. the mind of Humanity) and an exile from the
true teaching which is energy itself. The Word is made flesh,
and if the ‘eye’ is not kept open then the Word succumbs
to the Great Illusion which operates in the lower worlds. If
the connection to its parent is maintained, then the Word
remains the Word of God and becomes a dispenser of the
living waters—ie. the Love and Life of the planetary ethers.
I would like you to try and view my three-fold
revelation into the mind of Humanity of the teachings as

155
a single unit within the Plan for the Restoration of the
Mysteries. The three stages of the teachings form part of
One Teaching that expresses through them as the soul uses
the personality. This central Teaching pervades the three
revelations to the mind of man and yet transcends them in
the same way that the Solar Logos expresses through three
solar systems and yet remains ever aloof from his creation.
Keep your connection strong to me, to the central point,
the eye, and watch the Plan take form.

156
24 September 2003
The Group Crystal
This group has been tested over the time of the Virgo
full Moon and I want to reiterate that I am pleased with the
results and encouraged about the possibilities that exist in this
experiment to forward a piece of my work and purpose. The
image that I want to place before you is that of a current being
passed through a crystal. You may think of this in relationship
to a ‘radio transmission’. The crystal is the seven-fold group
soul and the current is the ‘energy’ of Purpose—the energy of
Shamballa. This is why I have said to you that ‘transmitting
Purpose’ is a very different thing than ‘aligning with Purpose’.
Very few groups are entrusted at this time with the energy of
Will. This new and potent energy of Shamballa—new in the
consciousness of humanity that is—is what brings ‘livingness’
to the three worlds. It is related to the Seventh Ray injunction
‘raise the dead to life!’ Eventually groups such as yours will
become ‘instruments of resurrection’. Think through this
appellation.
As the current runs through the crystal it will of
course bring up any impurities in the crystal itself. These,
to you who are the very substance of the crystal, will be
experienced as failures—parts of the ‘substance of the
crystal’ are not able to pass the current through them
without breaking down, and so you become aware of these
breakdowns. I venture to suggest that many of you may
have experienced patterns in your own natures that you had
thought were long since purified, surfacing briefly. This is
not the result of a ‘falling back’ but of a pushing forward.
Handling a vastly increased ‘current’ ‘tests’ the system.
Because it is a result of pushing forward there are also vastly
increased resources to deal with and heal the ‘impurities’.
157
To access these resources however you must ‘realise’ your
success. This is why I have stressed that you try and
maintain the Hierarchical perspective through identification,
rather than identifying with humanity. In reality this is a
triadal perspective rather than a personality based one. If
the triad is pouring in energy (transfiguring) the personality,
it must learn how much current the three vehicles are able
to ‘take’ without failing completely.
In considering the analogy of the crystal, there are
two forces that I want you to consider. If these forces
are broken then the crystal itself breaks and then the
experiment is over. The aim is to pass sufficient current
through the crystal in order to purify it and to transmit
energy into the three worlds but not so much that the
crystal shatters. Do you understand?
These two forces are as follows. Firstly the force
that connects each of you as souls to me, your Master.
The dynamic of this force holds the group together
and is ‘Purpose’. Your occult ‘distance’ from me will be
determined by the degree of ‘Purpose’ or current that you
are able to pass through your individual system. Over time
you will therefore be ‘put in your place’ by the energy
of Shamballa—in other words you will find your ideal
‘occult distance’ from the centre of the ashram based upon
Purpose.
The other force is related to the attraction and repulsion
between yourselves as ‘functional components’ of the crystal.
These are not ‘personal’ ties but ‘organisational’ ties. You are
held together not only by your commitment to me as your
Master, but by your commitments to each other in terms of
your ‘function’ within the crystal—the specific ‘point’ that
you hold. I want to stress here that I am speaking from the
‘Will’ aspect and not from the ‘Love’ aspect. The Love and

158
consciousness principle is assumed to have already been built in
somewhat and is brought to more rapid flowering via the Will.
From my perspective I am able to gauge the group in
a number of ways. The first has to do with the intensity of
the current that I am able to pass through the group. This
is related to atma. Too much current and the form shatters.
I want to gradually increase the intensity. Therefore you
will experience from time to time ‘failures’ in the structure
of the crystal. It is crucial that you see these within the
context of the overall testing pattern as opportunities to
strengthen the two forces of cohesion. I will decide when
and if the overall experiment succeeds or fails, and you will
be given the opportunity to review your participation from
time to time as it proceeds.
The second way I am able to gauge the experiment is
related to buddhi and concerns the ‘quality’ of the current
that emerges from the other side of the crystal. The current
flows in and is rayed out from the centre of the crystal
through each of the triangular ‘facets’ of the octahedron. By
the quality of each ray and through comparing this quality
to the archetype, I am able to gauge the purification that is
required in order for the output to match the input.
The third way I am able to gauge the crystal is to see
how far the rays of light that emerge are able to penetrate
into the three worlds. This helps me to assess the ‘clarity’ of
the jewel—its degree of translucency—and is related to the
manasic aspect of the triad.
And so from the triadal perspective, I have three ways
of assessing the group—potency, quality and clarity. I would
recommend to you that you compare this process with
the study of precious jewels. Much is to be gained by the
comparison of the mineral kingdom and the human when
it comes to the development of ‘radioactivity’. The precious

159
gems are the pinnacle of development of the physical plane.
The human jewels are the foremost development of the
cosmic physical plane viewed from the matter perspective.
Consider the jewel at the apex of the rod of initiation as
it is visualised by those in the physical world and some
inkling may come of the composition of the true ‘rod’
wielded by Sanat Kumara.
You must each becomes ‘jewels’ in the crown of the
group life, just as the group itself will form a ‘jewel’ in
the crown of a larger group. There will be changes in the
composition of the individual and group jewels but no
change in the archetypal pattern. Do you understand this?
I must re-stress this point. There will be no change in
the archetypal pattern. It will not and cannot adjust itself
for the sake of individual or group units. The archetype
is not responsive to the forms that are built into it. That
is the work of Hierarchy—to adjust the mutable forms
to the immutable archetype of Shamballa. The archetype
of Shamballa is ‘summed up’ in the number 24. You will
need, in time, to relate the seven-fold nature of light or
consciousness to the number 24.

160
01 October 2003
Will, Consciousness and Manifestation
I would like to give you some practical information
on your work together within the esoteric sphere of fire
which is the group soul field. Just as disease in the physical
body is primarily the result of distortions to the inflowing
energy of the etheric, astral and mental bodies, so ‘disease’
in the three worlds of the personality life has to do with
distortions to the inflowing energies of higher manas,
buddhi and atma. There are of course those tendencies
inherent within matter that are resistant and block the
inflow, as well as problems with integration of the vehicles,
but these can both be more easily overcome if one basic
premise is realised:
Problems in the lower three subplanes of the physical
plane—be it systemic or cosmic—are best addressed from the
corresponding etheric level. When considering the five lower
planes the correspondences are as follows:
Lower Manas — Higher Manas
Astral — Buddhic
Etheric/physical — Atmic
These are the Will correspondences or those
concerning the First Aspect. There are also the better known
consciousness correspondences:
Higher Manas — Atma
Astral — Buddhic
Etheric/physical — Lower Manas
One correspondence concerns transformation and the
other transfiguration.

161
 There are similar correspondences that I have
given you regarding the relationships of the chakras. In
particular I would like you to consider at this time the dual
relationships of the chakric system. These are, from the
consciousness perspective:
Crown / Base
Heart / Solar Plexus
Throat / Sacral
You will note that in this case the ajna centre has a
linking function that relates the three pairs of dualities and
thus forms a triangle with each pair.
The Will correspondences I have already given:
Crown / Base
Ajna / Sacral
Throat / Solar Plexus
In this case it is the heart chakra which is isolated and
triangulates the three pairs.
In the dual functioning of these three dualities a
number of mysteries are approached. These concern:
1. The esoteric relationship between the 2 and the 4.
2. The duality experienced on the atmic, mental and astral
planes.
3. The inversion of the Capricorn and Sagittarius
Hierarchies.
Think through these dualities and the relationship
between Will and Consciousness will become clearer to
you. It will also become clear through your practical work
together as a group. It is important that you bear these
relationships in mind as you go about your meditative and

162
outer work, but do not seek to consciously ‘apply’ them.
I have asked you to pay attention to the flows of energy
between yourselves and between your group and others at
a ‘triadal’ level. As you develop the inner relationships—or
more correctly, as you recognise through revelation the
triadal relationships that already exist, this recognition
conditions the higher mind and then subsequently the
three personality vehicles. The lower mind must have been
developed in order for the transfiguring of the lower by
the higher to occur. However the mind is now being used
primarily as the lowest aspect of the triad and NOT as
the highest aspect of the personality. The abstract mind
is a receiver of the triadal archetype, and this archetype
naturally—as a result of the previous work done in
integrating the personality—has an automatic effect on the
three worlds. This effect becomes ‘subconscious’ because
the consciousness is focused towards the monad and not
towards the physical plane.
Think this through in relationship for example to
money, a theme that concerns this group as it enters into
the cyclic Libran experience. Saturn rules attention to detail
and has a function both on the mental and the atmic
planes. In the former case it is concerned with ensuring
that the lowest plane, the physical/etheric, is able to be
regulated by the mind. The practical outer result is the
capacity to budget, plan, spend resources according to
the Law of Economy and so forth. It is ‘management’ in
all its many forms and expressions. This stage reflects the
connection between the mental and physical planes from
the perspective of consciousness. From the atmic level
Saturn is used to wield the seven-fold energy of Light
Supernal upon the physical/etheric plane. Personal economic
management occurs from the mental plane. Transpersonal

163
economic management—concerning as it does the collective
and the greater good—occurs from the atmic plane. Do you
understand this?
An individual or personality based group therefore,
which is encountering financial difficulties would use the
concrete mind to organise the etheric planes (the four
lower mental planes reflect via the astral into the four
higher ethers) and this would have a corresponding effect
upon the physical plane. A soul group (and an individual
working transpersonally is always a part of a group)
which is encountering financial resistance is in a different
situation. If they have been engaged in the process of
White Magic and manifestation, they will have succeeded
in bringing a piece of the archetype down on to etheric
levels and are now faced with the calling forth of the
physical plane resources—ie. money—to ‘conform’ to that
archetype. A group in the latter situation do not need to
focus their consciousness upon the outer physical plane.
They should paradoxically INCREASE their subjective
focus—attempting to unitedly penetrate more deeply into
the energy of atma. The atmic energy will as a result flow
through into the mental field and via the prepared channels
of mental/etheric coordination, have an effect upon the
physical plane. Do you see? I have given you much here
that if contemplated will result in increased light—but
more importantly, if applied will result in an increased
potency upon the physical plane.
My work in the third phase of the teachings is
primarily about the relationship between the Consciousness
aspect or the soul and the Life aspect or the monad. This
is not because the form nature is seen as less important,
but because it is assumed that the soul and form have been
‘at-oned’ so that changes in consciousness have an automatic

164
effect upon the forms that are imbued with these changes.
This of course is not practically so for most people, but by
the time these teachings are being studied and applied on a
wider scale by those who have integrated and applied what
has earlier been given, this ‘at-one-ment’ will be increasingly
evident in their life expression.

165
07 October 2003
The Seven and the Five
It should be noted that there are seven forms of light,
related to the substance of the seven planes. These are
stimulated and enhanced by the twelve forms of light
of the twelve Creative Hierarchies, related each of them
to one or other of the twelve signs of the zodiac. On
this I may not enlarge as it concerns the mysteries of
the higher initiations. I simply make the statement so
that it may be appreciated by you as an occult fact to
the proof of which you may not yet have access. A
paralleling statement would be that the light of the seven
centres in man (when enhanced by the light of the seven
planetary centres) and the five kingdoms in nature (7 +
5 = 12), plus the twelve lights of the zodiac will produce
a consummation of “light” effectiveness which will make
possible the expression of the whole. This, through the
medium of humanity. This is a basic statement which
means little to you as yet but which will—in the next
century—form a seed thought or “key sound” for the
next revelation of the Ageless Wisdom.17
I want now to bring your awareness as a group to the
relationship between the seven and the five. My object thus
far has been to build a group that could begin to function
somewhat synthetically and provide a reflection in the
microcosm of the archetype which exists in the macrocosm.
To do this you must each be aware of the ‘type of light’
which you inherently are and with which you can work.
You must then be ‘related’ to each other in such a way that
a functioning whole results. You are differentiated as a result
of synthesis and find that you are more deeply identified

166
with your ‘self ’ than in an undifferentiated state. A ‘self ’ is
truly found only in relationship to other selves as well as to
the Self or the One Life.
In order for the whole to function as a unit it
must first of all be related to the planetary seven—the
archetypal energies of the Planetary Logoi who are
themselves reflections of the seven Rishis. This requires the
procedure called ‘the surrender of the centres’. The lesser
pattern ‘surrenders’ to the greater and finds as a result
that it is brought into closer alignment with its own true
nature.
Now the ray and zodiacal energies must be brought
into closer relationship. The seven centres in the etheric
body must become transmitters for the twelve energies
operating through the egoic lotus. This involves a ‘blending
of lights’—the light of the soul and the light of form.
When these lights are blended and fused, the soul is fully
manifesting—the ‘Word is made flesh’. Each chakra is
fully expressing a particular combination of soul energies
and therefore ‘organising’ matter upon the physical plane
according to an archetypal pattern. The heart chakra with
its twelve petals holds a synthetic point (in relationship to
the soul) and therefore a regulating point within the lower
seven. Each of its petals must become a distributor of one
of the twelve solar energies.
There are seven zodiacal signs that are more easily
related to as they express upon the seven planes of the
cosmic physical plane. The five Creative Hierarchies that
express on the cosmic astral plane can only be related
to via the wider group or ‘kingdom’ of which they are
the ‘ensouling’ energy. The relationship therefore of the
seven to the five concerns the relationship of the form to
its five-fold ensouling ‘life’. Kingdoms have ‘souls’. The

167
human kingdom must be able to integrate the soul life
of the three lower kingdoms. Think this through. Your
own chakras have a relationship to one or other of the
kingdoms and are thus affected by one or other of the five
liberated Hierarchies. The relationship of the seven to the
five and the twelve is intimately connected with the science
of triangles. My work with this group is ‘practical’—it
is applied occultism—and so I would like to give you
an instruction that will assist in making this relationship
more tangible to you and also make of this field a better
‘transmitter’ for Hierarchy.
I would like you to use the following ray correspondences
to the chakras to which each of you has been ‘assigned’:
I. Head centre . . . Shamballa . . . 1st ray . . .
1st & 7th races . . . Will; the goal.
Energy of Life. Synthesis.
Seven centres awakened and functioning.
In first root-race alive and faintly vibrating.
In seventh root-race fully awakened.
II. Heart centre . . . Hierarchy . . . 2nd ray . . .
6th root-race . . . Love; the goal.
Energy of Identification. Achievement of fusion.
Six centres functioning.
The focal point of the egoic consciousness of divinity.
The fifth kingdom. The Kingdom of God.
III. Ajna centre . . . Humanity . . . 5th ray . . .
5th root-race . . . Intuition; the goal.
The energy of Initiation. Development of inclusiveness.
Five centres rapidly awakening.
The focal point of personality.
The human kingdom, the fourth kingdom in nature.

168
 IV. Throat centre . . . Animal . . . 3rd ray . . .
3rd root-race . . . Intellect; the goal.
The energy of Illumination. Creating in the light.
Four centres functioning.
Focal point of the instinctual consciousness.
The third kingdom in nature.
V. Solar plexus . . . Vegetable . . . 6th ray . . .
4th root-race . . . Instinct; the goal.
The energy of Aspiration. Unfoldment of sensitivity.
Three centres functioning.
Focal point of psychic response.
The second kingdom in nature.
VI. Sacral centre . . . Deva evolution . . . 7th ray
. . . 2nd root-race . . . Responsiveness; the goal.
The energy of Magnetism. Power to build.
Two centres functioning; heart and sacral centres.
Focal point of vibratory response to the “eye of God.”
VII. Base of spine . . . Mineral . . . 4th ray . . .
7th root-race . . . Synthesis; the goal.
The energy of foundational Synthesis. Completion.
All centres functioning as one.
Focal point of evolution.
The first kingdom in nature.18
I would seek to have each of you deepen your conscious
connection to the ray energy indicated and to the three
zodiacal constellations that are connected to the ray in
question. These are:
Ray One: Aries, Leo, Capricorn
Ray Two: Gemini, Virgo, Pisces
Ray Three: Cancer, Libra, Capricorn
Ray Four: Taurus, Scorpio, Sagittarius
169
 Ray Five: Leo, Sagittarius, Aquarius
Ray Six: Virgo, Sagittarius, Pisces
Ray Seven: Aries, Cancer, Capricorn
Do not try to work all these relationships through too
carefully with the concrete mind. I ask you simply to establish
a ‘relationship’ in consciousness with the particular kingdoms
and ray energies given. Work with the higher aspects of the
Fifth Ray rather than the lower. Experiment here with ‘light’
and therefore consciousness and not with ‘matter’. The lower
mind will have the archetypal patterns revealed to it as a result.
By way of stimulating your intuitive approach I would like you
to contemplate the following from the Old Commentary:
In the chamber of death, the blue light of dawning day
reveals the group of workers who seek to raise the dead.
Naught avail their efforts until they blend the five great
forces of the Lord of Magic. When thus they work as
one, in unity complete the work is done; they fuse the
life-giving force; the dead are raised, and the work of
building can proceed. The temple can be glorified and
the Word be uttered forth within a chamber of life-
giving force and not of death. Through death to life,
from struggle in the dark to building in the light! Such
is the Plan. Thus do we enter into life that is a death;
pass onward through the door whose pillars twain stand
there forever as a sign of strength and truth divine; thus
do we enter quick within the tomb and die. Thus are
we raised again upon a Word divine, upon a fivefold
sign, and—springing forth—we live.19

170
15 October 2003
Money
What I am attempting to do with this group is
to organise matter via the mind of the group members
into patterns which reflect an archetypal pattern. This
will aid in the precipitation or externalisation of that
pattern in the three worlds. Similarly, you are involved
in a manifestation process which seeks to externalise
your soul pattern upon the concrete physical plane. At
a certain stage in the manifestation process the energy
patterns which have conditioned the etheric must draw to
themselves the outer forms.
On the physical plane, the response of the form to the
etheric pattern comes under the Law of Attraction and the
resultant flow of energy can be seen by those able as the flow
of money. This is why I have said that money is concretised
prana.
Today I want you to consider the following question.
What is the equivalent of money on the cosmic physical
plane? In considering this question I would like to make a
few statements. With regard to the five planes of evolution:
The Law of Synthesis is particularly active on the atmic
plane. It governs the relationship of the ashrams to the Purpose
as held by the Master at the centre.
The Law of Attraction governs the relationships
within the ashram and between inner and outer groups. Its
power is wielded from the buddhic plane.
The Law of Economy governs the relationship
between groups upon the outer plane. It is particularly
active upon the mental plane.
Money has a peculiar link with the sacral fires or with
the fires of desire as they express through the etheric body.
171
An equivalent process occurs on the mental plane and upon
the atmic plane. When these three processes are realised as
part of a single process then alignment takes place, Light
Supernal breaks forth and the organisation of the physical
plane reflects the Purpose held upon the atmic plane via the
mental plane as the intermediary and link.
Taking the above into consideration I would like each
of you to clearly formulate an answer to the question I have
proposed. This process itself will be very helpful to the group
as a whole in understanding the work I seek to accomplish
through it as a centre within my ashram.
Now I would like to give you some information
about the global financial situation. You are currently in
Switzerland—the reservoir of a large amount of the world’s
financial resources. Consider the information I gave you
about the serpent energy being the subconscious Life
energy of the soul. Similarly we might think of the vast
amounts of money that are tied up in as yet unsolarised
matter below the penetration of soul consciousness as
a form of kundalini energy. Kundalini rises when it
is realised as not separate from the soul. It is realised
as spirit in form and no longer suppressed when the
indwelling consciousness has matured enough to make this
identification. Similarly the financial reservoirs of the world
must be realised by disciples and initiates as Life energy
and therefore spiritual, regardless of the consciousness that
is involved—this realisation will result in their upliftment
or raising into the hands of Hierarchy. It is easier for
spirit to work through matter that is either completely
unsolarised or completely solarised. Semi-consciousness
results in a necessary duality between the inherent pull of
the intelligent life of matter (or the instinctual impulse)
and the spiritual impulse.

172
 If you think this all through you will see the necessity
of groups of disciples who have completely solarised their
own systems (in other words taken the Third Degree)
wielding the energy of Will to release the Life energy
and therefore money from those groups who have almost
achieved complete unsolarisation. What do I mean by
this? The aspects of the personality life that seek to remain
separate must hide their motivations and their resources
from the unifying light of the soul both in the individual
and planetary sense. Secrecy and darkness is common
to both the super-conscious as well as subconscious life.
Penetration into the former allows and is a prerequisite for
penetration into the latter.
What we are about to see on a global scale is a
relaundering of money. This can take place through a
process of spiritual reorientation when it is realised that
that which has been most deeply hidden away in form is
the energetic equivalent (although with reversed polarity)
of that which awaits us on the heights. Indeed it is the
energy which will allow the purpose to manifest. Watch
and see. Groups who work with consciousness gradually
educate matter about spirit and thus solarise it. Groups who
work with the Will use the polarity of spirit and matter
to produce results in consciousness. Think this through as
it relates to the method of individualisation which will be
used in the next system and some light may come on the
type of work I eventually have in mind for this group.

173
22 October 2003
Energy Transmission
Initiation is a result of the transmission of energy
into a prepared group field. My primary purpose for this
experiment is to make of you distributors, not only of
information about initiation but of initiation itself. I seek to
fashion of you a ‘rod of initiation’. The structure of this rod
is built not with form but with mental matter.
Through these transmissions I am seeking to assist
in the building of thoughtforms which reflect higher
archetypal patterns. When these thoughtforms and
relationships become stable and consistent they can be
used as a luminous structure through which the energy of
initiation can flow. You are by no means the only group
I am working with in this way. Masonry, for example is
specifically designed to serve in this fashion.
I have encouraged you to think of yourselves as a chakra
within a group entity and to build relationships within that
field based on rayological and astrological realities. This will
eventually create a small reflection in the microcosm that
through resonance can transmit the macrocosmic energies
within the three worlds. The result will be the readjustment
of form, the reorientation of consciousness and the eventual
resurrection of the soul.
Put simply, through the group I seek to awaken
souls—to raise the dead to Life.
The energy I seek to wield through you is ‘Light
Supernal’, a synthetic light that operates in a seven-fold
manner. Each of you will become a point of transmission
for an aspect of this seven-fold energy. You will utilise
or wield this aspect in your own projects and with other
individuals. Together you will wield the energy as a
174
synthetic whole and can apply this to the specific project of
Shamballa School and when working with other groups.
The transmission of this energy in the individual and in
the group sense should happen in three ways:
1. Invocation—a call from another soul, individual or group is
perceived and responded to at soul level.
2. Radiation—This is non-directional and is a result of
the stimulation of the group soul aura and it becoming
radioactive.
3. Evocational—your consciousness as a group is evoked by
me, your Master. I call your attention so that I am able to
wield energy through the group. This is actually the fastest
form of teaching and forms the core of the third phase of
my educational presentation—summed up in the phrase ‘an
initiate (group) knows because he works’.
You are not to attempt to direct this energy in
any ways yourselves, particularly through the conceptual
formulation of ideas about where it is needed etc. Respond
to a perceived inner call, allow it to be directed through
you or simply radiate it in all directions through the soul
field.
It is important to remember that you are not
distributing soul energy to personalities, either group or
individual. You are distributing the energy of Life—the
Third Aspect of the monad—to groups and individuals who
are in soul crises and seeking more power to externalise
themselves in service. Much of this work is subjective—it
involves the divine circulatory flow understood esoterically.
A call for greater aid is responded to with higher energies
distributed through resonant chakra points. This may or
may not be accompanied by communication either written

175
or oral. It might help to think of my work through you in
two octaves:
One is Mercury—the messenger, the communicator
of the teachings via the intuition to the receptive and open
mind.
The higher octave is Uranus—the flashing forth
of the energy of Life, beyond comprehension, beyond
understanding, timeless, spaceless, the ever present
foundation of the world.
I want you to consider the work of making
yourselves available and fit for the distribution of energy
as your highest priority—higher than the construction and
maintenance of any form in the three worlds. I did not
say ‘only’ priority but ‘highest’ priority. At least part of the
Wednesday meditation time should be spent linked as a
group simply making yourselves available for transmission.
Ideally the three forms of distribution should take place at
three different times during the week. Wednesday should
be primarily the response to invocation—the conscious
distribution of energy. Thursday should emphasise group
radiation, and Sunday the group should be surrendered
to be used according to the Will of Hierarchy, channelled
primarily via the Master Morya.
When I am using the group as a field for transmission
it is important to resist trying to control the process in any
way—this is why I have emphasised the ‘surrendered’ will.
It may in time be possible to develop some awareness of
where the energy is flowing to. In the early stages however,
the dual process of awareness is not functioning and because
of the age old bias towards form, I ask you to keep your
awareness directionally towards me as your central synthetic
point and source during these periods of transmission
training.

176
29 October 2003
Source of Strength
There is a line from the Mantram of a Disciple that has
particular reference to the Work I have in mind for this group:
I am a source of strength enabling them to stand.20
Souls, individual and group, emit a peculiar ‘note’ when
they come under great tension. It is this note that the group
must train itself to listen for and respond to. It is not a note
of personality distress but of the central or middle principle
as it seeks at all costs to hold ‘heaven and earth’ together. The
personality is primarily concerned with purifying itself so that
it can serve as a fitting vehicle for soul expression. The soul has
an entirely different form of yoga to undergo—it must unite
two widely divergent streams (divergent in consciousness),
and this through the sacrifice of its own substance, the solar
life. When the tension gets too great the soul must choose
to primarily align with one or the other pole or become
torn in two, and this is how it learns through incarnational
experience.
It is the dedication of the personality which brings
forth the aid of the soul. It is the extreme tension of the
soul in service—the refusal to leave the battle field—the
willingness to be torn apart or crucified if necessary, which
calls forth the monad.
This group can aid in the distribution of flashes of
monadic energy to souls under tension. That is essentially
what the process of initiation is after the Second Degree.
It is the soul which is initiated via the inflow of monadic
energy. The resultant empowerment of the soul allows it
to take full possession of its vehicle, the personality, at the
Third Degree.
177
 Seek to train yourselves to be receptive to the cry
of a soul, individual or group, under tension. This facility
is the higher octave of the common capacity to be aware
of emotional stress and tension in the personality as the
emotional body seeks to bridge between the mind and
body. Psychology works with the latter, esoteric psychology
with the former.
In an earlier transmission I have said that your only
protection is to identify with Hierarchy. A group too, must
lose itself to find itSELF and I would ask you, during your
times of outward focus, to practice self-forgetfulness as a
group. During the time of inward focus I ask for your
surrender, and during times of outward focus I ask for
your self-forgetfulness. Both these disciplines result in a
decrease of self consciousness or the ahamkara principle, and
therefore a greater liberation of the essential nature of the
soul from its mental sheath or identity construction.
One of the energies of Shamballa is ‘organisation’
esoterically understood, and this energy is potently at work
behind the scenes bringing soul groups into functional
relationship with each other. The ‘body of Christ’ is being
organised. The Masters are working to create productive
links between their various different groups as the energy
of synthesis enters more powerfully. This is a synthesis in
consciousness which results in differentiation of function.
Think this through carefully because it is a key thought for
the Aquarian Age.
When identity is developing it needs to be somewhat
separative to define itself—this is individualisation. When
identity is secure it can be surrendered back to the whole—
this is identification via progressive initiation into greater
and greater ‘wholes’. Identity is a vessel created out of solar
substance in order for spirit or essential divinity to journey

178
from one side of the river to the other. Once the crossing is
made the vessel is no longer needed.
Seek as a group to merge your identity more fully
with Hierarchy and give aid to the New Group of World
Servers whenever you are ‘called’ to do so. This will
increase your capacity to respond to invocation and result
in a greater decentralisation. It will also result in a greater
realisation of your ‘place’ and differentiated function within
the body of Christ.

179
04 November 2003
Liberating Light
Things are not what they seem to be. Surely this is
the essence of the Great Illusion. It is why those imprisoned
in the three worlds seek alignment to Hierarchy, and what
the essence of the Hierarchical teachings are all about—the
presentation of reality as it appears from those who have
been liberated from the Great Illusion. Truth and illusion
cannot co-exist. The presentation of Truth if it is listened to
and acted on MUST dispel illusion. I want you to consider
at this time the fact of Mercury’s hierarchical rulership of
Scorpio. It is Mercury that brings forth the light of Victory.
It is this ‘light’ which dispels illusion. It is the release of
this ‘light’ into the wider field via this and other groups
that I am seeking to achieve.
All teachings once they are formulated into words
become part of the Great Illusion. They are useful only to
the extent that they still contain the ‘essential light’ that
inspired their formulation. This light has a ‘half-life’—to use
a radioactive term. It gradually decays as the mental field of
humanity absorbs the light essence and becomes ‘familiar’
with the presentation of truth. If this were not the case
there would be no need for further teachings.
Above all I seek to bring this ‘light of victory’ to
humanity. It is a ‘light’ that results from the combination
of the light of the soul and the light of the monad—
the essence of the monadic and buddhic planes. It is
not merely the light of buddhi. It is a ‘liberating light’
because it contains the essence of monadic Will. It is
in effect the result of the at-one-ment the Christ made
between Hierarchy and Shamballa. It is the light of Life
or Shamballa, clothed as it were, in the light of Hierarchy
180
or the light of Love. The release of my teachings through
this group at the time of this Scorpio full Moon is only
an outer symbol of the release of this light. It is NOT the
main event, and I would ask you to stay focused on the
esoteric side of what I am trying to do.
I have asked you to ‘forget yourselves’ as a group. This
is the essence of the Second Initiation in both the individual
and group sense. The little self is lost in the outpouring of
the soul’s focus on service through the personality. In this
analogy I, as your Master, stand for the group soul and the
field of fire you have created on the abstract mental levels is
a ‘personality’—a distinct identity that the soul is seeking to
work through. To allow this to happen the personality must
surrender to the soul. This is its victory. The soul must be
wise and loving and willful enough to elicit the personality’s
surrender. This is the soul’s victory. The light of victory is
the result of the fusion of these two victories and is both the
result of, and reveals the underlying light of Life itself. This
is why I have told you that my teachings on Shamballa are
perhaps my most important at this time. I am educating the
Third Aspect so that it is able to withstand more of the First
Aspect as it is channelled through the mediating principle of
Hierarchy. I, as a Master, have a particular responsibility in
this regard owing to unique combination of ray energies.
If you would seek to serve my purpose then I would
ask you to take your attention completely off the release of
the outer words. They are merely shells that have become
somewhat transparent because of the light they sought to
express. Focus your hearts, minds and will towards me and
through me towards Shamballa. If you do this out of the
motivation of service to your brothers and sisters, then you
will release a great light. When others turn to the word
shells they will perceive through their transparency this

181
light. Let me emphasise this point. IT IS NOT ABOUT
THE TEACHINGS BUT ABOUT THE LIGHT WHICH
LIES BEHIND THEM AND IS ABLE TO SHINE
THROUGH THEM. This is a dynamic living light and
the third phase of my teachings is to train groups to
respond to this livingness directly.
This, if you examine my transmissions to you carefully
over the last three years, is the training I have been putting
you through. Now it is time for you to be tested—to
demonstrate what you have learned. Can you forget
yourselves and hold a united alignment to that which has
sustained you and inspired you? Can the group personality in
its higher and refined sense lose the battle with the soul and
thus achieve victory? A victory could you but know it, that is
a result of and an integral part of planetary victory. Victory
is not created—it is recognised in time and space. Victory IS.
After this testing time you will have experienced
and will realise more fully that which you only sense
now. Groups undergoing initiation form an integral
part of the Hierarchical work. Thus their training is not
theoretical, nor is it quarantined in a school environment.
That is for discipleship training. The School in which
you are enrolled is the work of Hierarchy itself. You learn
because you are involved in and form an integral part of
that work. Thus your successes and failures are not just
relevant to yourselves—they create karmic strands within
the evolutionary history of the planetary life. Under the
Law of Destiny hierarchical workers share responsibility for
planetary karma—its creation and its resolution.
I have used the name ‘Mercury’ consciously. It is
my particular function within Hierarchy to distribute the
liberating light that results in initiation, in conjunction with
the Master Morya and The Master R. You can participate

182
in my purpose to the extent that you equip yourselves to
be vessels through which that distribution can take place.
I give you this commitment. I will stand with you and
behind you to the extent that you strive towards this end.
I can make this commitment only because it rests upon the
commitment of the Lord of the World to stand behind us
all without condition. This is an extension of the Father’s
covenant. Only one thing can result from such a covenant.
Liberation. This is why I say Victory IS. Lesser wills may
only create and perpetuate the illusion of imprisonment
in time and space. It is not my particular work to engage
unaligned wills, but to work through those souls and groups
who are willingly and willfully surrendered.
In closing I would ask again that you dedicate your
consciousness to this higher work over the five day full
Moon period. I would recommend to you the following
mantram during this time:
May the Holy Ones Whose disciple I am show me the
light I seek; give me the strong aid of Their compassion
and Their wisdom. There is a peace which passeth
understanding; it abides in the hearts of those who live
in the Eternal. There is a power which maketh all things
new; it lives and moves in those who know the Self as
one. May that peace brood over us, that power uplift
us till we stand where the One Initiator is invoked, till
we see His star shine forth.21
Do not allow yourselves to be lulled by its familiarity
but seek to contact the light that lies behind it. The light of
the world.

[One member left the group at this point in the process

and was not replaced.]

183
12 November 2003
The Fixed Cross
I would like to begin with some comments about the
Fixed Cross. The four energies concerned together form a
vehicle for the light of Liberation. This light ‘enters’ at the
time of the Wesak full Moon in Taurus. It proclaims its
identity at the time of the Leo full Moon. It is released at
the time of the Scorpio full Moon through the destruction
of the identity. It becomes part of the whole at the time of
the Aquarius full Moon.
This cross is definitely related to the soul and the
life cycles of the soul. The soul IS this light—it enters the
world through sacrificial love, it builds a form (the causal
body) that serves as a staging point for the introduction of
that light into the three worlds. It destroys the form and
releases its light, and then this light becomes the shared
light of Hierarchy. These are four points in the life cycle
of the soul: its entry through the solar heart (Taurus), the
building of the causal body—individualisation (Leo), the
gradual release of the soul from the causal body—initiation
(Scorpio), and finally the absorption of that light into the
light of the world—identification (Aquarius).
These four full Moon periods (which are particularly
potent when falling near the midpoint of the sign) can be
used consciously in the distribution work of the School, and
should be seen as a unified whole within the yearly cycle.
They form the Saint Andrew’s cross between the equinoxes
and solstices, and thus make the eight-fold initiatory field.
You should also attempt to view these yearly ‘wholes’
within the greater cycle of seven and forty-nine years. A
cycle began at the time of the Aries full Moon in 2000 and
will complete its seventh year in Pisces 2007. The ‘light’
184
or soul cycle therefore began in Wesak 2000, and so the
Scorpio full Moon of 2003 marks the midway point of this
seven year cycle. The Scorpio full Moon of 2025 will mark
a similar midway point in the greater forty-nine year cycle.
Think this through and some insight may come as to how
a seven-fold light is distributed through a twelve-fold field
with its three crosses.
With respect to the group itself, let me remind you
of my earlier comments that the group is undergoing the
Second group Initiation and that this process involves the
wider field of which the group is a part. At the time of
the individual Second Degree a contact with the monad
is required in order to master the potency of the astral
field. The group (with other groups) has just been part of
the release of a small portion of Shamballic (or planetary
monadic) energy into the wider group field. You will be
dealing with the effects of that release between now and the
full Moon of Aquarius in the yearly cycle, and between now
and 2007 in the seven year cycle—the first ray cycle within
the forty-nine year cycle.
Shamballic energy is always crisis producing as the
form nature reacts through contraction—the intelligence
within the form resists the inflow, polarises against it and
seeks to expel it. This is what creates the energy of battle.
The work of the soul as the mediating principle between
these two ‘lights’—that of Shamballa and that which is
inherent within the form—is to not engage the battle itself,
but to lift up its attention toward the monad and towards
Purpose. I would also remind you that it is this focus upon
Purpose that will create the necessary ‘insulation’ around
the group which allows it to serve as a useful conduit of
energy. You are not, remember, insulated from the energetic
effects within the group but ‘as a group’ you may be

185
somewhat insulated from the wider field in which you serve
if you keep the group focus and attention strongly directed
towards my purpose for the group.
Shamballa clears the way for Hierarchy, and once the
impact of the First Aspect takes place then what is most
needed are the energies of the Second Ray to mitigate the
harshest effects of the impact. Therefore both within the
group and in any communications with other individuals
and groups, see to it that the Second Ray and the heart is
emphasised at this time.
As your Master and through the inner group, I will
be emphasising this Second Ray inflow during the coming
week—see to it that you take time to absorb this inflow,
allowing healing and rejuvenating within the field so that it
may cohere and serve as a chalice for its distribution into
the wider group in which you serve.

186
19 November 2003
Abstraction
The group testing in serving as a transmitter of
energy is now entering a final phase. The first step was the
purifying of the group crystal in preparation for receiving
the current. Then there followed the release of the energy
itself. During the last week the emphasis has been on
the permeation of the Second Ray to offset the reflexive
reactivity of the Intelligence aspect. Now we enter into the
phase of abstraction. The energy, having reached its deepest
penetration into the matter aspect cosmically considered,
is withdrawn. The ‘direction’ of the current is reversed,
resulting in a vacuum effect on the mental plane.
The procedure is as follows—the light breaks forth on
the buddhic plane as a result of the blending of monadic
and buddhic energies—it breaks forth in the container of the
ashram. That light then penetrates into the causal fields of
the egoic groups and is registered in the minds and brains of
disciples as ‘revelatory light’. The impact of this light shatters
old formulations existing within the mental, emotional and
etheric bodies of groups and individuals. This shattering
releases energy that has hitherto being organised into these
patterns of thought and behaviour. This energy can now be
organised in new patterns which reflect the living archetype
more closely. This is achieved through the relationship of the
energies released to the source of the inflow.
In the language of initiation, at the Third Degree the
base chakra is related to the crown via monadic inflow. The
result is the uprising of kundalini as it seeks to relate to the
source of the inflow. As the kundalini fires rise they activate
and empower the chakras and burn through the webs. This
group is involved at present with the Second Initiation. It
187
is being used to assist in the raising of the astral energies in
the larger group field through the inflow of light—buddhic
light imbued with some essence of the dark light of
Shamballa. As such, the energies being raised are those of
the astral serpent. In order for these to be raised, the light
must break down through the mental plane and reach the
astral. The astral energies, recognising their essential nature,
rise up in response assisting to break the ahamkara principle
free from the causal field on to the buddhic plane.
It may be of interest to know the appellation applied to
the devas of fire whose part it is to tend the fires that
will later destroy the causal body. We need to remember
that it is the upspringing of the latent fire of matter and
its merging with two other fires that causes destruction.
These elementals and devas are called the Agnisuryans,
and in their totality are the fiery essences of buddhi,
hence their lowest manifestation is on the sixth plane,
the astral.22
As I have said in previous transmissions, it is not the
group’s work to engage these astral energies directly. You
will be insulated from them to the extent that you have
mastered your own astral field and to the extent that you
remain focused on my purpose for the group at this time.
You will not be insulated from your own or the group
astral field, and can therefore as a by-product of your larger
work, lift and master the group astral field as an ‘entity’.
You might consider this entity as all the unredeemed pieces
of your individual fields gathered together and requiring
the unified will of the group to lift. This lifting occurs as a
result of staying conscious in the causal field and holding
two relationships clearly in awareness. The first is with the
inner group, ashram and Master. The second is with the

188
astral plane. You must be aware of the lower energies and
be in relationship with them but not ‘identified’ with them.
Any identification will naturally result in a battle that has
its origin on the astral plane. Keep in mind that the energy
flowing through the monadic, buddhic and astral planes is
essentially one energy expressing through duality. On the
astral plane this duality battles, on the buddhic it at-ones
and on the monadic the essential identity is realised.
In meditation see your group standing in alignment
on causal levels within my ashram as one point within a
six-pointed star. The central point is a point of transition.
Above this central point visualise me your Master, beneath
it visualise those groups who relate to the energy of the
ashram on astral levels. You are in effect forming a vortex
of energy which can aid in the raising and purifying
of consciousness within the wider field. All those who
respond to the impulses from my ashram form part of that
ashram in a larger sense, regardless of the mental and astral
distortions in that response. The lifting of consciousness is
undertaken as an expression of the Law of Sacrifice. The
higher relates to the lower—the mental plane reaches into
the astral with loving identification. It does not seek to
judge it or repress it but to lift these energies into the light
of buddhi as a result of a higher identification with the
monad. In meditation form first the relationship with me
at the apex, and then seek to allow a lower identification
with those energies that seek to be lifted from beneath the
central point. Now throw your will upon the side of this
lift, connecting as a group and with other groups through
the jewel in the egoic field.
Let me draw your attention to the Second Point of
Revelation with which the group is now concerned:

189
 The Will is an expression of the Law of Sacrifice.
The second Point of Revelation is of peculiar interest. It
concerns the first contact of the initiated disciple with
the energy emanating from Shamballa and transmitted
to him via the Master of the Ashram with which he
is at this time associated… At the indicated second
initiation he receives a quality of stimulation which
enables him to “see” the astral plane as it essentially is;
with this revelation comes also the recognition of the
basic human necessity to “make it holy” or to “render
whole” that which provides the most disturbing element
in the existence of mankind…
At this point, he knows that he must, inevitably and
eventually, contribute something. He realises that he
must intelligently work towards the separation of the
astral plane from the six planes of divine creation. I
would ask you to remember, brother of mine, that the
star of creation is the six-pointed star and not a seven-
pointed star.
…As the needed service which must be rendered takes
possession of the heart and mind of the initiate, the
method is simultaneously revealed to him. This method
is the use of an “advancing point of light”; it is, however,
a form of light which can only be implemented by the
will; this will can only fully complete its task when all
three aspects of the will—as exemplified in the three
points of the Spiritual Triad—have all been sequentially
employed…
He discovers that he must learn the divine nature of the
destroying aspect of the Will; he learns that it is not
related, when demonstrating as this particular aspect, to

190
 determination or fixed intention, but is a fluid energy
which can be directed toward the plane of desire wherever
and whenever contacted; he finds out also that, in order
to combat this vast and vibrant astral world, an aspect of
light must be employed, and that therefore he is being
given his first opportunity to work with Light under the
inspiration of the Will—as do all the Members of the
Hierarchy; he realises, consequently, that he must employ
this aspect of light under the action—definitely directed—
of the Will, in order to bring about the disappearance
of that world as a sentient conscious entity; he knows
that he must primarily destroy the astral phenomena for
which he is creatively responsible, and that (having done
this) he must demonstrate his complete freedom from
the phenomenal contact of the astral plane at the second,
the third and the fourth initiations. This he must do
through the “advancing light” of lower mental substance,
and the activity of the buddhic level of activity; then to
this he adds the destroying power of the atmic level of
activity. He has to take note, in this process, of a certain
level of responsibility. Thus he can finally destroy (with
the means of the advancing light of the atmic plane) a
certain proportion of astral substance for which he is not
individually responsible but which is nevertheless related
to the group or to the nation with which he is by birth
or inclination affiliated. It is the united and synthetic use
of the three triadal expressions of energy which makes
the work of the world servers effective.23
You have been successful as a group in directing a
portion of this Light into the wider group field of which
you form a part. The result has been the destruction of
certain patterns that have been prevalent on both the lower
mental and astral planes. The work now is to lift the energy
191
released into a direct relationship with the realities existing
on the higher planes. The result of this will be a significant
increase in the vertical empowerment of the wider group as
a whole. In order for this to be accomplished the Law of
Sacrifice must be consciously applied.

192
26 November 2003
Synthesis Ashram
Let me begin with a few statements designed to orient
your thinking in this time of transition. As a group you have
been asked to release identification with the thoughtform of
the group and increase identification with Hierarchy, thus
decentralising your consciousness. You have been asked to view
your function as a transmitter of the energy of initiation or
Light Supernal within the wider field of my ashram. You have
been asked to hold an alignment to me, and through me to my
purpose, as a consciously chosen decision.
To the extent that you have been successful in this
process you should be beginning to gain greater insight into
the particular ‘note’ that I am seeking to sound through this
group. The initiatory energy released into the group at the
first stage of the experiment resulted in the possibility of
synthesised differentiation in the group life. You were able
to take up chakra points within the group without a sense of
separation from the purpose as a whole. Now, in this second
stage of the experiment, you are asked to fuse the group
consciousness with the ashram—to the extent that you achieve
this the group itself will find its differentiated function within
the wider field of groups that respond to the ashramic ‘note’.
Your primary relationship is with me as a Second Ray
Master because the field of the work you are engaged in is
educational in the broad sense of that word. However it is
with the energy of synthesis and the Synthesis Ashram that
the group must increasingly work. Therefore at this time I
would ask you to strengthen the triangular connection with
both the energy of the Master Morya and the Master R. In
viewing your work as a group you might consider the three
aspects as follows:
193
• The transmission of energy via occult meditation—First Ray.
• The teaching function via schools and via the dissemination
of writings—Second Ray.
• The spiritual demonstration on the physical plane
through centres which sound the keynote of the
coming civilisation—Seventh Ray.
During the last year there has been an increased
focus upon the First Ray component of your work, which
has been necessary in order to facilitate an expansion of
the Seventh Ray aspect. The penetration in one direction
allows for a greater expression in the other. You already
have in operation a triangle that is working with the stream
of energy via the Cedercrans material and the Master R.
I would ask you to consider making a more conscious
rhythmic approach along the First Ray line via a second
triangle—B, D, J—and utilising the Agni Yoga teachings.
Both triangles should consider their work as bringing a
stream of energy into the group field as a whole, centred
around the Second Ray synthetic note of my ashram.
You should also consider any triangles created with other
groups in this synthetic way, and allow time and the revelatory
process to indicate the particular note and quality of energy
being brought into the wider field by each group as a unit
within a larger life.
The group is entering a new phase of its work, and
I ask you to make a conscious effort to continue with the
decentralising process so that a wider purpose may reveal
itself. This will require a dual focus—the maintaining of the
integrity of the group field at the same time as you open to
assimilate and work with energies from the wider field in
which you can form a functional part.

194
03 December 2003
Integration
I have nothing further to convey to the group at
this time. You are in a period of integration following the
experience during Scorpio. My recommendation is to rest
before entering a sustained concentration at the full Moon
where it may be possible for the group to receive a clearer
vision of the work ahead.

195
10 December 2003
Light Supernal
The work of releasing and lifting has now completed
and the focus of the group’s attention should therefore shift
forward to the Aquarius cycle where the recognition of that
light will register more potently in the collective consciousness.
Pay particular attention to the Fixed Cross cycles as they
serve to reveal the nature of the group work beginning each
year with the reception of light at Wesak. Above all else this
group should be seen as a distributor of Light Supernal—that
particular quality of light which results from the synthesis of
seven Rays. The Fifth Point of Revelation should be studied
and adopted as somewhat of a motto or mantram by the
group, as it has particular and significant relevance to the
purpose which I am seeking to accomplish by working with
you in this way:
When the light of the seven Rays is blended with the
seventh Ray, then Light Supernal can be known.24
If you follow my instructions to you carefully you
will see that the first series of instructions were specifically
designed to produce the breaking forth of this Light within
the group process through the fusion of seven energies
focused as they were on a manifestation project. This second
series of instructions is designed to educate the group in the
distribution of this Light within the wider group in three
synthetic ways—direct transmission; education of others in
the process/dissemination of teaching; and generation of an
outer project designed to carry this energy onto the physical
plane. A good beginning had been made in each of these
key areas. One point I would like to stress in introducing
others to this work is that the Seventh Ray externalising
196
focus is crucial for success in achieving the first stage—the
breaking forth of the Light in the group field.
I would like now to give you some information which
will be helpful to the next stage of the group process. As
the energy is run through the group rod it results—through
experienced fusion at the centre of each chakra—in the
creation of a pathway or channel. Once the channel is
established it becomes easier and easier to use, and the
rod itself composed of group members can become more
intelligent and flexible in the way it works with the energy
flowing through it. In the meantime I have asked you to
make no attempt to direct the energy but to merely allow it
to be directed through you.
Another result of the flow of energy is that it naturally
breaks up and expels those energies built in to the rod itself
that are not conducive to the flow and need refining. This is
often experienced as energetic trouble in a particular chakra
area. The group should carefully meditate for example on
the deeper significance of the withdrawal/exclusion of the
throat chakra or Third Ray point just prior to the release of
energy through the group. In a similar fashion particular
attention should be given to chakric disturbances experienced
in the individual systems. This attention should be brief
but revelatory. By invoking Mercury and the powers of the
intuition, seek to understand what energies are needing to
be expelled or transformed in the system so that it becomes a
better conductor. The same intuition should equally be sought
when understanding the process in larger entities such as a
planetary chain or scheme. Herein lies a hint. Remember that
there is no failure, only refinement. This will be a great aid to
your psychological process. Expect, after the release of each
current of energy—daily, weekly, monthly, yearly—to undergo
a period of adjustment and refinement.

197
 I have indicated that the group should also seek to
become aware of the differentiated ‘note’ it is sounding
within the wider group, and to assist with this process I
would like to give you some information about the current
initiative underway in Hierarchy to which we give the name
‘The Empowerment of the New Group of World Servers’.
This is a definite and planned process linked to the release
of energy from Shamballa and to the circulation of this
energy through the three major planetary centres. Visualise
the NGWS as a circle of light formed in the centre of the
triangle of Shamballa, Hierarchy and Humanity composed of
those increasing numbers of soul-infused personalities active in
service on the inner and outer planes. Within this centre of
light visualise a pulsing blue-white core and make a definite
attempt to move into this core meditatively as a group and in
growing recognition of other groups sounding a similar note.
The symbol for the NGWS is a triangle containing an even-
armed cross and surmounted by a diamond, and the motto
has been given as ‘the glory of the One’. The cross represents
the Fixed Cross and it is with the release of energy through
the centre of this cross that the group can play its part.
The process of soul infusion requires at the Third
Degree a willful surrender of the personality will to the
soul, after it has been built up through the process of
expression in the three worlds. The key note here is the
willing and willful surrender. This process involves the
relation of the ajna centre to the crown and the gradual
elimination of the ahamkara principle which has been
hitherto directing the soul energy into the three worlds.
Consider this on a planetary scale, understanding the
chakric role of the NGWS.
Spiritual initiatives (used in the broadest sense that
includes all areas of human endeavour) are undertaken in

198
the three worlds by personalities under the impress of the
soul. Soul impression however, does not mean soul control.
Hierarchy, as the world soul, seeks to both inspire and
reinforce initiatives undertaken by humanity according to
the Plan. Because the control of these initiatives however,
rests with humanity as it begins to come into demonstration
of its own divine nature, the process is necessarily a
lengthy one. Hierarchy supports many initiatives but must
continually withdraw that support as initiatives crystallise
or move in directions that run counter to the Plan. The
support comes and goes, waxes and wanes according to
the immoveable purpose and the adaptable Plan. It is only
when humanity will be able to hold a fixed and willful
surrender of control to Hierarchy that the soul will control.
This is a gradual process within the life of the planet. The
NGWS demonstrates a spectrum of this evolving process.
On the one hand are those groups who have instigated
activities and created energetic centres that are primarily
under the control of the personality will. At the other end
of the spectrum are initiatives that are primarily under the
control of Hierarchy. This control is only possible through
the fixed, willful surrender of the developed personality will
of the groups involved. Think this through and a deeper
understanding of the training of this group may emerge.
Hierarchy needs more and more groups who are
willing to come under its control via impression. There are
many such that are astrally focused (with all the attendant
distortions) because the astral plane is along the 2—4—6
line of receptivity. There are relatively few who have strong
mental development. This is due to the nature of the mind
itself, which until the Third Degree is a dominating factor
within the three worlds. Developed mental fields that are
focused into the three worlds along political, economic,

199
humanitarian or scientific lines are becoming more and
more common and these can be empowered by Hierarchy.
Developed mental fields whose major function is to be
receptive to the Will of Hierarchy, and therefore can act as
transmitters of that empowerment, are few indeed.
This should be enough information to orientate and
stimulate your thought and meditation as a group. I will
expand on these themes at a later time.

200
17 December 2003
The Ajna Centre
I want to continue to give information on the role
of the ajna centre which you can consider within your
group as well as the planetary life. The ajna centre has a
correspondence in the life of the triad similar to the solar
plexus centre in the life of the personality. At a certain stage
in the personality life just prior to the Second Initiation,
the energies of the personality are gathered together and
concentrated in the solar plexus centre prior to lifting into
the heart centre. Similarly, prior to the Third Initiation a
similar process takes place with the ajna centre becoming
the point of focused attention. Let me make this clearer
through some diagrams:
Heart (2)
Sacral (3)
Base (1)
Synthesising chakra—Solar Plexus (5)

Crown (2)
Throat (3)
Heart (1)
Synthesising chakra—Ajna (4)

Some clue here is given as to why the heart chakra

is seen as both a channel for the First and Second Aspects,
and why Shamballa can be thought of as a Second Ray

201
centre. The crown chakra prior to the Third Initiation
is combined with the causal body itself making a ‘heart’
within the monadic system. The etheric heart chakra then
acts as a base chakra and the throat chakra is the higher
octave of the sacral centre channelling the Third or creative
Aspect.
The head centre of the Occident is beginning to react
to second ray energy and the ajna centre to fourth ray
energy and in this lies the hope of the race of men.25
I would point out that just as the energies released by
use of the first three phrases of the Invocation relate to
the Head, Shamballa; to the Heart, the Hierarchy; and
to the Throat centre, Humanity; so the right use of
this fourth phrase will bring into conscious, functioning
activity the centre between the eyebrows, the ajna centre
in individual man and in humanity as whole. This centre
begins to become active and to function dynamically,
governing and directing the individual energies, once any
real measure of personality integration has been achieved.
It is, as you know, the fourth centre found above the
diaphragm in the human body and the phrase which
awakens it (both individually and in the group) is this
fourth phrase. There is, therefore, a numerical relationship.
When used wisely and intelligently by human beings,
many of the blended potencies which the first three
phrases have made available are invoked and so made
available to the individual as well as to the group. They
can then be focussed for his use in the ajna centre. In
many ways, therefore, this fourth phrase of the Great
Invocation is of paramount importance to the individual
as well as to humanity, invoking as it does great and vital
potencies and indicating process (Sacrifice) and purpose,

202
 plus the identification of the unit and the group with
the basic intent of manifestation.26
Once the ajna centre is functioning in its own right
then the leaders of humanity will focus their attention
together as the ajna centre of the planet and become the
directing and guiding influence within the life of the three
worlds. The outer expression of this can be seen in the
gradual synthesis of the best of human thought on the
guiding principles that should underlie planetary existence.
It is seen in the numerous groups building thoughtforms
on right human relationships, environmental charters, global
governance and international law. Eventually these groups
will synthesise together and become in effect a governing
body within humanity. Their authority will not stem from
any organisational affinities but the clear note of illumined
thought guided by the principle of the greater good and
therefore under soul impression. The keynote of the group
as I have said, is the ‘Glory of the One’ and the quality
they will radiate will be forgiveness. Forgiveness here should
not be understood in the usual sense of solar plexus to
heart energy. This is the lower octave for humanity. The
higher forgiveness is in the sense of ‘to give for’ and is an
expression of the Law of Sacrifice. Having gained power
(the mental power given by the ajna centre as distinct
from the emotional power wielded through the solar plexus
centre) and a point of synthesis, that power is willingly
surrendered to the good of the whole, it is impressed upon
the consciousness via the will of the soul or atma.
In the global situation, this will allow a greater fusion
between the crown and the ajna centre. The ajna centre has
synthesised the lower five chakras and therefore becomes the
representative of the best of the Third Aspect, Humanity.
The Hierarchy is now represented by the triad operating
203
through the causal body, and Shamballa represents energy
flowing from the planetary monad. The Masters of the
Fifth Degree who find their place of operation on the atmic
plane stand as a point of fusion between Hierarchy and
Shamballa. They are linked with the Third Degree initiates
who represent the point of fusion between Hierarchy and
Humanity. The will of Humanity is aligned with the Will
of Shamballa via the will of Hierarchy. This alignment of
wills is necessary for the breaking forth of the Fourth Ray,
and much should be looked for along this line prior to
2025. Remember too, that the United Nations is basically a
Fourth Ray organisation.
In order for the keynote of forgiveness to sound more
strongly through the ajna centre the Second Aspect must
be more fully developed. The heart centre broadens the
individual focus of the solar plexus. The soul itself broadens
the individual focus of the ajna centre. Accordingly I seek
to bring these three ideas together in your minds:
• Light Supernal (the directing energy).
• Forgiveness (the quality of consciousness being developed).
• The ajna centre (focus for transmission of energy).
These three ideas are linked through the planet
Mercury which rules the ajna centre just prior to the Third
Initiation. You should also bear in mind that Venus is
related to the solar plexus centre representing the sacrificial
descent of solar energy into the lower three worlds prior to
its lifting to the heart and eventually to the causal body. In
the two eyes lies the symbol of the dual activity of Mercury
and Venus, the Fourth and Fifth Hierarchies. In terms of
the distribution of energy within the two triangles of the
higher and lower chakras, they form the central points. The
dual operation of the eyes links Four and Five and brings

204
them under the direction of atma, which is both the Will
aspect of the soul but also the Third Aspect of the monad.
Light Supernal is thus a synthetic energy, but is expressed in
dual fashion through the lower being via the ajna and the
solar plexus centres.
As a group you should now be lifting your attention
from the Second Initiation issues that culminated at the
Scorpio full Moon towards Third Degree issues which
involve the synthesising of the mental field as a point
of transmission for soul energies via the inner group
and the ashram. This process brings you into increasing
alignment with the key principles and energies which
underlie the group soul and are linked to my purpose for
your formation. For this reason I have asked you to pay
particular attention to the revelatory note of Purpose which
is sounding through the group, and to permeate the group
field with the quality of ‘forgiveness’ so that the formulated
entity of the group itself may lose itself within the wider
field of service to the whole.

205
24 December 2003
Sacrifice
The Christ, the world soul, is the great symbol of
to-give-for-ness. The gift that is most meaningful is the
gift of the soul itself. To give one’s soul for humanity is
to give the very essence of relationship (the soul’s unique
quality) so that the soul becomes a strand of the great
bridge between humanity and Shamballa. It is this unique
act that the Christ demonstrated for us and calls upon
us to emulate. Ponder on this thought, my brothers. One
cannot give what one does not possess, and one cannot
possess something and be it at the same time. To give one’s
soul there must already be a faint recognition that there is
something more—that one is something more and that the
soul is merely the clothing, the sheath of something more
essential still. Just as the personality life is sacrificed to the
soul and yet this sacrifice is not really a giving up but a
letting go in the name of reaching for something higher,
similarly the triad is the personality of the essential being
and must be sacrificed in order to gain a larger estate.
When one is done with the things of the material world
and identified with the soul then the lower possessions—
money, emotion, ideas—are given to those who need
them most. When one is done with triadal assets they are
similarly given away—all is sacrificed in the reaching for
that which is deemed the most essential. Thus it could
be said for those on the fast path, sacrifice is bliss. There
is only a joyful release of outworn garments to reveal the
shining beauty of the wearer beneath. While this stage of
release from the triad lies far ahead, it is useful to orientate
the consciousness in this direction and at high moments
of meditation to willfully seek to stand ever freer from
206
one’s vehicles. This practise increases the vertical capacity
of alignment, remembering that the capacity to contact the
monad does not mean one is identified with it. Once the
consciousness is somewhat stabilised on the buddhic plane
during meditation, the higher antahkarana can be travelled
through the assistance of a Master who himself forms the
gateway and can reinforce the monadic thread. The Third
Ray seeks to fully master the substance of each plane as
it ascends until it is able to fully manipulate the matter
found thereon. The Second Ray also tends to expansion
and the inclusive functioning of one plane with those above
and below it. The First Ray tends to focus primarily on
descent and return, opening the central channel with little
expansion of consciousness on to the plane itself as it is
passed through. These are the three primary rays of the
monad, and each is needed for rounded-out development.
This is primarily a Second Ray system and I am seeking to
develop the relationship between the Second and First Ray,
the Third Ray already having been built quite fully in the
early system as a result of being the ray of the planetary
personality. The legacy of the Third Ray development results
often in an over-development of the mental plane so that it
becomes a barrier to higher energies reaching through to the
three worlds. It is for this reason that many of those who
study esotericism can become crystallised through the over-
manipulation of the mind, and it is this tendency which I
seek to offset with the emphasis upon Shamballa and the
monad in the third phase of my teaching work.
Now I would like to give you some practical direction
in your meditative service work. I have said that I want
you to avoid attempting to direct the energy that is being
passed through the group field and merely to hold the
intention of offering the field for transmission. I seek to

207
expand upon this somewhat by trying an experiment. The
outer manifestation project at Highden has passed through
its major crisis of transition and a new phase of expansion
is underway. The essential jewel has drawn to itself a field
of fire which will continue to grow and expand and now
requires regular rhythmic ‘pulsing’ from the jewel as well as
the training of others to eventually take over this function.
The development of the entity which is S......... has taken
a somewhat different course. The field of fire is already in
existence and the task is now to essentialise a ‘jewel’ in the
centre to focalise the Shamballic energies. By contemplating
the different evolutionary development of the two entities
some light may be shone on different ray approaches to the
formulation and the eventual destruction of causal bodies
both individual and group.
I have been seeking to expand the identification of
this group into the wider group field for a number of
reasons. One is that, as the intensity of the energy that
passes through the group is continually heightened it
produces distinct effects in the lower worlds. These effects
are produced by the direction of the mind. When the mind
of group members dwells on a particular project or location
in the three worlds as part of its daily manipulation by
the indwelling consciousness, so the higher energies pour
towards that focus. Too much focus on the Highden
field creates a situation where the forms that are now
needing to be built around the essential energy cannot
cohere because they are continually being shattered by the
inflowing Life energy. This situation was desirable during
the early years of the project’s life but will prove counter-
productive if continued, particularly as the intensity of
the energy transmitted continues to grow. I seek therefore
to shift the focus of your thought somewhat. Individually

208
this is facilitated by a developing positive preoccupation
(mark that word) with the development of the self-initiated
projects of each individual as they lay the groundwork for
their ‘masterpieces’. In your group work I would like you
to attempt a general shift of attention for a time from the
Highden field to the S......... field. This is by way of an
experiment. S......... is undergoing a period of intensity in
its development and would benefit from this attention if
it is carefully directed. In meditation I would like you to
gently hold the image of a jewel or crystal forming within
the field of fire that is the overlighting energy. Another
image is of a ‘seed’ within the fire. This seed, already
present but unformulated, can come into greater definition
through this conscious attention. Let me stress that it is
not for you to direct energy into the field but rather ‘hold
a space’ for the seed to appear. This aid occurs through the
process of resonance. Attempt this gentle shift in focus in
your meditative work and your daily thought for a period
of time and share any impressions and outer results with
each other.

209
31 December 2003
Formation of Esoteric Structures
As we approach the Capricorn full Moon I would like
to give some information about the formation of esoteric
structures. Exoterically Capricorn is related to the skeletal
system and esoterically to initiation. These two processes are
linked. Let me give you some examples. In the biological world
we see the gradual development from amorphous organisms
to those with more elaborate structural systems. In starfish
for example, a calcium-based skeletal structure is laid down
along geometrical lines. We might imagine that the etheric
prototypes of these creatures were patterns of energy that
gradually resulted in a calcification of these stable patterns
into form. A similar process happens in the triad where of
course the most physical or dense plane is the mental plane.
Meditative groups, impressed by the archetype, form and
maintain patterns of conscious interconnection. Eventually
the patterns, if held long enough, ‘calcify’ in lines of thought
substance or mental matter. This mental structure, like all
structures, both serves to limit and liberate consciousness
at the same time. Limit, because once a structure is set in
place the flexibility of the organism is decreased. Liberate,
because when the structure is in place the organism’s conscious
resources are freed to work in higher substance.
Another example of this structured thought building
process can be seen in learning. Mathematics for example,
historically involved a great deal of ‘rote learning’ in the
early stages. The times table has been recited by many
generations of children. Once these patterns have been
‘hard wired’ into the consciousness they form the structure
which allows the mind to go on to understand algebra or
calculus for example. At the same time these underlying
210
structures create necessary limitations in the flexibility of
thought which become unconscious. Periodically the way
these structures are created gets transformed—we have new
maths for example that seeks to emphasise a more flexible
association between numbers as ‘fields’ or qualities rather
than fixed quantities. As each generation passes, more
complex and flexible structures are created in the basic
building blocks of thought which both enable and limit the
consciousness of that generation.
In building esoteric groups such as the New Group
of World Servers, a similar process takes place. My work in
formulating the global triangles initiative has its roots in this
very process. As I have told you elsewhere, there is a shift in the
basic esoteric structure of the planet from squares to triangles as
the planetary personality is re-patterned by the planetary soul.
This is a necessary part of the Externalisation process.
In the building of the esoteric structure of Shamballa
School the original pattern was a triangle which was formed
strongly at the core. This pattern was ‘anchored’ within
the learning field of the organism. When dealing with
patterns of this kind it is important to realise that it is the
archetypal structure that is preserved in ‘memory’ and not
the cells or units which from time to time go into building
that structure. In the physical world cells are replaced in the
body regularly but the structure is retained. At this stage in
the group life another structure has been built and tested
and is now ready to be ‘anchored’ within the psyche of the
organism. That structure is the six-pointed star constructed
out of two interlaced triangles and built around a seventh
synthetic point. Specifically you have a First and Seventh
Ray triangle structured around a Second Ray point, thus
bringing the energies of synthesis into play. This formation
has been tested at the time of the Scorpio full Moon.

211
Higher energies ran through the crystal, as it were. The
energy pattern is now ready to be sealed into the group
‘memory’ at the time of the Capricorn full Moon.
This is why Capricorn is associated with initiation.
Initiation is an expansion of consciousness, but this
expansion is facilitated by a simultaneous solidification of
consciousness patterns. Between initiations the consciousness
of the individual or group is struggling to hold a higher
point of vibration or tension—at first only held at high
points in meditation, but eventually sustained as a stable
focus in day-to-day awareness. Initiation seals this ‘vibratory
lesson’ so that the resources of the individual or group are
able to use this as a base for further expansions.
These instructions on group process will be valuable to
other groups precisely because they address the precipitation
of archetypes into form. Different ashrams and different
groups will express different patterns but the process is the
same. Hierarchy seeks to generate reflections of precipitating
archetypes within the consciousness of humanity, and then
by externalising a piece of the Plan through these archetypal
formations it builds ‘learning’ into the racial memory.
This is also why I have asked the group to focus
awareness on the S......... field at this time. Fields of energy
are like the amorphous biological organisms just prior to the
calcification of a skeleton. Patterning can be aided through
a process that Rupert Sheldrake termed ‘morphic resonance’
which is in effect an acceleration of learning patterns via
vibratory induction. A similar process occurs in chemistry
when a crystal is dropped into a super-saturated solution.
As you know, the outer esoteric schools have been
structured around a light and dark cycle during the course
of the year—an inbreath and an outbreath. In the northern
hemisphere the cycle is opposite to that in the southern

212
hemisphere. Thus Capricorn is a sign of beginnings and
endings. The lesson of the interlaced triangles is the
capacity to see both poles as expressions of one underlying
process. Capricorn and Cancer are the gateways in and
out. Abstraction and precipitation, ascent and descent of
consciousness are part of one process. You have had this
direct experience in the life of the School this year. This
mystery is intrinsic to the externalisation and reappearance.
The precipitation of solar archetypes into form is coincident
to the penetration of the soul into monadic realms. They
are one and the same process, and it is this process which
will allow the Christ to ‘reappear’ on a global scale. Think
this through, for it underlies the seven-fold field. Spirit and
matter form an interlocked and complementary pairing of
Shiva and Shakti. This is ever true but must be ‘realised’
by the soul, who stands at the midway point. It is this
‘realisation’ which I seek to have ‘sealed’ within the group
life—not as a theoretical concept but as one proven and
tested by practical experience in manifestation on behalf of
the Plan. Think through the process that has happened at
Highden in this regard.
Accordingly, at the period of the full Moon I would
have you hold this pattern of the six-pointed star strongly
in your group consciousness and offer it in service to
Hierarchy and in willingness for it to be ‘seared’ into the
group organism. Keep your focus internalised within the
group ring-pass-not prior to an expansion into the wider
field during Aquarius. Let your attention then come off
this pattern and be open to the next phase of learning. Let
it fall below the threshold of consciousness as it were, in
a similar way to learning the times table. It will then have
been ‘built in’ and form part of the instinctual solar wisdom
of the group.

213
01 January 2004
Externalisation
I have little to communicate to the group concerning
its internal functioning at this time. The requisite point
of tension is being held and it only remains for you to
continue to hold it through the full Moon period. The
quality of ‘stillness’ is much to be sought after at this time,
particularly as it relates to the mental field. The rays of
Capricorn are 1—3—7 as you know, and it is the focused
stillness required of the Third Ray which allows for the
energies of the First Ray and plane to penetrate down into
the etheric/physical and anchor the archetypal spiritual
energies in form.
Let me give you then some Hierarchical perspective
on the planetary work. The Externalisation process is well
under way, and from the inner worlds the educational
work of Hierarchy is apparent everywhere in the light-filled
higher mental field of the planet. Networks based on the
principle of Goodwill are everywhere to be seen and there is
a perceptible shifting of power from the old networks based
upon personality control to those operating under differing
degrees of soul control. One thing is most definitely
required at this point in evolutionary time in order to
speed up this process. This could be termed ‘spiritual
organisation’. As you know ‘organisation’ is one of the
three qualities of Shamballa and yet it is quite different in
expression than the way the term is commonly understood
from a personality perspective. The most useful analogy
is the formation of the nervous system within the human
body. Triadally, the higher mental field is the physical body
organised in egoic groups. The buddhic field is the triadal
astral body and unifies the operation of the egoic groups by
214
infusing them with the cohering energy of Love. This loving
mind allows for egoic groups to ‘see themselves’ within the
inclusive whole of the ashram. The atmic field transmits the
energy of Will into the triadal astral and physical bodies.
To the inner eye the egoic groups are seen as specific
geometrical forms which are infused and surrounded with
the ashramic currents unifying and informing them from the
buddhic plane. Stable structures of consciousness within a
lighted field—the sphere of the one great ashram. The nervous
system which communicates the Will of God within this great
sphere is seen as blue-white electric fire flashing through the
spiral-cyclic currents and connecting egoic groupings via the
jewels in the centre of all structures from an ashram to an
individual lotus. There is in essence only one jewel, and it is
this one identity realising itself and responding to Shamballic
energy which is behind the idea of ‘straight knowledge’. The
Will of God is registered simultaneously through the whole
system not as intellectual perception but as the galvanisation of
the system as a whole in concerted action that is in alignment
with the inspiring Will. The ashram ‘thrills’ and the underlying
synthesis is revealed to the consciousness of the whole in
hindsight. The analogy within the personality system can be
seen at times of great danger to the survival of the organism.
The galvanisation occurs from the lower instinctual expression
of the will, sudden action is taken and after the crisis is over
there is often a period of adjustment (the post-traumatic stress
syndrome) where the emotions and the consciousness seek to
integrate what has occurred and to recover from the effects of a
sudden inflow of will.
The field of the ashram undergoes a similar process of
adjustment to the inflowing Will of Shamballa. Over time
the consciousness is able to sustain greater and more regular
impacts as the spiral-cyclic nature responds positively to the

215
direct straight-line energy of the Will. The occasional flashes
of electric fire are gradually replaced with stable currents of
electrical energy which become the nerves of the triadal life
and allow for the continual flowing in of the organisational
energy of Shamballa. Think this through. The ‘flashes’ of
the Will which thrill from time to time are not a result of
the nature of Will. It does not ‘flash’ on and off. Rhythm
is a result of consciousness and not of LIFE. LIFE IS
persistent, eternal and ever present. The capacity of form to
respond to LIFE is however inconsistent and intermittent.
The buddhic consciousness that links form and Life operates
spirally to increase the capacity of the form to respond to
Life via an increasing rhythm of contact. As consciousness is
able to identify more and more with the Life principle there
are less and less intervals between contact until a stable
current is maintained.
Once these stable networks of Will energy are
established within the triadal life and expressing in the outer
world through the New Group of World Servers, then you
will see the emerging culture and civilisation based upon
direct conscious response to the Will of God precipitate
rapidly.
The purpose of this discourse is to emphasise to your
consciousness the focus of the current work. Seek to build
your capacity to become more and more a consciously
operating part of this rhythmic building of the nerves of
the Will-to-Good within the planetary body of Goodwill.
Remembering that the Will itself is not rhythmic in essence
but only in expression, and that this expression is the result
of the close connection between the First and the Seventh
Rays.

216
14 January 2004
Constellation
The full Moon has seen the ‘constellating’ of the
archetypal pattern of the six-pointed star in the group field.
Constellations as they are understood by humanity normally
have something to do with the projection into the heavens of a
thoughtform that links certain star formations together around
a particular story or myth. A true constellation is created by
the consciousness and will of the beings who are the life of
the stars to unitedly project some purpose or archetype into
the mind of humanity. Truly it is said that the stars ‘name’
themselves.
You are building as a group to the completion of this
second phase of the initiation work I have been guiding
you on. Let me reiterate for you the process to date. The
first phase had to do with the introduction of a particular
type of energy into the group field. This energy is ‘Light
Supernal’ or the light of Life itself. The first phase of the
work was completed when this energy was released into
the group making each of you ‘carriers’ in a holographic
sense of this archetype, even if it was not registered in your
consciousness.
The second phase of the group initiatory process had
to do with the release of this energy into the wider world
group of which you are a part. This involved a conscious
process of commitment, not so much to an outer project as
in the first phase, but to me, the inner coordinating point
and purpose of the group life. The First group Initiation
involved the birthing of an energy into the group. The
Second involved the group serving this energy by shedding it
abroad in service. You are in the final stages of this process
as you build to the Aquarius full Moon. At the time of
217
the Scorpio full Moon the light was released—this created
polarisation as the wider field opened in response, or rejected
the energy. The testing process complete, the anchoring of
the archetype was accomplished in Capricorn. What remains
is the sharing in the ‘waters of Life’ with the community of
those responsive to it at the time of Aquarius.
There is a third phase to these instructions on group
initiation. It involves the working of this energy through a
‘constellation of constellations’. This is one of the reasons
that I have drawn your attention to the S......... field at this
time—that field is ‘constellating’ in the same way that suns are
birthed together out of gas clouds. A star is the precipitation
and focalisation of the generalised light found on the buddhic
plane into a specific lens for service in the three worlds. As
the ‘field of fire’ which is the entity S......... manifests itself,
it requires the organisation of that field into a constellation
of suns. Each sun is consciously formed around a specific
purpose—a purpose quantified in relation to the outer project.
A number of such entities as Highden and S......... are
in different stages of manifestation. I propose to work with
a constellation of such constellated entities in the next phase
of this work. Each entity will have its own keynote, but the
note they will share is the connection with the energy of
‘Life’ and of ‘Light Supernal’. The release of this light from
the Shamballa School group at this time is in the nature of a
call. Response to a note is the result of similarity of inherent
vibration. Your work therefore at this time is to share in a
wider sense of community and to pay attention to where
similarity of vibration is apparent. There is only however the
need for the recognising of this similarity, and no thought or
action should be taken of an organising nature whatsoever.
That will be my function and will involve the cooperation of at
least two other Masters.

218
21 January 2004
All is Well
My brothers in the work of externalisation, for such I
may now address you. It is time for you to stand together and
witness the results of your labours over the last cycle. I have
called you to a great experiment which has not been without
trial and testing. I have formed a deeper and more direct
alignment with each of you over this time, and you will be able
to recognise this and register it in your individual systems each
in his own way. I am pleased with the results of the experiment
and am in a position to assess that result in terms of purpose
and the wider ashramic project. Your alignment to that
purpose and your willingness to open to it with commitment
and without having a similar overview, is received by me with
gratitude and appreciation. The energy that has entered into
and been distributed through the group field is most subtle
and at the same time extremely potent in effect. This effect
flows from the top down and takes time to work through the
outer fields, bringing up resistance and clearing the way for the
waters of Life.
The image of the group as an overflowing chalice will
be the most effective symbol for you at this time. The times
of greatest challenge in the cycle of work I have attempted to
achieve through the group at this time, is over. The time of
fulfilment is at hand. The forces of resistance have been broken
and it remains for you to flow the healing waters throughout
the wider group fields of which you are a part.
Adopt the following mental attitude. ‘Victory (for this
cycle) has been achieved.’ This will mean different things for
each of you, and has meanings unknown to you as well. Let
the victors be magnanimous in their achievement, and flow
forth the Life-giving waters to all who have engaged in the
219
battle, on whatever side. In your personal systems see to it
that buddhi flows through those parts of your own nature that
have ‘given up’ their lesser realities to the inflowing Life, and
you will see that when the soul is victorious ALL share in this
victory. In the Agni Yoga teachings there is mention of the
‘chalice of attainment’ poured forth on four sides. Begin to
pour my brothers, for the chalice is full.
In asking you to adopt this attitude I am asking for a
similar commitment to holding the mind steady in the light
as I asked at the beginning of the experiment with regard to
your decision that your contact with me was real. I tell you
that victory has been achieved and your work is to hold this
reality steady despite any appearances to the contrary in the
three worlds. The inner victory is still working out, and your
minds are the directing agency for that flow. To the extent that
you are able to hold your own vehicles under soul control I
ask you to have only this seed thought for the month ahead.
“All is well. All is very well. I pour the grace and blessing of
this wellness into the world.” This is not a positive thinking
affirmation but the dawning recognition of a successful
outcome of a cycle of hard work. Naturally this ‘wellness’ exists
in its completeness in Shamballa, and is an expression of that
Light Supernal and the peace which passeth understanding.
By bringing that experience of ‘wellness’ through the triad and
holding it steady upon the higher mental plane, the group is
able to be a conduit of that energy into the three worlds.
I have asked you to treat this process as a scientific
experiment and then to evaluate the results. This is the final
stage of the experiment. By the end of the month you will
be in a position to ‘know’ that which you have heretofore
had to have faith in. Let the experiment run its course and
then assess. This is where I can allow myself a teacher’s
satisfaction—the satisfaction of knowing that what you

220
have sought for and trusted in, in the deepest part of your
being, is not only real but that this reality will be revealed
to you in ways that will surpass your hopes and provide
a solid foundation for your next ascent into the spiritual
realities. At the same time, and more importantly, the
higher energies have stable vehicles to pour forth through
into the world. Thus are reliable co-workers in the evolution
of the planet grown in the gardens of the Masters. Thus
can you likewise grow those who reach towards you with
faith and commitment. Ask for their commitment. Ask for
the experimental and temporary suspension of their doubts
and fears. Seek their willingness to become co-workers and
fashion for themselves the chalice of attainment. And when
it is fashioned, pour forth the waters of Life and Love
which have in their turn been poured forth into you. In
full measure.
A part of the ancient mystery is called “the Chalice of
Attainment.” A four-sided chalice was filled with the juice of
the pomegranate. The inner surface of the vessel was covered
with silver and the exterior was made of red copper. The
affirmation of attainment was signified by the raising of the
chalice. Then the juice was poured on all four sides, as the
symbol of readiness to serve the general good without end.
Helena Roerich, Agni Yoga, Verse 462

A condition of complete simplicity
Costing not less than everything
And all shall be well
And all manner of things shall be well
When the tongues of flame are in-folded
Into the crowned knot of fire
And the fire and the rose are one.
T.S. Eliot, “Little Gidding”, The Four Quartets

221
28 January 2004
Organisation
In the evolution of the spiritual organism which is
Hierarchy/Humanity there is a gradual process of ‘organ-isation’
which is one of the three key energies of Shamballa. For organs
to form, cells must be called forth from a more generalised
function within the organism to a more specialised one. This
is the nature of evolution from single-celled organisms to the
complex unity which is a human being. Cells are called to a
higher work. From humanity the NGWS is being formed.
From the ashrams, the Synthesis Ashram must be formed.
From the network of Goodwill, the nerves carrying the Will-
to-Good must be created. Out of the many esoteric groups
in the world, those responding to ‘Light Supernal’ must be
organised. All this requires an upliftment—a raising of cells to
a higher function so that they are able to carry more spiritual
energy in service to the Plan. The Victory I spoke of last week
has to do with the prolonged sustaining of a higher energy in
the presence of a lower one, so that the inherent resistance of
the lower pattern is broken and cells are able to shift into a
higher pattern. This is a form of initiation.
On the path of initiation, patterns that once served
the greater good quickly become limitations which must
be outgrown if the indwelling life is to continue to ascend.
This is true in both the individual and the group life. The
planetary soul must release the ‘prisoners of the planet’.
Freedom is not possible when parts of the consciousness
are still contained within or identified with a thoughtform.
This may be a materialistic thoughtform which tends toward
involution, or a spiritual thoughtform that tends towards
evolution. All thoughtforms are forms however, and as long
as the consciousness is identified with them it is not free.
222
Esoteric organisations and traditions, including those centred
around my own work, are nurseries for growing liberated
souls. They hold relatively enlightened thoughtforms which
gradually help to free those who form part of them. They
are ‘sacred matter’ as opposed to non-sacred matter, but
they are matter nevertheless.
At any one time there are those souls operating within
diverse thoughtforms who are at the stage of being ready to
transcend them. They are responding to the synthetic note
of ‘Light Supernal’ or to the keynote of Life itself. Their
consciousness is awaiting liberation or initiation, in other
words. They are at the stage where, in the Christian tradition,
God said through Moses, to the Pharoah of Egypt: ‘Let my
people go, that they may serve me’. Now Egypt was a very
enlightened and structured society that served the evolutionary
forces of the planet, and yet God was wanting to free ‘his’
people to wander in the desert. He did not ask for that freedom
for all his people because that would not have served them.
He was selective, not out of favouritism or tribalism, but out
of recognition of suitability to serve a particular function. He
entered into a ‘covenant’ with his people on the mountain top.
A special relationship. At the Third Degree the soul is liberated
from the limitations of the personality. These limitations are
not all eliminated but they are ‘transcended’. After the Third
Degree souls ‘turn their back’ on this ‘Light Supernal’ to serve
within the three worlds but this ‘covenant’ remains, this special
relationship with the monad or the Life aspect.
Out of the different groups and organisations in
the world who have responded to my teaching work I am
attempting now to draw into conscious spiritual relationship
those souls who are ready to respond to this note of ‘Light
Supernal’. This response transcends all political, ideological
and organisational considerations. There is no attempt to

223
build alliances of any kind. It is simply a united response to
the note of ‘freedom’. Souls at this stage feel intensely the
limitations of thought no matter how enlightened it might
be, and are wanting to be free of it. They are responding,
little they may know it, to the note of the coming sixth
subrace, and may form a part of the seed of that subrace if
they are able to intelligently choose the intuition over the
intellect and thus station their identity upon the buddhic
plane. There they will find themselves grouped together and
able to come under true impression and become distributors
of the energy of initiation within the fifth subrace manasic
field. They will operate within mind but they will be
sourced beyond it. Thus they will be able to direct the
thinking of humanity—not via thought itself but via the
energy that inspires and clothes itself in thought.
This path leads out of the organisational structures
of the mind into the desert where the Word of God may
be heard directly rather than filtered through the traditions
and priesthoods of society. It is in this desert that the
individual soul comes into a direct relationship with the
Father, the monad, and develops the ‘straight knowledge’ or
lightning flash of the intuition. As you recognise this capacity
strengthening in yourselves you will recognise it more readily
in others, until a more conscious energetic network composed
of this flashing blue fire is created. I am sounding this note of
‘Life’ throughout my ashram, and there will be those who will
be drawn to it from many outer forms. They will arrive at this
column of flame in the desert, not so much dissatisfied with
the organisational forms they are serving within, but thirsty for
more. Continue to pour forth these waters in benediction from
the group chalice and add to them the note of Will—’Let my
people go so that they may serve the LIFE’—intending as you
do this the freedom of only those who are ready for the desert.

224
04 February 2004
Laying the Seeds
An auspicious date to end this series of transmissions
concerning the relationship of soul to monad, Shamballa
to Hierarchy, the fourth to the second plane. During the
last two weeks I have asked you to consciously pour forth
the Life-giving waters of buddhi from the chalice and
supplement them with the sword of monadic Will. In this
solar system it is within the field generated from the former
that the latter energy can be safely wielded. Through my
ashram the energies of Shamballa are stepped down through
Hierarchy and the Will is not therefore imposed. It is ‘held
in solution’ as it were—a more subtle and potent stream of
energy that is distributed like a current within the wide lake
of buddhi. It is then left to humanity to detect and respond
to this current like a fish swimming up a stream.
The combined use of these energies has a profound
effect upon the sixth or astral plane through reflex action.
The current from the second to fourth plane initiates a
corresponding flow from the fourth to the sixth. This latter
inflow results in cycles of intense conflict and tension on
the astral plane prior to an eventual victory which results
in an even greater inflow of the harmonising effects of the
Fourth Ray.
The experiment the group has been engaged in has
been the wielding of these energies within a wider field,
and therefore the development of skill in their conscious
application in service. The experiment itself is now over,
although you will continue to witness the working out of
the effects of your work in the three worlds. I would like you
to enter a period of review of your process over the last six
months. Formulate for yourselves the essential learning. Read
225
back over the transmissions and reflect upon any changes that
have occurred in your consciousness, as well as changes that
have occurred in your outer life. Attempt to crystallise for
yourselves the steps along this particular pathway, for it is one
you will walk over and over again in the company of larger and
larger sections of humanity.
There are three phases in the group initiatory process
which I am seeking to ‘seed’ through experimental work with
groups such as this one. All of these phases require a certain
degree of buddhic consciousness because it is only on the
buddhic plane that man becomes fully group conscious and
therefore able to participate in the work of Hierarchy as a
member of the Fourth or human Hierarchy.
The first phase of the work is the bringing into
relationship of the energies of the atmic and the higher
mental planes. This results in the release of Light Supernal
in its creative aspect within the egoic field of the group and
necessarily within the individual egoic field. This release
may or may not be registered within the consciousness of
the individual depending on a number of factors, but is
nevertheless far-reaching in its results, making the soul a
‘carrier’ of the energy of synthesis.
The second phase of the work has to do with the
relating of the energy of the monadic plane to the astral,
and this via the thread of the antahkarana or channel that
was opened up in the first phase. Necessarily it involves a
wider group field, as our astral connections are extensive.
The third phase of the work must involve an even
broader group process as it involves the relating of a thin
strand of logoic or first plane energy through to the lowest
or seventh plane. Once again this is accomplished through
the channel built via the first two phases of the work, and
has significant results upon the outer plane. Accompanying

226
these outer results is the full registering of the three-fold
process within the etheric brain. Together this series of
initiatory processes enables the highest and the lowest to
meet and is a result of the effect of the incoming Seventh
Ray upon the Fourth or human Hierarchy during the
Aquarian Age. Think this through, for an insight may
come as to the whole unfolding process of initiation which
humanity is about to undergo, and the founding upon the
physical plane of the Temple of Power which is the seed for
the coming schools of initiation, and will enable eventually
the First Initiation to be taken en masse in the outer court
of everyday consciousness.
In working with groups such as this I am experimenting
with new modes of teaching as a new generation of disciples
respond to my work with different equipment, and I am
laying the seeds that will eventually fully flower in future
groups in the same way that the work with my earlier
groups is being fully utilised now. As you will each know
from your own experience, there is always a particular
appreciation a teacher has for those who are WILLING to
be pioneers in the learning process. For my part I consider
the work to date to have been successful in terms of
achieving a certain result which can be viewed as the release
of a particular type of energy through the field. With regard
to the educational component, I am able to make some
assessments through the observation of causal development,
however the experience within the consciousness of those
involved is valuable, and so I would like to make what may
seem like a strange request. I would like you to share the
results of your review with each other and also with me.
How may this be done, you might ask? Part of the training
in the last cycle was for an intensification of the individual
contact with me as your Master. This is required if I am

227
to use the field as a synthesised yet differentiated unit. You
will have experienced this increased contact in different
ways according to your ray make up and development.
Simply endeavour to use the channel of connection already
established on a Wednesday morning and reverse the flow—
instead of opening to impression, seek to convey to me in
thoughts, words, images etc the results of your experience.
This will be beneficial to us both.
Humanity is beginning to realise its own innate
divinity and must eventually take its place as an equal
partner in the triangle with Hierarchy and Shamballa. In a
similar way initiate groups within humanity are a source of
information and energy flowing into Hierarchy as well as
out from it. Experiment and see.

228
Part Three

229
230
05 April 2004
ARIES full Moon
The Empowerment of the NGWS
You have been in a period of review which has been
helpful on both sides of this relationship and marks the
beginning of a closer cooperation with Hierarchical work. As I
have referred to previously, I am seeking to make of this group
a conduit of Hierarchical energy—specifically the energy of
Light Supernal. The educational process is a by-product of this
experiment in transmitting energy and not the primary goal.
I would like at this time to begin a new series of transmissions
to the group that will be given out at the full Moon times.
Continue with your Wednesday alignments as part of your
individual alignment to me and the development of your
chosen piece of work within the group endeavour. These
monthly transmissions will give you more time to assimilate
and apply the information. They will focus on the group as a
whole and concern inter-group relationships. A specific project
that the Hierarchy as a whole is concerned with currently is
‘The Empowerment of the NGWS’: The NGWS serves as the
ajna centre in the planetary life and receives a dual stream of
energy from both Hierarchy and Shamballa. The NGWS acts
as a lens by which the energy of this dual stream enters the life
of humanity. The work I seek to put before you as a group is
also dual:
1. I seek to strengthen your capacity to serve the Synthesis
Ashram through the conscious direction of energy. This is a
dynamic process and develops the Will.
2. I seek to integrate the group unit within a larger group.
This is a revelatory process that requires receptivity and
results in a deeper relationship with Purpose.
231
1. The first experiment involves the practical application of
the skills the group has been developing. Until now I have
asked you not to consciously direct the energies pouring
into and through the group soul. For this experiment I
seek to develop your careful and conscious cooperation.
Hierarchy works through disciples and initiates incarnate
on the physical plane as they are more deeply integrated
into the civilisation of which they form an integral part. I
ask you to make the following concrete experiment. Each
member of the group is to choose six other groups or
organisations that they consider to be a part of the NGWS
and wish to empower. The groups can be in any field of
human endeavour. It does not matter if there are overlaps
between group members. What is critical is the selection
process. This must be a blend of both mind and heart.
The groups chosen must not only appeal to your reason
but evoke a heart-felt response. The selection process will
thus be a test of the intuitive faculty. Once selected the
empowerment process must also take a dual form:
a) Subjective empowerment.
b) Financial empowerment.
Sunday is the day given for the First Ray as well as for the
money meditation. It is peculiarly the day of the week
associated with empowerment: You have been told that the
heart is both a First and Second Ray centre. It is also a Seventh
Ray distributing centre, as can be seen by the ray structure
of the Lord of Jupiter. There is also a significant connection
between Sunday and Thursday, the Sun and Jupiter, the soul
and the heart. Money is an energy and the concrete expression
of Love. Linking the highest with the lowest brings the two
rays of Aries—1 and 7—into full expression via the group
functioning as a Second Ray heart centre. Each member should

232
allocate a certain financial amount into the group fund each
month. This amount and the way it is distributed should
also be ascertained by a careful consideration of mind and
heart and will necessarily be different for each member. The
important point is to initiate a flow and establish a rhythm.
For the subjective empowerment process create a mandala of
the different groups forming a six-pointed star around your
group. The energetic distribution should be via the ajna centre
of group members. The ajna centre should form the apex of a
triangle connecting heart to the jewel in the causal body. This
lower triangle has a higher correspondence which has the group
causal field as the base, the atmic body (the creative aspect of
the monad) at the crown and the Synthesis Ashram as the apex.
2. In the first experiment the group is at the centre,
although the focus is off the group itself and on the
application of energy in service. In the second experiment
the group will not be in the centre. The centre is the
Ashram. It is for the group to find its right relationship
as one point in an ashramic six-pointed star. This process
also involves the applied use of the intuition, but the focus
is not outwards into the three worlds: The group gaze is
directed to the Ashram and through the Ashram towards
Shamballa. As the consciousness of the group is drawn
closer to that dynamic centre then right relationship with
other groups will automatically become apparent.
The higher correspondence of this dual functioning is
the work of the Registrants of the Purpose and the Custodians
of the Will in Shamballa. This higher duality operates on the
atmic plane and therefore requires freedom of identity from that
plane. Your lower dual functioning as a group occurs on the
mental plane and therefore requires the development of buddhic
polarisation which can be sequentially and rhymically obtained.

233
05 May 2004
TAURUS full Moon (Wesak)
The Duality of Will and Purpose
1. Custodians of the Will
Let me begin by repeating a quote from the last series
of transmissions:
What we are about to see on a global scale is a
relaundering of money. This can take place through a
process of spiritual reorientation when it is realised that
that which has been most deeply hidden away in form is
the energetic equivalent (although with reversed polarity)
of that which awaits us on the heights. Indeed it is the
energy which will allow the Purpose to manifest. Watch
and see. Groups who work with consciousness gradually
educate matter about spirit and thus solarise it. Groups
who work with the Will use the polarity of spirit and
matter to produce results in consciousness. Think this
through as it relates to the method of individualisation
which will be used in the next system and some light
may come on the type of work I eventually have in
mind for this group.27
I would like you to think carefully about this: There is
a direct relationship between the atmic plane and the etheric
plane. This relationship lies outside consciousness—concerning
as it does the Life thread—but has results IN consciousness.
I seek to bring the energies of these planes into relationship
through my work with this group. Here are some basic truths
that will help orient us towards this reality:
The soul is a field of consciousness between the
darkness of unsolarised matter and the darkness of the

234
monad. In this second solar system the soul is seeking to
expand in two directions. Outward results in the solarisation
of the personality and inward results in the empowerment
of the soul as well as its eventual elimination. At the Third
Degree, and to a lesser extent at the Second, the soul
must call on the monad in order to overcome the forces
of resistance in the personality and anchor fully in the
base chakra. The reason it must call on the higher power
is because the lower resistance is of the same energetic
equivalent as the higher. The soul alone does not have the
power to overcome the ‘spirit-in-matter’ without the aid
of the ‘formless spirit’. The lowest formless spirit or ‘Life’
expression that can be somewhat ‘understood’ or worked
with ‘consciously’ is atma, which being the Third Aspect of
the monad is the ‘form’ that formless spirit takes—if such a
relative use of these terms can apply. Atma is formless spirit
‘sheathed’ in consciousness—the anchor of life in the soul as
the soul anchors through the causal body in the personality
expression.
In the field of expression which is humanity there
is a growing capacity to work with the soul energies of
both Light and Love. This can be seen in the solarising of
the mental and astral bodies of humanity as a whole. The
energy that Hierarchy is seeking to introduce more fully
into the consciousness and capacity of humanity is the
energy of Will or Power. Once this energy is assimilated
then the synthesis of the three energies will reveal that
which lies behind them.
The lack of capacity that humanity currently
demonstrates in the distribution of the economic resources
of the planet has a direct relationship to the lack of
assimilation of the energy of Will or atma. The money in
the world is being blocked from flowing because of fear

235
held in the unconscious or semi-conscious intelligence of
the body itself. Love will not conquer this lower fear, only
Will can—the will of the soul.
Disciples and initiates up to the Third Degree are
still controlled in many subtle ways by this fear, which in
reality an instinctual fear of death, which is the reflection
unconsciously in matter of the instinctual fearlessness of
the soul. The combined result of this fear is a powerlessness
upon the physical plane. This powerlessness is expressed in
the many spiritual groups in the world who give Light and
who give Love and yet experience themselves in need of
money. They are—in their mass—the world disciple, not yet
initiate.
For this reason it is said that the true teaching cannot
be charged for. Teaching given by an initiate is freely given
as the Sun gives light. It is an energetic ‘soular’ distribution
of the combined energies of Light, Love and Power and
not an exchange of solarised matter (buddhi-infused manas
and astrality) for unsolarised. The solarisation of money
in the world will not come about through its enforced
redistribution no matter how subtle, but by its freely given
response elicited from Love empowered by Will. This is
a Second Ray group seeking to work with the energies of
the First and Second Rays. The education of souls is your
primary aim and not the production of outer events, even
at the expense of the Love principle. That is the work—
when required by a higher principle—of the First Ray
ashram.
In the first series of transmissions I asked you to
willingly direct your mental attention to my will. In the
second I asked you to hold your mental and astral energies
in alignment with that will and utilised the group field
in order to clarify a portion of the wider field in which

236
you work. In this series I am asking—amongst other
things—for your money. As before, you must distinguish
between submission and the surrendered will. That which is
submitted to is disempowering. That which is surrendered
is given back. In this case I am giving the money back for
you to distribute according to your own soul will, which is
intrinsically not separate although differentiated from mine.
Thus will the energy of money be ‘relaundered’—through
‘sacrifice’ or making sacred.
As I have stated before, I seek in my third phase
teachings to work with those groups who are able to take
‘direction’. This necessitates groups who have developed self-
will and therefore can willingly surrender to direction. Their
education comes as a result of that willingness. You must
clearly think through your participation, as at the beginning
of each of the previous transmissions. If you are not able to
willingly surrender it is best to not participate. Similarly, if
you do participate, do so at a level that stretches but does
not exceed your ‘willingness’.
I seek through your cooperation to empower
the NGWS. These are men and women of goodwill
who genuinely seek to benefit the greater whole of the
planetary life. They have developed some degree of
planetary consciousness and therefore of soul awareness
and are motivated to action in the three worlds out of this
consciousness. In empowering them Hierarchy seeks to
aid from both above and below the level of consciousness
from which they work. Those who have built the vertical
antahkarana are capable of being used to distribute that
empowerment.
As a group you will find if you carefully examine
yourselves that you work principally in consciousness. I seek
to extend your work in two directions. The higher aspect

237
concerns the distribution of atma via the group soul. The
consciousness of the group is surrendered for a time so that it
can be ‘worked through’, thus acting as a field of distribution
for the liberating Light Supernal. This energy entering a
prepared field via the jewel empowers it by galvanising the
soul, increasing its radiatory power and stimulating the
opening of the petals from within. It is the ‘First Ray’ aspect of
your work.
The distribution of money empowers them from
beneath and has results in the lifting and transmutation
of unconscious fear at a level which would surprise you in
its extent. It is not only that money is practically needed
for the work but when it is utilised as a spiritual energy
it has far reaching effects in consciousness. Most members
of the NGWS have some awareness of Hierarchy although
they would not all use that terminology. They are aware
that there are spiritual forces at work which aid them in
unexpected ways, but because of the stage of solarisation of
the planet and because of the attendant split in planetary
consciousness, spiritual forces are largely interpreted as
‘ethereal’ and ‘descending from above’. Initiates know that
all is spirit from the depths to the heights and therefore can
consciously direct the energies of the depths as well as the
heights.
Shamballa directs all the energies of the planet,
conscious and unconscious, but Hierarchy can only direct
those that are solarised. When money is so directed through
groups such as yours at the same time as the energy of atma, it
has a peculiar effect in those receiving. Because they originate
from the same source they contain within them energetically
a reconciliation of the basic dualities of soul and matter,
consciousness and form. This reconciliation has a profound
effect on the at-one-ment of the receiving consciousness,

238
whether or not it is actually aware of the process. The
consciousness or soul principle is being ‘fed’ from the Father
and Mother aspects simultaneously and it results in something
that I can only describe as ‘soul peace’. In that ‘peace’ the soul
flourishes and grows in a way that one or other empowerment
alone could not produce.
It represents a dynamic interplay of the First and
Seventh Ray energies that reconciles the discord in
consciousness experienced in the transition from Sunday’s
‘worship’ to Monday’s ‘work’. Think this through.
The result of attending to this dual work of
empowerment will be an alignment in your own
consciousness (and an increased awareness of anything
that is out of alignment) between the third and seventh
planes via the fifth. The causal body is the bridge between
the atmic body or physical monadic sheath and the body
or physical personality sheath. It is the soul of the lower
five planes and is crucified on the higher mental plane as
a part of the at-one-ment process between their energies.
Remember that groups working with the energy of Will
are working with the higher and lower life energies (which
are intrinsically one) to produce effects in consciousness.
Some of those eventual effects in your own systems are
likely to be:
• An increased awareness of and liberation from fear that has
its roots in the physical vehicle.
• A conflict and then a deeper peace experienced in the
soul or consciousness field.
• An increased identification with other groups and projects,
with consequent empowerment of your own.
• Increased kundalini activation and magnetism.
• An increased flow of money in to your hands.

239
 I have given enough here for you to assimilate and think
deeply upon. You are engaged in an experiment and have some
indications as to the reason for it and the expected outcomes.
Once begun, your work will be to follow the process through,
review and evaluate the results for yourself. This is the stage of
beginning, and a beginning always requires will. Free will. The
work to date is complete in itself and no assumptions are made
about the continued participation of any group members. That
is a matter for each to assess. I would only advocate a whole-
hearted decision.

240
(...continued 12 May 2004)
2. The Registrants of The Purpose
There is a definite distinction between Purpose and Will;
it is subtle indeed, but quite definite to the advanced
initiate, and therefore the dualistic nature of our planetary
manifestation and our solar Expression appear even in
this. The Members of the Council at Shamballa recognise
this distinction and therefore divide Themselves into
two groups which are called in the ancient parlance,
Registrants of the Purpose and Custodians of the Will.
Will is active. Purpose is passive, waiting for the results of
the activity of the will. These two groups are reflected in
hierarchical circles by the Nirmanakayas or the Planetary
Contemplatives, and the Custodians of the Plan. The
function of the Registrants of the Purpose is to keep the
channel open between our Earth, the planet Venus and
the Central Spiritual Sun. The function of the Custodians
of the Will is to relate the Council, the Hierarchy and
Humanity, thus creating a basic triangle of force between
the three major centres of the planetary Life. This is the
higher expression (symbolic, if you like) of the six-pointed
star, formed of two interlaced triangles.28
I am using this duality in your instructions because
it is based upon the duality expressing through the
fundamental centre of planetary life—Shamballa. While
conscious participation in the life of this planetary centre
lies far ahead, it is an archetype that can be used and
understood thus bringing that participation ever nearer.
Let me make the distinction between Purpose
and Will more clear for you. We have in the three-fold
expression of monad, soul and personality three expressions

241
of directive energy. The personality is qualified by
‘intention’. The personality ‘intends’ a purpose in the three
worlds. Because of the gap in the antahkarana between
the mental unit and the causal body this intention in its
early stages is not necessarily aligned with the will of the
soul but it is nevertheless derived from it. A disciple is
consciously creating an alignment between the intention of
the personality and the will of the soul. An initiate is able
to extend this alignment to the centre of planetary purpose
Shamballa via the monad.
Personality intention is not soul will and soul will is
not planetary purpose, but in each case the lower is derived
from the higher. When the antahkarana is fully built the
higher levels of purpose are consciously precipitated into
and inform the lower. Planetary purpose is an energy stored
within Shamballa in the same way that the Life principle is
anchored in the heart. Our Planetary and Solar Logoi are on
the path of cosmic initiation and so there is no misalignment
between their soul will and personality intention, although
in the case of the Planetary Logos this alignment is yet to
work out fully upon the physical plane. The Planetary Logos
is attempting to implement a portion of solar Will and has
therefore anchored the energy required to implement this
Will in the Council Chamber. There it is experienced as pure
energy, the energy of Life itself, and those who participate in
that Life know it to be that which sustains and pervades the
incarnated manifestation of the Logos.
This energy of Purpose is not Will as we know it, but
its presence in Shamballa is a result of a higher Will. The
atmic plane is that which formulates Purpose into Will in
the same way that the mental plane formulates or sheaths
buddhi into manas. The formless Life of the logoic plane is
combined with the coherent Life of the monadic plane and

242
fixed into a point of focused Will that is the essence of the
atmic body. The atmic plane is where the Plan is formulated
and thus represents the creative throat centre of our deity.
Fifth Degree initiates participate in the formulation of
the Plan, but the Plan is not the Purpose. It is merely an
expression of that Purpose within a more limited time/space
ring-pass-not of the five worlds. The Purpose is fixed and
unchangeable. It is already complete but not yet manifested.
The Plan is changeable depending upon the effects of the
Will on the lower three worlds.
While the Plan is changeable from the perspective of
the monad or Shamballa, it is nevertheless relatively fixed
from the perspective of the personality or humanity. A
portion of the Hierarchical Plan is worked out in the lesser
time and space cycles experienced in the three worlds. Let
me make this clearer by analogy with the three aspects of
the human being. A monad is essential energy embodying a
purpose that encompasses the time/space of incarnation in
the three solar systems. It is a dual expression of planetary
and solar manifestation along one of the three primary rays
of monadic life. Let us say this essential energy is of the
Second Ray and thus the monad has a particular affinity
for the second solar system—thus expressing the essential
Love nature of the Solar Lord. This essential Love nature
is then expressed within or sheathed by soul within the
realms of the triad. The will of the soul is a subset of
the purpose of the monad within the five worlds. Let us
say the soul is along the First Ray line thus clothing the
essential Love nature in an assertive expression. The Purpose
is Love and the Plan is a willful expression of that Love in
such a way as to reveal it over a long series of incarnations.
Let us say that in a particular incarnation the soul has
expressed through a Fourth Ray personality at the stage of

243
discipleship leading to the Third Initiation. The personality
may formulate a number of fluctuating ‘intentions’ during
the life, which will be forcefully implemented or destroyed
by the soul according to whether they are in alignment
with the plan the soul is working on over a longer series of
initiations. As the personality intentions become increasingly
aligned with the soul will then more of that will or plan
is revealed to the incarnated consciousness. At the Third
Initiation that plan is grasped in its entirety and what is
revealed is the monadic purpose which underlies that plan
thus creating an alignment between purpose, will and
intention.
On a planetary scale Humanity is the world disciple.
It makes decisions and has ‘intentions’ based on an
independently operating free will which is nevertheless derived
from the centre of planetary Life. When this ‘intention’ is in
alignment with the Plan which is in the custody of Hierarchy
then it is reinforced. The so-called ‘forces of Light’ aid those
sections of humanity who are holding and attempting to
implement a vision which is in accordance with Hierarchical
Will. Once humanity can be trusted to understand and
implement that Will then the Purpose which lies behind that
Will can be revealed. This revelation of Purpose is taking place
sequentially within the ranks of disciples and initiates that
form the New Group of World Servers. It is not a purpose
that when revealed can be taken on or implemented by an
individual or a group—that would be a misinterpretation
of planetary purpose at the level of personality intention. A
group—even a group as large as the New Group of World
Servers—cannot even implement the Plan, only a portion of
that Plan relevant to the time in which they are incarnated.
The Purpose is even vaster in scale. It is not then experienced
as ‘directional’. It is not an intention to carry out, nor a

244
Plan to conform to, but the overwhelming experience of the
energy of Life which lies behind and sustains the Plan and
can pervade the formulated intention for the incarnation.
The initiate knows ‘all is well’ not theoretically but through
direct contact with the “peace that passeth understanding”.29
From that moment doubt ceases, fear ends and joy shot
through with occasional experiences of bliss becomes the basic
psychological foundation of the life.
Prior to this experience the disciple is under constant
inner stress attempting to maintain alignment with the Will,
to implement his intention and to cooperate with the Plan. It
is a life and death struggle in which all can be lost or gained.
After the direct experience of Life itself—even momentarily
as happens at the Second Initiation, and more stably at the
Third—all is changed. The initiate knows that nothing he
does or fails to do can make the slightest bit of difference to
the eventual working out of Purpose. The Purpose IS. It is
Life itself. It IS the very core of his own Being. He has made
direct contact with the Father and knows all is in safe hands.
He may fall away from his alignment, fail in his intention,
but he cannot negate the experience. It is fundamental and
becomes over time the foundation, the rock on which his
life is anchored. In truth it was always the foundation, but
now this is realised. Of course the theoretical knowledge of
this fundamental truth can never be used as an excuse not
to engage the intense and prolonged struggle of discipleship.
It must be won through struggle and trial until experienced
directly. The Great Illusion of separation is broken at the Third
Initiation, while at-one-ment with the Father lies ahead at the
Fourth and conscious participation as a directing agent of the
Plan becomes a reality at the Fifth.
The Third Degree is the initiation most closely
associated with the NGWS who form the ajna centre of the

245
planetary life. They receive here the vision on the mountain
top, the unshakeable realisation that they essentially ARE
Purpose, clothed in Love or consciousness and tasked with
expressing that duality through action in the three worlds of
human endeavour.
I have gone into this explanation in great detail
because it underlies the work I am attempting to carry out
through this and other groups. Light Supernal is a seven-
fold light containing in its synthetic expression the energy
of Life itself. It is Will infused with Purpose. It is the
energy of initiation because it produces in consciousness
the revelation of the essential Purpose of divinity. It is
the Father come to the aid of the Son working in a far
country—the three worlds of manifested human existence.
It is the wealth of the Father, the inheritance of the Son,
flooding into his hands. It brings Peace.
Your work as a group is to distribute this wealth—to
be a channel along which this bounty may flow, a wire
that connects the positive and negative poles of the cosmic
physical plane. When enough current passes through that
wire the result will be Light—a magnetic radiance that
is the result of the flow of current and no longer an aim
in itself. As individuals you are at various stages of your
own transition in identity from personality to soul, from
identifying with humanity to identifying with Hierarchy.
As a group you are capable of forming an effective bridge.
You must learn to identify those whom it is your work and
privilege to aid, those with whom you must cooperate and
those to whom you must look for aid.
1. Your field of service is those groups working within the
NGWS but who are primarily identified with humanity.
Their keynote is discipleship and struggle. They experience
a keen empathy with the plight of humanity and seek
246
to alleviate it along some line. They oscillate between
an oftimes zealous determination to further their cause
or implement their vision and a despair at the lack of
progress or prospect of failure. They are attempting to ‘save
the world’ and feel the responsibility of this chosen task
strongly. They appeal for aid as they must and their cry can
be heard in both the inner and outer worlds.
2. Your field of cooperative endeavour also lies within
the wider field of the NGWS, but these are groups
who are primarily identified with Hierarchy. They are
characterised by an aura of joy, an unshakeable positivity
regardless of external circumstances, and a persistent and
long-term demonstration of aid without expectation of
acknowledgement or return however subtle. They are not
trying to ‘save the world’ for they know the world is already
saved and this salvation is merely working outwards through
groups such as themselves. They are in contact to greater
or lesser extent with the Life principle. They are ‘alive’
and therefore have become instruments through which the
resurrection of others can be effected.
You must learn to disassociate with the first group
but remain a source of aid to them, and increase your
identification and association with the second.
3. I would like to introduce into your awareness a
particular source of aid with which this group may come
into rapport. The Nirmanakayas is the name given to
that group which forms the link between Hierarchy and
Shamballa in the same way that the NGWS serves as
the bridge between Hierarchy and Humanity. You may
care to read the information that I have given about this
group in my other writings, but essentially their work is
to infuse the Plan with Purpose. They are called “divine

247
Contemplatives”30—a term literally meaning ‘to build a
temple with’, and it is with them and a higher group
of ‘Nirmanakayas’ who function on the logoic plane,
that the NGWS must learn to work. As a result of the
combined efforts of these three groups, the planetary
antahkarana will provide a channel of power for the energy
of Purpose to reach from the logoic plane via the atmic
and higher mental planes into the etheric plane of physical
manifestation.
The Nirmanakayas can be contacted in meditation
and the resulting transmission of energy will be essential
in your planned work. Thus you will have potentially two
potent lines of energy entering into the group soul: That
of the Will of the ashram directed by me your Master, and
that of the energy of Purpose augmenting that Will entering
via the Nirmanakayas.
As you apply yourself to making the above three
distinctions and enter more deeply into a relationship with
the Life principle, both your sphere of work and the groups
with whom I would have you cooperate in the next phase
will become increasingly apparent.

248
08 June 2004
GEMINI full Moon
The Three Spiritual Festivals
There are three signs, preceding these, which provide
the subtle or subjective realities of the will-to-be (Aries),
the desire-to-know (Taurus) and the establishment of
relationship (Gemini), and these constitute the triple
incentive to the manifestation of man and of the human
kingdom. They correspond cosmically to the logoic, the
monadic and spiritual planes to which the higher initiate
has access or when dealing with the entire concept on a
lower turn of the spiral and in connection with ordinary
man, they correspond to the mental, the astral and the
etheric vehicles of man. They are, therefore, related to
the highest and the lowest expression of human life. I
have in the above ideas given you several hints of vital
importance.31
The three spiritual festivals of Aries, Taurus and Gemini
are a synthetic whole—a triple expression of soul impulse into
the cosmic etheric body. They are related to the first three of
the cosmic ethers and therefore to the three centres Shamballa,
Hierarchy and Humanity. When the unity behind these three
expressions is realised then the fourth quality of deity will be
revealed. This fourth quality relates to the cosmic buddhic
plane.
Let me make the cosmic correspondences clearer:
Gemini as you know, is related to the etheric body and in
particular to the third ether and the throat chakra and hence
humanity. The etheric body is the transmitter of energies from
the higher planes to the physical. It enables coordination of the
personality through the sequential integration of the etheric,

249
astral and mental energies with the physical expression. As the
Third Initiation is approached the etheric body also becomes
the transmitter of energies from the soul.
Gemini, as you may now begin to grasp, is related to the
etheric body; it is the custodian of conditioning energy and
the intermediary, as far as basic essentials are concerned,
between soul and body. These are the two allied brothers.
In the average person, the etheric vehicle is the transmitter
of psychic energy, galvanising and coordinating the dense
physical body and permitting, therefore, astral and mental
control of the personality. When the man is upon the
Path of Discipleship and, therefore, upon the reversed
wheel, leading to initiation, the etheric body becomes
the transmitter of soul energy and not of personality
force…32
The Solar Logos is approaching the Third cosmic
Initiation and therefore energies from the cosmic triad are
beginning to pour through the etheric body of the solar
system. On Earth the centre of Shamballa is responsive to
energies coming from the cosmic mental plane, the centre
of Hierarchy is responsive to energies coming from the
cosmic astral and the centre of Humanity is responsive to
energies on the cosmic physical. As these three centres come
into a mutual interplay they begin to express the synthetic
Will of the Planetary Logos emanating from egoic levels.
The Planetary Logos is a disciple of the Solar Logos who is
seeking to fuse triad and personality.
The period in which this fusion takes place on the
five lower cosmic planes covers the three solar systems. In
the first system higher and lower manas were fused and
thus it was a system where manas predominated. In the
second system the fusion occurs between the buddhic and

250
astral planes. In the third system the fusion of the energies
of atma and etheric takes place. If you think this through
light will come on the importance of Earth humanity in the
third system as the anchor point for solar Will.
In the three worlds Shamballa is the dominant note
as the personality integrates. In the five worlds Humanity is
the dominant note. Think this through for it is a statement
of major import. The third divine centre is the dominant
note in the fifth solar system. (There have been two
preceding the current three-fold system.) When the seven
cosmic planes are fully integrated then Shamballa once
again becomes the dominant note, for it is transmitting
energy from the higher plane of cosmic adi.
Thus the three centres have a relationship with the
rays and planes as follows:
Shamballa 1, 5
Hierarchy 2, 4, 6
Humanity 3, 7
In the first three systems we have the following relationship:
Shamballa 5
Hierarchy 6
Humanity 7
In the central three:
Shamballa 5
Hierarchy 4
Humanity 3
In the final three:
Shamballa 1
Hierarchy 2
Humanity 3
251
 Humanity is a divine centre and in the next system
will play a pivotal role in the descent of cosmic atmic
energies into the physical plane, allowing the Planetary
Logos to manifest the Will of the Solar Logos. The ‘seed’ of
that Will is being anchored now in the middle system.
Let us bring the analogy into the human system.
When the disciple has anchored his identity on causal levels
the causal body becomes the intermediary in the process of
fusing the personality and the triad. The lower mind becomes
irradiated from the higher mind. Buddhi infuses the astral
body and the etheric body is vitalised with the energy of atma.
Specifically the four etheric planes become the transmitting
agents for the lower four planes of the atmic plane. The raising
of kundalini energy from base to crown in the etheric body is
a result of—and a direct reflection of—the descent of Purpose
through the levels of the atmic plane. The man becomes a
creative agent for the Plan upon the physical plane. As the
jewel starts to become more revealed, the energy of the monad
comes into play and working through buddhi it infuses the
whole lower three planes, revealing an underlying synthesis.
At the Fourth Degree the causal body has fulfilled its role of
intermediary and is negated, the ashram on the buddhic plane
now becoming the bridging point for the whole seven planes.
I have brought these relationships to your attention
in order to illustrate synthetic thinking in your approach
to the three festivals and the distribution of energy. From
one perspective the Aries festival is the most important,
but from another the Gemini festival is. From yet a third
perspective the Wesak festival is the key. Behind these
perspectives lies a synthesis, and it is with this synthesis
I would have you deal. They are three aspects of the
expression of one reality and this reality has its roots upon
the cosmic buddhic plane.

252
 Let me bring this discussion to the level of your
group work. I have said that you should now be working
with Third Degree issues as a group disciple. You are thus
a centre upon causal levels through which a number of
relationships have already been established. The higher
and lower minds have been brought into relationship. The
buddhic and astral levels have been somewhat integrated.
Now the atmic and physical levels are being worked on.
This relationship is facilitated by the functioning of the
mental plane itself as it bridges the third and seventh
planes. This brings into conscious relationship the energies
of Earth and Saturn via the dual intermediary energies of
Mercury and Venus. Mercury, Venus and the Earth are the
rulers of Gemini. Venus and Saturn are the Angel and the
Dweller—encountered and at-on-ed first of all upon the
mental plane itself through the integration of higher and
lower mind via Mercury on the fourth subplane.
There is a third aspect of Mercury which begins to
function when the other two are perfected or in process
of rapid perfecting. Mercury, in this case, is the abstract
mind—removed from all form contact as we understand
it—and relates soul and spirit, and this again in two
stages. Mercury is the revealer of the Spiritual Triad
(atma-buddhi-manas or spiritual will, spiritual love
and the higher mind) to the soul, and this carries the
disciples to the stage of the third initiation. It is then
the revealer of the life aspect during the processes of the
higher initiations…31
To enter into this mystery we must look at the cosmic
physical plane as a whole and the interrelationship of energies
in particular between the first, third, fifth and seventh planes.
The Cancer Hierarchy is the fifth as you know, and is in

253
the stage of liberating itself from the cosmic physical plane
altogether. There is a peculiar tie in between this release and
the return of the Buddha at Wesak each year to aid in the
work of the Christ. The Buddha as you know, decided not to
leave the Earth at his moment of Decision and to delay his
departure out of compassion for humanity. This relates him in
a particular way to Saturn and the Moon, both of whom form
bridges between the early three systems and the middle three
in their respective enumerations.
The Fifth Hierarchy (veiling the Christ) therefore are
representatives of the Love nature of the Logos operating
via the cosmic astral plane upon the higher cosmic physical
subplanes. Specifically the higher three subplanes of adi
resonate with the energy of this Hierarchy. They are the
substance through which the higher Nirmanakayas operate
to keep the channel open between our Earth, Venus and the
Sun. Within the higher three planes this energy is reflected
into the lower three subplanes of the atmic plane, and from
there into the higher three subplanes of the mental plane
and eventually into the lower three subplanes of the physical
plane. Thus Venus or the Fifth Hierarchy has a relationship
with the first, third, fifth and seventh planes. Mercury or
the Fourth Hierarchy has a relationship with the second,
fourth and sixth. Together they form the antahkarana. The
significance of the relationship between the Christ and the
Buddha as representatives of the Venus/Mercury duality may
become apparent when considering the planetary inflow at
the time of the three festivals.
On the first and the fifth planes Venus operates as the
upright five-pointed star. On the third and seventh planes
it operates as the inverted or ‘fallen’ five-pointed star. On
the fifth plane both are reconciled through the revelation
provided by Mercury.

254
 On the mental plane Saturn rules the lower three
subplanes or concrete mind, while Venus rules the causal
levels. On the atmic plane the situation is reversed. Saturn
rules the higher three subplanes (esoteric Saturn), while
Venus operates on the lower three. On the physical plane
Venus is responsible for man’s attraction to matter of
the lowest three subplanes. Think all this through and
light may come on the function of the Fifth Hierarchy
within the cosmic physical plane. It is through the dual
Tenth Hierarchy at the time of the Third Initiation that
the energies of esoteric Saturn ruling the higher three
subplanes of the atmic plane are put in direct relationship
with Earth or the energies of the lower three subplanes
of the physical. When they are correctly related the result
is an uprising of the kundalini energies via the operation
of a certain group of the agnichaitans who are a lower
correspondence to the agnishvattas. The physical resources
of the personality are thus placed fully under the Will
aspect of the soul or atma.
I have asked you as a group to serve as distributors
of both third and seventh plane energies—the energy of
atma and the energy of money. In order to work with
these energies simultaneously an at-one-ment must take
place between Mercury and Venus, the Fourth and Fifth
Hierarchies. The lack of this at-one-ment in humanity is
the direct cause of the dislocation between the Plan and
its expression in the three worlds. The disciple is a triple
manifestation of the Fourth, Fifth and Sixth Hierarchies
(speaking now of the Hierarchies manifesting on the
cosmic physical). He is the bridge between the Third and
the Seventh. Later as an initiate he will become the triple
manifestation of atma-buddhi-manas or the Third, Fourth
and Fifth Hierarchies in full display.

255
 At this time of the Venus occultation of the Sun in
Gemini you have a peculiar opportunity for revelation into
the relationship between the Fifth Hierarchy and its dual
expression through the Tenth. The gates of Cancer and
Capricorn stand esoterically open.

[At this point another member of the group left and was
not replaced. The five remaining members continued until the
end of the process.]

256
01 July 2004
CANCER full Moon
Christ and the Eighth Initiation
I am going to begin this transmission with some more
theoretical (to you) information and then proceed eventually
down to the level of your practical group work on my
behalf.
Cancer as you know, is related to the Seventh Ray
and the Fifth liberating Hierarchy which is in the process of
taking the Eighth Initiation.
The Christ himself is in preparation for the Eighth
Initiation, which is in a peculiar sense his initiation just
as the Fourth Initiation is the one most relevant to the
human Hierarchy. You may note that elsewhere I have
indicated that the Christ is about to take (or is in the
process of taking, or has completed) the Seventh Initiation
of Resurrection. Now I am telling you that he is in
preparation for the Eighth. This mystery is approached by
understanding initiation as a process and not fixating on
it as an event. Just as a disciple may be taking the Second
Initiation but may also be preparing simultaneously for
the Third, so it is on higher levels. The planetary event
we call the Reappearance of the Christ will both mark the
completion of the Seventh Initiation and also reveal the
Christ’s readiness for the Eighth.
From the human perspective the Reappearance has
relevance to the life in the three worlds and the externalisation
of divinity. To all initiates above the Fourth Degree however,
it is the effects of the Christ’s work upon the highest three
planes of the cosmic physical—and not the lowest—that
concern them. It is the Christ’s mastery of the monadic plane
that allows for his presence to be felt upon the astral, and his
257
growing mastery of the four lowest subplanes of the logoic
plane is having a corresponding influence upon the four ethers
of the physical plane. His eventual mastery of the highest three
subplanes of the logoic plane will result in the sacredising of
the lower three subplanes of the physical—in other words
what we exoterically call ‘matter’. The same process can be
predicated for the Cosmic Christ on the higher cosmic planes,
and it will be noted that humans focused in the three worlds
form part of the ‘matter’ of this cosmic system.
At the Eighth Initiation the nature and purpose of
duality is revealed, but this is a much higher duality than
we are able to comprehend in consciousness. The reflection
of this higher duality enables the bringing together of the
duality of the form aspect on the cosmic physical plane.
What we call ‘spirit’ and ‘matter’ are really twin aspects of
substance. The function of the Fourth or human Hierarchy
is to operate as the ‘Son’ or consciousness aspect between
these two parents and bring them together, resulting
in at-one-ment upon the physical plane. This at-one-
ment proceeds in two directions from the buddhic plane
uniting atma with manas, monadic energy with astral and
eventually logoic energy with physical/etheric. When the
‘highest of the high’ (top three subplanes of the logoic)
and the ‘densest of the dense’ (lowest three subplanes
of the physical) are brought together then the work of
sacredisation through solarisation is complete.
Normally in this second system an initiate chooses his
Path out onto the cosmic astral plane at the Sixth Degree and
‘transitions’ from the monadic plane. The mastery of the logoic
plane is largely left to the third system where it will become
the plane of transition from the cosmic physical. Those who
choose the Path of Earth Service however, voluntarily undergo
the higher initiations while remaining within the ring-pass-not

258
of the planet. They are nurturing the seed of Will which will
flower in the next system, and at the same time forming part of
the Shamballic governance of the current system.
The Eighth Initiation in this system and upon this
planet is hard indeed, although not in the same sense of
suffering as the soul consciousness at the Fourth Degree
or the emotional body at the Second. It is a monadic
‘suffering’—if such a word can be used to describe the
processes of life that occur on the higher planes. The
monadic initiate is stretched upon the planetary sutratma
just as the Fourth Degree initiate is stretched upon the
planetary antahkarana. The energy of Life which is the
essence of the monad is called to the heights via the
planetary and solar causal bodies, at the same time as it
is descending to the depths of the cosmic physical plane.
There are bodhisattvas of Life operating upon the higher
logoic planes, just as there are bodhisattvas of Love upon
the triadal planes. Think this through and some light may
come upon the significance of the Cancer Hierarchy as it
‘veils the Christ’.
Let us bring this thought down to the level of the
group’s current work. Just as with the Christ on his high
level, or the Fourth Degree initiate on his, the work of the
disciple or group approaching the Third Degree is to ‘at-
one’ the highest and lowest energies of the planes within
which we are able to work. These are the five lowest planes
of the cosmic physical plane. Occasionally there is the
contact with energies of the monadic plane, which becomes
more stable after the Third Degree, however this contact is
achieved as a result of the above mentioned at-one-ment.
The disciple approaching the Third Degree is polarised
within his causal body and is working to fuse the triadal planes
with those of the personality. Higher and lower mind are

259
operating as a unified system, buddhi is flowing through the
astral body and frequently the energy of atma is making itself
felt via the etheric fires. It is the higher three subplanes of the
atmic plane which act as synthesising agents for the whole
lower five planes. The energy from these must be brought all
the way into the etheric, where they result in the liberation of
energy in response from the lowest three planes. It is not the
Life energy of the lowest planes which is released at this stage
of the at-one-ment process, but the ‘Love’ or consciousness
aspect. Hence you will see why there is a link between Light
Supernal emanating from the higher atmic field and money
rising from the physical plane. These are the two poles of the
expression of the Love or consciousness aspect. Light Supernal
is the essence of light or consciousness, and money is the
precipitation or concrete expression of consciousness. The
simultaneous outflow of these two polar energies within the
five worlds results in ‘peace’ and the transition of polarisation
from the higher mental to the buddhic plane.
In a peculiar way it is the Cancer influence that
results in both the nourishment that the form provides as
well as the retardation of the development of consciousness
because of the dependence upon this nourishment. Think
of the Buddha who delayed his departure from Earth out
of compassion for humanity. His periodic return provides
a spiritual nourishment into the seventh or cosmic physical
plane, which allows humanity in some ways to grow at a
faster rate. At the same time it could be said that without
his presence humanity would have to develop more of the
qualities he brings within themselves—and this could be
said to have a retarding effect.
This duality should be borne in mind whenever one
provides resources of any kind. Is the flow of money and
higher energies going to assist in the liberation into more

260
usefulness of the recipient groups, or is it going to foster
dependence and thus deaden the creativity-producing Law
of Economy? The answer to this difficult conundrum lies
with the Christ principle, which is why it is the Christ
who passes the energy that the Buddha transmits through
Hierarchy at the time of the Wesak full Moon. It is the
living heart of any system that is able to respond to need
appropriately in the moment based on concern for the
whole, rather than via an intellectual process or in response
to an urgency of demand. It is the heart which monitors
the blood supply around the body, feeding more to the
brain at times of high mental activity and more to the feet
when they are running.
In the early stages of development it is the emotional
body which forms the ‘heart’ of the system. For the disciple
it is the causal body. For the initiate it is the ashram and for
the Christ it is the monadic plane. Humanity is in a stage of
transference from the emotional or desire heart to the causal
heart, and thus—slowly—the energy of money is coming
under ‘soul control’. When this happens in the life of the
individual, financial flows into and out of the system become
regulated by the needs of the soul and not of the personality.
There are times when the evolution of the soul/personality
system in the five worlds is best served by a financial desert and
other times when the reverse is true.
If you examine carefully your own processes—both
individual and group—you will be aware of lessons in this
regard over the last year. When has the absence of money
resulted in an increased soul inspired creativity and when
has it resulted in stagnation? When has the presence of
money been beneficial and when has it created dependence?
How have the resources that have been available been
allocated? Do they serve the soul or the personality or

261
both?—remembering that your answers to these questions
may well vary depending upon the polarisation of the
identity considering them.
As the financial resources in the world come more
and more under soul control and therefore under the
jurisdiction of the Christ, we are seeing a marked shift in
financial flows from those who own the physical resources
(oil, land, forests etc) to those who own the ideas (media,
creativity, technology). The direction of this flow will
naturally continue until the essence and source of ideas—
the soul—is recognised and the Great Illusion is broken on
a planetary level.
As a group you have been asked to decentralise
yourselves further and to consider the NGWS as the
centre of which you both form a part and which you are
attempting to serve. You have been asked to form a channel
of contribution towards other initiatives rather than focusing
upon your own initiatives as recipients of the flow of energy
from others. This will not result in others becoming part of
your work, but the reverse. You will be drawn to cooperate
with others to assist in their objectives. The personality of
the group is thus somewhat humbled by this process, while
the soul energy that the group has been able to generate
is liberated into a greater field of service. The effect of this
reorientation in consciousness will have surprising secondary
effects upon your own projects, but these will follow
according to law.
The NGWS is a unified spiritual entity. Attempt to
identify more closely with this entity and from that point of
synthesis look out upon the myriad personality expressions
of that synthesis as they reveal themselves through group
initiatives around the planet. Then seek to lend your aid,
the spiritual strength you have developed and your financial

262
resources to these outer expressions. Shamballa School will
as a result become identified as an energetic centre—a
source of spiritual strength—and not be identified with
an outer location or organisational form. You will then be
working esoterically and will have succeeded in locating
your energetic centre within the causal field.
I have said that the next phase of my instructions
will be to a ‘group of groups’, and naturally it would have
occurred to you that Shamballa School would be one of
those groups. This is NOT the case. Shamballa School will
serve as a conduit of synthetic energy into other groups
and organisations, while remaining itself without an outer
home or form. If you think this through some light will
come upon the role the Fifth Hierarchy plays in the life of
the human being. This is the natural consequence of group
initiation and your earlier decision to become a moveable
group. The result is that you will form a portion of the
bridge between the ashram, the inner groups and disciples
in incarnation.
Your unity as a group is an inner unity that will
allow a greater differentiation. As individuals you will go
where you are called in response to tension within the
planetary ‘heart’. You will in effect be spiritual ‘blood’ that
will aid and nourish the outer forms but will circulate and
return again and again to the heart for renewal and your
next mission. As a result you will not form a part of any
outer organisation except temporarily, and this will create
a tension that will form the seed of your next evolutionary
initiation.

263
01 August 2004
LEO full Moon
The Nirmanakayas and Atmic Abstraction
Let me begin by referring you to a section of an
earlier transmission at the time of the Wesak:
The Nirmanakayas can be contacted in meditation and
the resulting transmission of energy will be essential in
your planned work. Thus you will have potentially two
potent lines of energy entering into the group soul: That
of the Will of the ashram directed by me your Master,
and that of the energy of Purpose augmenting that Will
entering via the Nirmanakayas.
As you apply yourself to making the above distinctions
and enter more deeply into a relationship with the Life
principle both your sphere of work and the groups with
whom I would have you cooperate in the next phase
will become increasingly apparent.34
The next phase of your work now begins in earnest.
This necessarily requires a completion of the work on one
level and a lifting of the polarisation of the group centre to
another.
The basic nature of our planetary life is dual and
will eventually become three-fold and synthetic. At
present two streams of energy concern us. One enters via
Sirius through the Heart of the Sun and is ‘located’ and
distributed through the Hierarchy to Humanity. Another
enters through the Central Spiritual Sun and is held
within the Council Chamber at Shamballa and released on
occasion to both Hierarchy and Humanity. Eventually, once
Humanity expresses as a divine centre, a third stream will

264
be recognised as anchoring directly within the planetary
throat centre.
Your work as a group has been to anchor a strand
of the energy of Freedom entering from Sirius through
Hierarchy into the three worlds. The outer focus has been
Highden and the inner consequence of your work has been
the creation of a centre on causal levels. At this time I
have asked you to extend your inner alignment to penetrate
into the stream of Purpose or Being which lies behind the
Will. The Will as it expresses on the atmic plane is itself a
duality which can be symbolised by the words ‘freedom’ and
‘sacrifice’. Both words imply an identity that chooses to be
free or to sacrifice its freedom. The world of Purpose is the
world of Being—a Being that lies behind identity. Simply
put, the sphere of the monad concerns itself with Being,
that of the triad with Loving (a better word is needed here
that encompasses the willing descent of identity in service
from the world of pure Being to the world of form) and
the sphere of the personality concerns itself with Doing. All
three spheres are Divine and form part of a synthetic whole.
Shamballa School has abstracted its consciousness from
Highden and yet remains free to serve Highden as a project
in the realm of Doing. The time has come to abstract from
Shamballa School itself as an entity upon causal levels. This
does not mean the destruction of the form but the release
of the Life from its confinement within that form. At the
Third Degree it is the Life that is released from the third
subplane matter and finds as its higher reference point the
third subplane of the cosmic physical plane—the atmic
plane. Similarly at the Fourth Initiation the Life is released
from the second subplane and returns to the monadic plane.
At the Fifth Initiation mastery of the lower five planes is
obtained because the indwelling Life is released from the

265
lower 32 subplanes of the cosmic physical plane. It no
longer needs a causal body on the mental plane, as it is
operating as the monad through an atmic body on the three
higher subplanes of the atmic plane. The causal and atmic
bodies are the inner equivalent of the Temples of Solomon
and Ezekiel respectively. What this means in practice is the
transfer of a portion of the Life aspect of the group into
the triad and the beginning of the building of the higher
temple. This abstraction of identity both allows for other
identities to enter into the field that you are abstracting
from, while also creating within the field an ‘exit and entry’
point which allows for the through-flow of higher energies.
In effect, others will enter into the Shamballa School causal
field and find that there is a hole in the centre rather than a
group identity or a group of identities. This hole is a more
powerful magnet than any solar identity would be. Think
this through and some revelation may come as to the nature
of the jewel as the bridge between the soul and the monad,
the spheres of light and a higher darkness.
I have told you that Shamballa School will become a
conduit of energies to other groups in the next phase of my
transmissions, but will not itself be a member of those groups.
Therefore ‘you’ the identity Shamballa School cannot be a
part of Shamballa School. Do you understand this process?
Shamballa School becomes a container that is a field of service
for your identity as a group but is NOT the group. To achieve
this you must eventually leave the field entirely. This is the
mystery of the duality of freedom and sacrifice. At the Third
Degree an initiate is free of the three worlds but at the same
time becomes a powerful factor within them. At the Fifth
Degree a Master is ‘free’ of triadal identification and yet directs
activity within the five worlds. Freedom of identity from
within a field necessarily makes ‘you’ invisible within that field.

266
 Sanat Kumara is the Great Sacrifice under the Law of
Freedom and yet remains invisible to all within his sphere
except for those who have equipped themselves to resonate
with his “unknown, unseen and unheard purpose”.35
Therefore ‘you’ as a group must become more ‘invisible’
within your fields of service and at the same time be the
conduit for Purpose to flow into them. This does not mean
that your bodies or your consciousness cannot be present
within the spheres of loving and doing. Indeed they belong
there. But your ‘identity’ must be increasingly absent,
withdrawn into a higher focus. Please think this through.
Let me reiterate the two phases of your work: The
anchoring of the Sirian energy on to the physical plane
brings Light Supernal to Earth and results in the formation
at the middle point (the abstract mental plane) of a living
causal field. As for the individual, so for the group. The
inflow of energy results in a reflex action from the three
worlds and these two energies fuse to create a ‘form’. The
anchoring of the energy of Purpose from Shamballa brings
energy from the monad into the causal body. The resulting
dual flow results in the construction of a ‘body’ on the
abstract levels of the atmic plane. These two ‘bodies’ are
already present in the human being because of the process
of involution. During evolution and the initiatory process
the indwelling human identity must ‘take over’ the work
of the intermediaries—the solar angels—thus proving its
capacity to repeat on the return arc the work accomplished
by higher intelligences, releasing them in the process.
The same process occurs in group work. A group
is assisted in forming under the guidance of advanced
disciples, initiates and Masters. The latter provide the
cohesive substance of the group causal field from their own
consciousness and gradually educate the group to take over

267
this function themselves. Group causal bodies eventually
form part of ashrams which allow for the mediatory flow
of the Master’s Will into the three worlds. A Master is
operating from the atmic plane in the same way that a
disciple is operating from the mental plane. However
his identity is not focused upon the atmic plane. As his
initiatory process continues identity is released sequentially
on to the two higher planes and eventually into the cosmic
astral. Of course this transfer entails the freedom from
identity itself, but I cannot explain that to you in any way
that would help you comprehend. The transfer does create
a ‘vacuum of identity’ on atmic levels in exactly the same
way that your own abstraction from your causal group will
create a vacuum. It is this ‘absence’ which is the powerful
attractive energy that calls consciousness which is able to
reach to a higher level of focus and is ready to increase its
sphere of activity and responsibility.
With regard to solar fire it is the ‘presence’ of an
identity that is magnetic. With respect to electric fire it
is the ‘absence’ of an identity which is magnetic. In the
Second Aspect we learn by training within the aura of
one already accomplished. In the First Aspect we learn by
taking the place of one already accomplished. Of course
this is done in very gradual steps. I have said in these
instructions that I am training those who are ‘willing’ to
take responsibility for a piece of my purpose as a Master.
Why do you think that might be the case?
From out of the many groups that have been inspired
by my work and purpose on the planet, I am synthesising.
This means the abstraction of small portions of identity
substance out of lower energy centres and lifting them to
become a part of a higher one. In this way the planetary
antahkarana is being built. The Buddhas of Activity, as

268
you have studied, are drawing substance from the triangles
network. The higher kingdoms ‘feed upon’ the lower. By
this it is meant they build substance from the lower realms
into their own bodies of manifestation. Once those bodies
are built then the indwelling building entity may abstract.
The process of group initiation was instigated because
the building of the planetary centres upon cosmic etheric
levels was proceeding rapidly due to the readiness of
humans to take initiation and therefore to enter into the
make up of those centres.
Let me bring these ideas to the level of your group
process. I have said that you are a group in training for the
Third Degree. This does not mean that all members of the
group are at that level but that the group identity is. At
the Third Degree a portion of the causal field (the material
of third subplane) is rent, allowing a part of the ‘Life’
aspect of the group to be freed from the causal field. The
Life aspect from your perspective is ‘identity’. It is not the
release of your consciousness (which is Second Aspect) but
of your identity. Be clear about this distinction. Of course
the release of identity has effects in consciousness because
part of the identity is now working with a different level
of substance, and it is the interaction between identity and
substance that produces consciousness. The consciousness
continues to pervade the field. The identity is lifted into the
ashram, which has as its focus the Master’s Will located on
the atmic plane. In time a small portion of the Will or Life
aspect of the group can form a part of this higher centre—
it becomes fused with the Master’s Will.
Eventually a human being will simultaneously know
itself as that triplicity of monad, soul and personality. The
First Aspect of each of these three identities is located on
the logoic, atmic and mental planes—which is why there

269
is a triangle between the NGWS, the Nirmanakayas and
the Buddhas of Activity. The abstraction of your identity
from the Highden field has resulted in an influx of others
who have consequently taken ‘responsibility’ for the outer
project. The abstraction of a portion of your identity from
the Shamballa School field will result in the influx of
others into the already created energy pattern. They will
consequently take more responsibility for the development
of that field IF they find a vacuum in identity (but not
of consciousness) which their own identity is able and
encouraged to fill. This is a training in the First Aspect, and
if you think this through it will have some relationship to
the process of individualisation by abstraction which will
become the predominant method of the third solar system.
I have given you much to consider in this transmission,
and in this time of transition I ask you to read through it
carefully and consider both the meaning and significance of
this information to your current process.

270
01 September 2004
VIRGO full Moon
The Sacredising of Matter
The movement of consciousness is always a dual
process. The abstraction of elements of identity within the
group causal field into the atmic body has a reflex action in
the opposite direction. This results in the descent of atmic
energies into the etheric/physical. However because the
directional intention is towards abstraction then the result
is an uprushing of the combined lower energies toward the
higher.
“When the radiant light of the Solar Angel is fused with
the golden light of the cosmic intermediary, it awakens
from darkness the rush light of anu, the speck.” 36
The lower energies referred to form part of the life
of the physical plane—they are in effect the soul energies
within the form—the agnichaitans or fire elementals.
Just as the causal body forms the fire bridge between the
cosmic ethers and the three worlds, so there are a class of
agnichaitans operating on the fifth or gaseous subplane of
the physical which form the fire bridge between the physical
body and the etheric. The release of the energy within the
form is responsible for a number of phenomena:
• The registering of the ‘light within the head’.
• The radiance of the physical body and the release of its
energy reserves.
• The raising of kundalini.
It is thus the identification with the Will aspect of
the triad, or atma, which makes possible the sacredising of
matter (by releasing the light or consciousness within it) and
271
the subsequent fusion of the three worlds of the triad with
the three worlds of the personality. It is through this process
that the six-pointed star becomes the five-pointed star. This
alignment brings the Fifth, Third and First Initiations into one
synthetic expression. Let me make this clearer:
The First Initiation involves the physical plane.
The consciousness of the disciple is focused upon the
purification of the etheric and physical body and the ray
influence is the Seventh. Through this purification and the
manipulation of the physical body through exercise and diet
some of the energies of the physical body are released into
the etheric and go into the building of the chakra system.
At the Third Initiation the Fifth Ray comes into play
and the mind is enlightened, which has its reflex action upon
the physical/etheric. More energy is released, but this time
through the inflow of manas or mind. At the Fifth Initiation
it is the action of the First Ray which releases atma. The reflex
action of this release creates the ‘third uprising’ of the energy
of matter and the full disintegration of the causal body. It
is the combination of the First, Fifth and Seventh Rays that
focuses the highest into the lowest. There is thus an alignment
between three temples—the Temple of Ezekiel (atmic plane),
the Temple of Solomon (mental plane) and the temple of the
body (physical plane). On a global level the foundation of the
Temple of Power upon the physical plane and the restoration
of the mysteries of initiation has a correspondence to this
process. On a solar systemic level the anchoring of a ‘germ of
solar Will’ by the Planetary Logos has its correspondence.
The three forms of individualisation are also related
to this process. In the first system individualisation was
effected by the action of matter. In the second system it was
effected by the action of consciousness. In the third system
it will be effected by the action of will.

272
 The mystery of sexuality concerns the electrical
interaction between the soul and the personality. When the
highest aspect of the triad (atma) is consciously brought
into the lowest aspect of the personality (the physical body)
then we have the fusion of the two three-fold entities,
creating a single entity whose consciousness encompasses the
five lower planes (hence the five-pointed star).
The causal body is the Christ or middle principle
within the five worlds. It was created at individualisation
in this system through the electrical interplay between the
atmic and physical planes. The ‘seed’ of atma was placed in
the ‘womb’ of matter, resulting in the Christ child at the
midway point. When this electrical interplay can be worked
with consciously by the indwelling causal self or soul then
the Christ principle is able to embrace both parents and ‘at-
one’ the five lower planes of the cosmic physical.
The Fifth Ray or five-pointed star of Bethlehem
expresses on the fifth plane as both the indication of an
event that has already occurred and also the promise of an
event to come.
I want you to think about this whole process in
relationship to your work as a group soul. The first
phase of your work was to focus upon an outer physical
location. This was the Seventh Ray focus on the project
located at Highden. The second phase of your work was
to focus upon conscious development of the group causal
field, which also necessarily involved some abstraction and
reorientation of your consciousness from its outer activity.
The third phase of your work has been a further abstraction
and focus upon the Will of your Master. This focus
combined with a united invocative appeal, has resulted in
the beginnings of a rent or tear in the causal field, allowing
a portion of your identity (or First Aspect) to abstract and

273
be built into a higher point of tension—literally forming a
small and relatively insignificant part of the throat chakra of
the planet.
The reflex result of this abstraction of identity is
a downpouring in the opposite direction of the ‘activity’
or Third Aspect of the monad onto the physical plane.
This simultaneous dual movement (provided that the
overall emphasis is on abstraction and NOT precipitation)
results in an upliftment—a raising of the lower energies
towards the higher. This is what creates the stable vortex of
initiation that comprises a school. Consciousness identified
with matter is continually being drawn in towards the
central eye where it is eventually released from identification
with the three worlds and finds its polarisation within the
triad. As this higher polarisation occurs, the reflex action is
a downpouring of monadic energies through the personality
fields, which in turn interacts with the material intelligence
drawn into those fields and stimulates or quickens the
Christ principle within them. The overall effect is of a self-
perpetuating and growing generator of consciousness or the
Second Aspect and its expansion to include the five worlds
as a unified expression.
Manifestation prior to the Third Degree is a process
of consciousness attempting to direct and master form.
After the Third Degree consciousness or the soul principle
is no longer directed towards the manipulation of form but
becomes a conduit for relating the energies of spirit and
matter, allowing one to flow into the other. The Plan which
is already imbued with Purpose thus effortlessly ‘formulates’
itself within the three worlds because the consciousness of
those through which it is entering is no longer interfering
with the process. Ponder this.

274
29 September 2004
LIBRA full Moon
The Construction of Living Ideas
The secret to the construction of thoughtforms potent
enough to manifest on their own is to ensure that they have
the necessary energetic ingredients built in to them. The
current lesson before the group is to learn how to work with
the energy of Light Supernal upon the mental plane. In the
first phase the seven-pointed star was the symbol and the
group was focused upon an outer project. In the second phase
the six-pointed star was the symbol ‘seared’ into the group
causal field and the work primarily involved the encountering
and mastery of astral energies. The group now has the
opportunity to anchor the essential energies and learnings of
the five-pointed star within the experience of the group soul.
When a thoughtform is constructed of mental matter
alone then it is subject to the same rules as other human
mental creations—most of them do not manifest upon the
physical plane (fortunately) because they are not potent
enough. Those that are constructed of mental matter mixed
with both buddhic and astral substance have a tendency to
form ‘ideals’. It is only those thoughtforms that are imbued
with both atmic and etheric substance as well that must
manifest under law because they inherently contain matter
of the lower five subplanes of the cosmic physical plane in
right relationship to each other. They are therefore a small
seed embodiment of the Plan, and because the Plan is
already imbued with Purpose it must therefore express in
some form or other.
A Master working upon the atmic plane is attempting
to build matter from the higher mental plane into his centre
or body of manifestation on atmic levels—a part of the throat
275
centre of the planet. A Third Degree initiate has a similar
process to work through on his own level. He must build
energy from the etheric/physical plane into the centre on the
higher mental plane we call the causal body. Another name
for this process is the ‘raising of kundalini’. He does this by
reaching upwards to the atmic level of the triad and bringing
Light Supernal down into the causal body. The reflex reaction
to this is the rising of energy from the lowest plane. Now he
must blend these two energies together, one from the atmic
plane and one from the physical, to create the core seed of the
thoughtform. He then blends the energies of buddhi and the
astral plane to create a magnetic sheath for the seed so that it
will be able to form right relationship with other thoughtforms
and minds. Lastly he blends the energies of higher and
lower manas together to create the outer sheath for the
thoughtform—the creative intelligence aspect. Thus in his own
way he is repeating the process used by the solar angel to create
the causal vehicle itself with its central jewel and three layers of
petals. He is learning the science of working with the energies
of the five lower planes and thus becoming a conscious creator
in alignment with Hierarchy and the Plan.
A thoughtform created by an initiate must manifest
because it lacks nothing in its construction. The more perfect
the construction the less investment is required to ensure the
implementation. This is why it is possible for the soul, (and
the monad on its level) to function on its own plane largely
oblivious of what is happening in the three worlds, because it
knows that the seed planted must work out in time and space
and that there will come a time when the unfoldment of that
seed has reached a stage where more active involvement will
again be required. Think through this process of the creation
of thoughtforms for it has within it the key to the current
phase of your group work.

276
 I have asked you to be a channel of empowerment
towards other groups and to the NGWS in general. Specifically
I have asked you to direct a dual stream—one aspect involving
Light Supernal from the atmic level and the other involving
money or etheric/physical substance. You can see that these
energies are outside the normal sphere of activity of many
esoteric groups who are mainly functioning on the buddhic,
mental and astral planes. The simultaneous introduction of
the two energies either side of this sphere of activity can result
in the production of an essential fire—an electrical spark
generated from the two poles which can galvanise the prepared
fields into more productive activity. An outer symbol for this
process is the machine they use for ‘jump starting’ the heart
on a patient whose heart has stopped beating. The energies of
atma (the will-to-be of the soul) and kundalini (the will-to-live
of the form) are the twin poles of the energy of resurrection
with which the Seventh Ray will ‘raise the dead to life’. Once
the ‘charge’ is applied however and the heart is beating again,
then the work is done and the initiating energy can move on
to another subject.
A living idea is essentially an externalisation of an
aspect of the Plan that has two parents—the Will and
the body. At the initiating point in its creation it has not
surrounded itself with a buddhic/astral and dual mental
sheath. It has not been ‘invested’ in its full vestures. Here
it is possible through identification with the larger whole
of the world-wide group to utilise the vestures of others
in the same way that the Christ will utilise the vestures of
the Buddha. What do I mean by this? When the identity
is centred in the group through the process of synthesis,
the result is an increased capacity for differentiation. This
is an expression of the organisational energy of Shamballa.
A group then finds its particular function within the wider

277
group without needing to perform all functions itself. You
might consider a function of Shamballa School at this stage
in your developmental process as a kind of mobile battery
jump-start service for other groups. You provide a current of
electricity generated by your capacity to hold two poles in
relationship, helping to bring into birth a living fire at the
centre of the thoughform at the midway point. And then
you release and move on.
The Christ is a perfect expression of the Love principle.
By utilising the vestures of the Buddha who was a perfect
expression of the Wisdom principle, the result is the dual
expression of Love/Wisdom. The third Avatar will add the
Power principle at the centre of the expression, resulting
in synthesis. On your own level let yourselves recognise
what essential energy you are an expression of and learn
to recognise what other groups are. Then add your note to
theirs in such a way that it provides that which is missing
and finds itself complemented by the energies of which they
are inherently the custodians.
The number of groups working with the Life energy
is relatively few at this stage in the evolutionary process,
whereas there are many groups within my ashram working
with the energies of Love and Intelligence. Hence my
interest in this form of training and experimentation. The
First Ray aspect ‘touches and withdraws’. I would seek to
have developed consciousness available to serve ‘on call’ for
the transmission of Life into the three worlds. Rather like
the members of the fire department are ready at a moment’s
notice to respond to a fire—groups trained in the Will
energy need to be available to respond to the call from the
ashram—however in this case they will not be putting out
fires but igniting them.

278
27 October 2004
SCORPIO full Moon
That Which Can Effect A Change
This is an important moment in the history of the
planet. This refers back to an earlier transmission when I
told you that Hierarchy had decided to allow Humanity
as a centre to fully exercise its free will. The election in
America provides a crucial opportunity in that exercise of
the will. The issues are clear and the population of that
Western democracy are more informed about these issues
than ever before. Perhaps the one element that is lacking is
a clear perspective about how the rest of the world views
this nation. It is always difficult to appreciate this when
you reside within your own aura. One of the central issues
therefore for the American people is whether or not they
will open to a more unified global perspective—reaching
out in identification with humanity—which will require
some humility as they absorb some uncomfortable truths
about themselves as a nation. Or whether they will ‘close
down’ somewhat righteously around their national identity
and stance in the global arena. It is a test of discipleship
for this young nation. Will it reinforce the personality or
open to the soul? Remember that the soul is on the Second
Ray and comes under the influence of Aquarius. These two
energies offer great potential for the spread of the principle
of Freedom which is also firmly anchored in the soul of
the USA. The spread of the principle of Freedom on soul
levels is quite different from the spread of the ‘idea’ of
freedom as it is interpreted by the personality of America.
It is the shadow side of the expression of this ‘interpreted
idea’ which is the very thing that the global community is
acutely aware of as it places this country in its collective
279
gaze. To release the idea and work with the principle itself
is the very thing needed to open to the soul. Imposition of
the ‘idea’ of freedom upon others for their own good is not
the expression of freedom, however it is sometimes necessary
in the development process. You will see that it is with this
very issue that Hierarchy is working. Hierarchy is the soul
to the personality of Humanity. If we allowed humanity
full expression of the principle of Freedom when they were
expressing in an unsolarised manner then we would share
responsibility for the destructive consequences. However if
we withheld that principle when humanity had reached a
stage where it was demanding greater access, then we would
also share in the responsibility for repressing the principle
that lies at the monadic core of the planetary life. Whether
something is good or evil depends totally on the time and
space context. This is why the soul is a ‘living expression of
principles’ and not a fixed set of ideas or practices that can
be understood and emulated by the personality.
Humanity must choose, and in order for it to do
so Hierarchy must provide the space for that choice to
be made through a partial withdrawal of its influencing
gaze. Do you understand this process? The soul must wait,
available upon willful invocation by the personality but not
attempting to influence that will. Will humanity go ahead
and exercise its freedom by choosing that which it already
knows—those tried and true practices and behaviours that it
has tested out for millennia? Or will it pause, experiencing
the limitations of its own accumulated intelligence generated
through long activity and ask—nay demand—a change?
When this demand rises to a point of invocation, that
which can effect such a change must come forth under
Law. This is the dilemma—that which can effect a change is
not present within the sphere of humanity’s experience. To

280
open for its inflow requires the admittance of the fact that
humanity left to its own devices cannot solve its essential
problems alone. This is a vulnerable place—the admittance
of inherent inadequacy to face the challenges it confronts.
However it is only in this admittance, this vulnerability,
that a doorway opens to receive that which is new, that
which can change everything in one flash of time. This
‘something other’ is the inheritance of humanity, held for
it in the Council Chamber awaiting humanity’s coming
of age. It is the essential divinity that lies at the core of
the personality but is unrecognised in consciousness. Its
recognition requires a surrender of that which is known and
proven but limited—the survival mechanisms of personality
developed over a long evolutionary process. If that surrender
occurs it is immediately met with the revelation of a higher
principle lying hidden within. This principle, because it
lies outside the space and time of the personality, creates
by its entrance new space and time in which something
completely different to the conventional wisdom can occur.
It is literally the beginning of the re-creation of heaven
and earth—a re-creation in consciousness. All is made new
because the old is surrendered. Can humanity surrender
the old? Will America let go and let God work his wonder
through her? Will there be sufficient tension in this
moment in space and time which will allow that which lies
outside space and time to enter? We await in active peace
and positivity.

281
26 November 2004
SAGITTARIUS full Moon
The Three-fold Soul
There are three phases in the group initiatory process which
I am seeking to ‘seed’ through experimental work with
groups such as this one. All of these phases require a certain
degree of buddhic consciousness because it is only on the
buddhic plane that man becomes fully group conscious
and therefore able to participate in the work of Hierarchy
as a member of the fourth or human Hierarchy.
The first phase of the work is the bringing into relationship
of the energies of the atmic and the higher mental planes.
This results in the release of Light Supernal in its creative
aspect within the egoic field of the group and necessarily
within the individual egoic field. This release may or
may not be registered within the consciousness of the
individual depending on a number of factors, but is
nevertheless far-reaching in its results, making the soul
a ‘carrier’ of the energy of synthesis.
The second phase of the work has to do with the relating
of the energy of the monadic plane to the astral, and this
via the thread of the antahkarana or channel that was
opened up in the first phase. Necessarily it involves a wider
group field, as our astral connections are extensive.
The third phase of the work must involve an even
broader group process as it involves the relating of a
thin strand of logoic or first plane energy through to the
lowest or seventh plane. Once again this is accomplished
through the channel built via the first two phases of the
work, and has significant results upon the outer plane.

282
 Accompanying these outer results is the full registering of
the three-fold process within the etheric brain. Together
this series of initiatory processes enables the highest
and the lowest to meet and is a result of the effect of
the incoming Seventh Ray upon the Fourth or human
Hierarchy during the Aquarian Age.37
The image I want you to have in mind is of three five-
pointed stars forming one whole. The first links the lower five
planes, the second the middle five and the third the higher
five. The mid-point of each of these three ‘entities’ then
comprise the three planes of the spiritual triad—atma buddhi
and manas. Some appreciation of the way in which the triad
works to bridge the monad and personality may be achieved
through contemplating their relationship in this way. They are
the “benign uniters”.38 One ‘star’ links the atmic and physical
plane creating the causal body as its central ‘heart’. Another
links the monadic and astral planes through its ashramic centre
in buddhi, and the third links the logoic and mental planes
creating the ‘atmic’ body as its mid-point.
The ‘strand’ of energy or antahkarana which links the
highest and the lowest can only be successfully anchored in
the case of the individual disciple or of the planet as a whole
when these ‘stars’ or ‘fields of consciousness’ are operating
as a unit. They are represented on the causal level by the
three series of petals in the lotus. Their synthetic operation is
expressed in the central jewel. The three stars are in essence
the ‘Son’ or consciousness principle that links spirit and
matter. They are the boddhisattva between the buddha of the
human or planetary monad and the personality.
In order for your consciousness to be conditioned to
assist in the final stage of the at-one-ing process between
the highest and lowest planes I would like to draw
your attention to that which exists outside the realms
283
of consciousness altogether, or at least does so at this
stage of evolution in time and space. You are aware that
in the next solar system we will see the cooperation of
three evolutions—human, deva and the mysterious “third
evolution”39 which is related to the planetary entity and
those currently involutionary lives inappropriately aroused
on the Moon chain which must be ‘bound back’ until their
time for proper awakening has come. We might think of
this third evolution as that which is not yet self conscious—
it is occultly blind and dumb, capable only of movement.
It has its counterpart in the worlds of spirit that lie beyond
consciousness, just as it lies beneath consciousness. At
individualisation there were three ‘groups’—those who
incarnated fully, those who sent down a spark, and those
who “refused to incarnate”.40 The refusal to incarnate by
some lives had karmic consequences but was also inevitable
under Law because the forms in time and space were not
ready to handle the inflowing energies of spirit.
We can see then that just as there are energies within
the lower three planes that are not yet ready to be solarised
and thus brought up in to consciousness as we know it, there
are also energies within the higher three planes that are not
yet ready to be brought down into consciousness. The lower
energies are busy building more perfect forms; the higher
energies are similarly occupied with the energies of planetary
purpose. In a planetary sense Shamballa is the reservoir of the
higher energies, while Humanity is the guardian of the lower.
Planetary kundalini will one day rise ‘through’ the human
kingdom, and while that time is far off it must be remembered
that it is a continual process unfolding in time and space and
that some circulation of these energies is always occurring.
The lower three worlds are the sheaths of the soul or Second
Aspect. While the soul cannot be contacted directly below the

284
third subplane of the mental plane, it can be experienced on lower
levels by the degree of expression or unfoldment of the soul that
is occurring through the personality vehicles. Prior to the Third
Degree there will always be some imperfection in that expression
because of unsolarised aspects of the personality which we
collectively refer to as the ‘Dweller’. Similarly the monad cannot
be experienced directly below the third subplane of the atmic,
although its ‘presence’ can be experienced through the triadal
sheaths which we collectively call the ‘Angel of the Presence’. In
order for the Dweller and Angel to be fused together and thus
allow for the unimpeded flow of energy from the highest into
the lowest, an outside agent is required—outside the lower five
worlds. This agency or energy cannot therefore be contacted
through consciousness—even triadal consciousness. Its job is
actually to ‘refuse’ to enter consciousness.
The Nirmanakayas on the atmic plane represent the
planetary bridge between Hierarchy and Shamballa, just
as the NGWS represent the bridge between Hierarchy
and Humanity. It is via the NGWS that the energy of
unconscious resistance within the three worlds of the planet
can be met with its counterpart—the immoveable energy of
planetary purpose contacted via the Nirmanakayas.
It is important to remember that no amount of
determination, education, understanding, mediation or
discussion can shift the lower energies of resistance. They
are impervious to consciousness. Similarly no amount of
meditation or contemplation can reach the higher energies
directly. They are beyond the ‘ken’ of the soul. Humans
who are conscious as souls (between the Second and
Fourth Initiations) can at best serve as conduits or channels
between the higher and lower energies which they are
unable to control.

285
(...continued 08 December 2004)
In every fall of identity from a higher state to a lower
or more concentrated one there is that which falls, that which
refuses to fall and the relating principle between the two. Another
way of putting it is: that which identifies with the subject, that
which identifies with the object and that which relates the two.
The seer, the seen and the seeing—these are all functions of
consciousness and represent the basic three-fold division of spirit,
matter, soul. There is that which lies above them however, as
well as that which lies beneath them. A singularity where seer,
seeing and seen are one. This is very difficult to explain in the
realm of consciousness because consciousness is dual. To get
close to the idea, one could speak of animal and spiritual instinct
which both involve ‘direct action’ without any intervening ‘self
consciousness or analysis’. An impulse occurs and action results
without ‘thought’. When the cosmic physical plane has been fully
solarised or imbued with consciousness, then action on this lower
plane will be automatically carried forward in direct response to
the impulses of Shamballa, which in turn originate from higher
cosmic planes. As the knee jerks in reflex to the striking of the
doctor’s rubber mallet so life on the physical plane will one day
respond to Shamballa.
One can consider this in the life of the disciple: A
spiritual impulse arrives in consciousness—on the lower turn of
the spiral from the soul or on a higher turn of the spiral from
the monad, the One. Does it flow through into immediate
and instinctual action? Or is it weighed and balanced within
the consciousness? Does the disciple consider what the
consequences of any action might be—to himself and others?
You can see how this process progresses. The spiritual path
begins through the development of self consciousness via
individualisation. A ‘self ’ is needed to reflect upon itself and its

286
internal and external environment. A ‘self ’ is needed to learn
to master the impulsive instinctual activity of the lower self
and begin to develop and express a more conscious loving and
spiritual approach to living. Eventually this ‘self ’—even the
‘higher self ’—becomes an impediment to further development
however, because of the very duality that is inherent in
all consciousness. There is consequently a separation and
a translation that occurs between monadic impulse and
personality expression. This separation or ‘delay’ in transmission
can only be eliminated by the abstraction of the intermediary,
the soul—or in an earlier cycle, the personal identity.
At the present stage of evolution on the planet the aim
is to relate the three major centres—Shamballa, Hierarchy and
Humanity—to one another and to ensure a free circulation of
energy in both directions around this triangle. One day there
will not be three separate energies however but One—one
expression of divinity upon the cosmic physical plane. The
higher and lower instinctual ‘life’ impulses are seen as opposite
by the three-fold soul expressing through the triad, and the
work of the soul or consciousness principle is to choose the
higher over the lower. The result of this choice by the soul
is the rebalancing of a prior imbalance. The incarnated soul
has already chosen the lower over the higher—this is how it
became incarnate in the first place—and thus by choosing
the reverse it ‘at-ones’. The fact that the soul must choose
the higher over the lower however does not make the higher
‘inherently’ more valuable. Value is a function of consciousness
and relativity. Life IS. And Life IS ONE. The higher and lower
expression are not inherently separate. Indeed there is that
to be found within both the higher and the lower as well as
within the soul which chooses between them that is essentially
identical. When that identical ‘something’ is experienced then
the transition from consciousness to Life begins to take place.

287
27 December 2004
CAPRICORN full Moon
The One Life
There is that which lies at the core of the soul and at
the core of the personality which is the same. This energy
is Life. It is not differentiated ‘life’ but the One Life. This
realisation ‘at-ones’ the soul and the personality because
there is no inherent separation. They are like identical
twins dressed in different clothes except that they are not
twins but only ‘one’. This realisation lies at the heart of
the transfiguration—all outer forms including those in
consciousness are transfigured before the identifying ‘eye’
of the initiate. All is realised as one—one great fire that is
Life. This may be stated over and over but its realisation
is another matter. This realisation has simultaneous effects
on both the consciousness of the initiate and his brain—an
antahkarana of fire is registered from the highest formless
world to the lowest world of form.
It is here that the Fifth Hierarchy, the Fifth Ray
and the ajna centre are important. You may recall that in
maps of the centres the etheric location of the ajna centre
is not given among the four etheric planes. You might like
to consider its association with the three highest subplanes
of the fifth or gaseous plane and consequently with the
agnichaitans of the physical plane. In a planetary sense at
a higher level of correspondence some idea of the role of
the NGWS as the planetary ajna centre may be obtained.
Thus when the crown and ajna centre are functioning as
a unit there is a bridge between the first subplane and
the fifth and the work of the Fifth Ray is consummated.
During the coming Seventh Ray cycle which coincides
with the Age of Aquarius this alignment is carried all the
288
way through to the seventh or physical plane, resulting in
synthesis.
This synthesis is the realisation on the physical plane
of that which lies behind all the planes. All seven planes
or states of consciousness are in essence one—the One
Life of the cosmic physical plane. When this One Life is
experienced then all lesser distinctions are realised within
context and let go of. In the case of the initiate, individual
or group, this ‘current’ of Life energy is registered tangibly
within the physical brain as well as in consciousness.
The registration within form becomes a ‘touchstone’
for accessing the current, which is why certain physical
locations in the outer world become stable anchoring
points for the fifth kingdom and is also the reason that the
Temple of Power can be eventually realised on the physical
plane. Your work as a group with Highden has been part
of this process.
So, something happens within the lowest expression
of the personality—the physical form. The energy of ‘Life’
is registered and has a more or less permanent ‘anchoring’
point. Something also happens within the soul—on its
highest level of expression, the atmic plane. This could be
described as a ‘tear’ in the veil or web. Remember that
the veils are progressively rent between the etheric levels,
which is also called the ‘burning of the web’. When it is
also remembered that the descent of the fire of spirit and
the ascent of the kundalini fire are simultaneous events and
in reality there is only one ‘fire’, then some understanding
may result. The result in consciousness (for the soul is ever
the seat of consciousness) is that the ‘compartmentalisation’
of consciousness is ended. Its division into personality, soul
and spirit is brought to an end within the awareness of the
soul. The eye in the triangle is experienced.

289
 This ending of compartmentalisation through
identification with the One Life behind consciousness and
form has its outer representation in the life experience of
the initiate. He begins by being identified with his form
and eventually with his personality as a unified functioning
whole. He gradually becomes more aware of himself as a
soul increasingly able to work through his personality and
disidentify with it. He becomes more group conscious and
begins to identify with progressively larger inner and outer
groups—his co-workers, his nation, humanity as a whole.
Eventually his identification shifts to the One Life
that is the Earth—the Life of Shamballa, the Life of Sanat
Kumara. And because Life is ONE this identification takes
him into relationship in some small way with the Life which
IS, expresses through and yet remains beyond the whole of
Kosmos. Once LIFE becomes a reality within the ‘identity’
of the initiate then lesser identifications fade. He or she may
still form an essential part of groups, organisations, nations
but their anchor will not be ‘within’ their outer group but
with the essential Life expressing through it. They become
ambassadors of the One Life and through their identification
with it which increases as the higher initiations are taken,
they induce its realisation in others. All lesser fires are
contained within the one ‘synthetic’ fire which underlies the
cosmic physical plane, and whenever this fire of synthesis is
present even in the tiniest of ‘doses’ it has a homoeopathic
effect upon its surroundings. Such workers must remain ‘free’
to follow the call of spirit when it comes. They are leaves
which are moved by the wind which “bloweth where it
listeth” (John 3:8). They must learn to respond to that inner
call, the straight knowing which flows down the fiery current
of their anchored antahkarana—and in such a way they will
widen this channel of fire. They are no longer held by group

290
affiliations, loyalties or commitments but must hold their
allegiance to something deeper that beats at the heart of all
groups. Their comings and goings will then be ‘unreasonable’
to the consciousness operating within such lesser groupings,
but this very unreasonableness will be a signpost to that
which lies beyond reason—the spiritual instinct which acts
without thought because it is not inherently separate from
the life which motivates it. There is in fact no separate
identity to ‘think’ about what ‘it’ should do.
The work of this ‘outer group’ is coming to an end
and yet at the same time it is only now beginning. A
School is a field of training, a nursery in which things
can be tried out within a safe environment and the
consequences of actions contained. A School is preparation
for living. Shamballa School could be said to be preparation
for LIFE. A container is breaking, but you were never that
container. Shamballa School is not an outer organisation or
group. It is present when two criteria are fulfilled:
1. Life is present (which it is everywhere and when on the
cosmic physical plane).
2. The presence of that Life is ‘realised in consciousness’.
If you are able to hold, even intermittently, the
realisation of that Life in whatever circumstances you find
yourselves called to, then Shamballa School will be in
session. As individuals you do not need to be together, nor
do you need to be apart, for there is no separation possible
in Life.
This series of training in group initiation has not
been a theoretical process. It has gone hand in hand with
your own self-initiated work in the three worlds. An
initiate knows because he works and a group initiate does
likewise. Whatever identification with the Life aspect you
291
have achieved has not been the result of my words—my
words have been a living response, a bridge called forth by
your energetic demand for Life generated from your call
and commitment to service. A bridge over which energy
can move in both directions. I call you now to serve as
such a bridge between the energy of Life and the calls of
other groups. You will find your own living response to
the tension generated and clothe the essential lesson of
identification with the One Life in many outer garments
of consciousness. Teaching is not about giving theoretical
information. If that were enough then one messenger
from Hierarchy would be all that was required. It is an
experiential process which must be entered into again and
again with larger and larger groups. It is a relationship
founded upon the realisation that there is no need for
relationship between things that are not essentially separate
from each other. It is the brotherhood of the Aquarian Age
in living demonstration.
Let Life prevail!

292
18 January 2005
Aquarius Full Moon
NGWS Invocation to the Life Principle
I have told you that this third phase of work has
had to do with the precipitation of one thin strand of
antahkarana from the first to the seventh plane. This work
has been undertaken in conjunction with many other
groups throughout the planet and also has had to do with
the empowerment of the NGWS from both a material
and a spiritual perspective. Now that the events of the
last month have unfolded it might be useful to give a
perspective of the planetary process from the inner realms.
The outer events precipitated at the time of the Capricorn
full Moon form a small part in the initiation process of that
entity which we call ‘Humanity’. Humanity is the world disciple,
consciously undergoing self-initiated tests upon the path of
discipleship. As with the individual disciple there are forces
within the consciousness of humanity that are aligned with the
soul and also those which are aligned with the personality. These
dualistic forces create lines of demarcation and the tension which
produces crisis and opportunities for choice.
A major cleavage was present in the fourth round
at the time of Atlantis, predominantly felt within the
astral body of humanity. In the next round there will be a
culminating cleavage in the mental body. Lesser cycles play
out within each rootrace, and so in this—the fifth—there
is a mental focus within the overall context of the fourth
round.
In order for you to understand what it is that I am
trying to convey, you will have to overcome an inherent astral
reaction that rebels at sharing in the responsibility for the loss
of life that is consequential in the activity of the First Ray. You
293
will also need to make a clear distinction between blame and
responsibility.
Put simply, the earthquake and the resultant tsunami
at the time of the Capricorn full Moon was the result of the
invocative appeal by advanced humanity, specifically the
NGWS, for more Life. This call for Life was consciously
invoked by humanity. At the time of the War in Atlantis
no such invocation by humanity was possible because
the antahkarana on the mental plane had yet to become
operational. Hierarchy was forced to intervene, with the result
being the Great Flood. At the time of the Second World War
there was invocative appeal by humanity, but this appeal was
greatly aided and strengthened by Hierarchy itself who were
actively and influentially involved in the outcome of the War.
What makes the current situation unique is that
Hierarchy, as part of allowing Humanity more exercise,
rightfully earned, of the principle of freedom and free will
have intentionally limited their involvement in the affairs
of humanity since the Shamballic Impact of 2000. This
limitation concerns the active initiation of new activities from
within Hierarchy and the focus on response to those activities
initiated by humanity that are in line with the Plan and for
which aid is invoked.
Humanity is developing the capacity to generate tension
within itself as a centre—tension which produces crisis and
the opportunity for spiritual growth that the path of initiation
presents. We expect this tension and crisis to continue prior
to the incoming Fourth Ray in 2025. Just as in the life of
the individual disciple, outer events may seem particularly
challenging and yet seen from the perspective of the soul, great
progress is made. Forget not that large numbers of the human
family were able to step on to the path of initiation during the
Second World War.

294
 Consider this passage from the Scorpio transmission just
prior to the US Election:
Will humanity go ahead and exercise its freedom by
choosing that which it already knows—those tried and
true practices and behaviours that it has tested out for
millennia? Or will it pause, experiencing the limitations
of its own accumulated intelligence generated through
long activity and ask—nay demand—a change? When
this demand rises to a point of invocation, that which can
effect such a change must come forth under Law. This is
the dilemma—that which can effect a change is not present
within the sphere of humanity’s experience. To open for its
inflow requires the admittance of the fact that humanity left
to its own devices cannot solve its essential problems alone.
This is a vulnerable place—the admittance of inherent
inadequacy to face the challenges it confronts. However it
is only in this admittance, this vulnerability, that a doorway
opens to receive that which is new, that which can change
everything in one flash of time. This ‘something other’ is
the inheritance of humanity, held for it in the Council
Chamber awaiting humanity’s coming of age. It is the
essential divinity that lies at the core of the personality
but is unrecognised in consciousness. Its recognition
requires a surrender of that which is known and proven but
limited—the survival mechanisms of personality developed
over a long evolutionary process. If that surrender occurs
it is immediately met with the revelation of a higher
principle lying hidden within. This principle, because it
lies outside the space and time of the personality, creates
by its entrance new space and time in which something
completely different to the conventional wisdom can
occur. It is literally the beginning of the re-creation of
heaven and earth—a re-creation in consciousness. All is
295
 made new because the old is surrendered. Can humanity
surrender the old? Will America let go and let God work
his wonder through her? Will there be sufficient tension
in this moment in space and time which will allow that
which lies outside space and time to enter? We await in
active peace and positivity.41
The mental cleavage within the American nation
during both of the last two elections has been pronounced.
Within humanity many of the issues have been divisive and
decisive. From Hierarchy’s perspective the dominance of one
set of ideologies over the other is less important than the
point of tension achieved when they are balanced against
each other. Balanced forces provide the space for the action
of a higher unifying energy which comes when both ‘sides’
are brought to their knees. Observers of human struggles
have often commented that when both sides claim the
support and guidance of ‘God’ they cannot both be right—
but in fact they can. Hierarchical agendas are as different
from those of humanity as the agendas of the soul are from
the personality. It is only when soul infusion is complete
that these agendas are reconciled. When the personality
enters the stage of conscious discipleship one of the main
agendas of the soul becomes the accelerated education of
the personality. This is achieved by allowing the personality
greater access to the karmic consequences of its choices and
assisting in its intelligent meeting of those consequences.
The NGWS has become a potent centre of force
within the field of humanity. It forms the conscious link
between humanity and Hierarchy and thus experiences the
full tension between soul and personality agendas. Within the
main body of humanity decisions are largely made either as
if there were no outside agency of assistance and guidance, or
if there is then its main purpose is to respond to humanity.
296
 Members of the NGWS are aware not only of the
existence and participation of the inner worlds but also
that there is a Plan and a Purpose therein to be found that
humanity must gradually discover and learn how to align with.
They are no longer solely human-centric but are yet to be
totally Hierarchy-centric and therein lies their tension.
What Humanity as the partially solarised personality
lacks is the commeasured realisation of its own importance
in the larger scheme of things. It can be as arrogant and
self focused in its determination to ‘save the world’ as it
is in its determination to ‘exploit the world’. Aspiration is
spiritually more advanced than greed and yet both are desire
driven and both lack the humility of the realisation that
there is a Purpose and also a Plan for the world that lies
beyond their knowledge and capacity to implement alone.
At the time of the Scorpio full Moon a united
invocation arose from the centre we call the NGWS—the
ajna centre of the planetary being. This invocation was to
the Life principle held in Shamballa and arose out of the
experience of disempowerment and impotency that many
servers and serving groups were experiencing in their outer
efforts to see soul principles and values prevail regardless of
which side of the political spectrum they found themselves.
One of the aims that concern the larger planetary Life
is the establishment of a triangulation of the three centres
Shamballa, Hierarchy and Humanity—a triangulation that
involves the circulation of energy in both directions. Since
the time of the Second World War a direct connection
has been established between Shamballa and Humanity,
but this connection has been one way only—the impact
of Shamballic energies upon Humanity. The last significant
impact was in the year 2000, beginning the latest cycle
of the activity of the first centre. Humanity has become

297
sensitive enough to this energy and in some cases educated
enough to understand the Love which underlies the often
destructive consequences of its impact. Consequently
the NGWS, being able to register this line of energy in
consciousness, has also developed the capacity to ‘demand’
it or invoke it. Such an invocation was made this year and
despite the tragic consequences to many on the physical
plane this development is seen as a highly significant one
for humanity and indeed the planet as a whole.
This brings us to the moral question implicit in this
explanation. If the NGWS was invocatively responsible for
the inflow of First Ray energy into the three worlds with
the resultant large scale loss of human life, are they also
responsible for those consequences? Let me answer this
question from a number of angles:
1. The invocation was the combined result of the call from
incarnated souls to the Life principle. No individuals or
groups on their own are capable of such an invocation—it
required a massed intent. Therefore the responsibility is shared
throughout the NGWS.
2. The NGWS as a group could have no way of knowing
at the time of their invocation what the consequences
within the three worlds would be. Those consequences are
largely dependent upon the prior karmic actions of the
whole of humanity and the degree of alignment between
the Purpose, held in the Council Chamber, and the current
expression of the Plan in the three worlds. Therefore the
responsibility for the consequences is shared with the whole
of humanity.
3. Invoking power is one part of an electrical equation
that requires also a source of that power (Shamballa) and
a medium for it to travel through (Hierarchy). Both these
298
centres have a wider view of the whole than humanity
and therefore the responsibility is shared by the whole
chain of Being.
To sum up then: The NGWS consciously shares in
the responsibility for the consequences of its actions and the
actions of all. Humanity also shares responsibility, but the
difference is that it does not recognise this consciously. It
sees such activity as an ‘act of God’ and remains distant and
vulnerable in the face of it. The NGWS are that portion of
Humanity who are accepting responsibility for being part of
these ‘acts of God’ and becoming active participants in the
co-creation of the Plan on Earth. In this way Humanity will
gradually take its place as a divine and consciously operating
centre within the triad.
Let me here interpolate a quote from The
Externalisation of the Hierarchy:
Some of the available inflowing Shamballa forces are
being absorbed directly by humanity and by certain of the
subhuman kingdoms, particularly the mineral kingdom.
This latter absorption will lead eventually, when complete,
to those volcanic episodes and those basic earthquakes
which will change the face of the earth by the time the
sixth rootrace comes into manifestation. It is this direct
inflow to the kingdoms functioning exoterically in the
three worlds which has relieved and will to some extent
relieve the otherwise overpowering pressure upon the
Hierarchy, and will also act as a great aligning antahkarana
between the three planetary centres.42
Soul energy under the impress of the monad is
driven into the three worlds. This is part of a planetary
transfiguring process which will take place gradually through
coming cycles. At the First Initiation these energies have
299
their primary effect upon the physical body. By the time the
Third Initiation is reached their effects are primarily felt in
the causal body and the mind where the personality life is
synthesised.
Humanity is undergoing the First Initiation and
consequently a purification and reorientation is required
upon the physical plane with its consequent reorganisation
of money under the Seventh Ray influence. The more that
the Shamballic energies are able to be absorbed by and
have their effect upon consciousness, the less they impact
the physical plane. This can be witnessed in the life of the
disciple where it can happen that physical illness occurs as
a result of the increased inflow of soul energy. Sometimes
changes in consciousness result in the remission of the
illness and the minimising of the physical effects.
Thus in sharing responsibility for the tsunami disaster
it could be said that it was inevitable that Shamballic forces
will affect the physical plane at this stage of planetary
evolution and therefore humanity had little influence. The
results of the inflow however could have been better or
worse (from the perspective of tragic consequences on the
physical plane) depending on whether or not humanity
was more or less able to absorb the energies in the
transformation of consciousness. Also it could be said that
the way in which humanity reacts to the inflow will have
a significant effect on whether or not more disasters of an
equal or greater magnitude occur.
In examining the significance of the inflow of Shamballic
force on the Capricorn full Moon we must look therefore at
the form of the outer event as well as its inner significance
and the results in consciousness that have occurred as a
consequence. Technically the event is caused by an alignment
of fire along the cosmic and planetary antahkarana. This

300
alignment can be followed from Agni on the cosmic mental
plane, through Shamballa on the cosmic physical plane, to
the agnishvattas on the mental plane, to the agnichaitans of
the inner furnaces. The result of this ‘calling down of fire’
along the antahkarana is a momentary activation of kundalini,
with consequences upon all the planes as its energy rises back
to the source of its activation. Some day the occurrence of
earthquakes along with other so-called ‘natural disasters’ and
the location in which they take place will be understood with
reference to the evolution of the consciousness of the planet as
a whole including all its kingdoms.
Limiting our analysis to the human kingdom for the
current purposes, we see that the quake occurred in a region
that had major impact upon the population of a variety of
nations in the developing world. The form the devastation
took was that of a wave or tsunami, placing the attention
through resonance upon the astral plane. Again let me refer to
information given in The Externalisation of The Hierarchy:
The cleavage between the two groups (the one expressing
the forces of materialism and the other the energy of
light) grew gradually wider until towards the close of the
Atlantean Age it was so wide, and the lines of demarcation
between the two schools of life and thought were so clear,
that a crisis was precipitated in the then civilised world
of which the present conflict is a definite effect. Let us
also hope that it constitutes a climax which will never
again occur. Then took place the great war between the
Lords of Form and the Lords of Being, or between the
Forces of Matter and the Great White Lodge. …The
Forces of Light triumphed because the Hierarchy was
forced to intervene potently, and, with the aid of certain
great Lives extraneous to our planetary life, They brought
the Atlantean civilisation to an abrupt end after a long
301
 period of chaos and disaster. This took place through
the medium of a culminating catastrophe which wiped
hundreds of thousands of human beings off the face of
the earth. This historical event has been preserved for
us in the universal legend of the great flood.43
Within the collective unconscious of humanity the
great flood at the time of Atlantis still carries enormous
potency as a warning to the race of the consequences of
materiality. Images of the surging wave carried into homes
all over the world have resulted in a number of significant
effects within the consciousness of the race en masse:
1. An acute reminder of the vulnerability of the human
being within the greater Life in which it lives. The result
is a commeasuring, at least for a time, of what is more
important and what is less important in human life. A
consequence of this reminder is the direction of mass
attention to spiritual realms as the limits of human
understanding are reached.
2. A great upwelling of compassion as a result of ‘identification’
with the circumstances in which others find themselves. This
upwelling occurs through the clearing house of the solar plexus
and activates the heart.
3. The spontaneous release of large quantities of money—
physical plane resources—in response to the sudden
dramatic presentation of need. These funds are flowing into
the hands of many of the groups in the NGWS involved in
practical assistance and thereby empowering them.
4. Cooperation between world leaders and between worldwide
organisations that is needed to coordinate a synthetic
response to the crisis.

302
 The disaster has touched a nerve within the human
family and shown that a reorientation in values is very close
to the surface, needing but the presentation of a crisis to
activate it. Indeed Humanity has called forth this crisis as a
way of growing and changing. Just as the individual takes
time to understand the crises presented by the soul once it
consciously embarks upon the path, so Humanity is seeking
to understand and react positively to its crises.
The time of precipitated crises is over for the disciple
when he learns to consciously choose values and actions in
line with the soul’s plan. From then on crises are self-initiated
points of tension consciously undertaken. Thus it is for the
world disciple, stunned in the face of such a world crisis but
also semi-consciously aware that it is an opportunity to redirect
his consciousness from issues of conflict and control, balancing
them with the compassion and cooperation demanded by
presented events.
Invocation to the energies of Life always brings forth
change, often sudden change which may also involve the
loss of that which is held dear. As advanced members of
humanity begin to form a positive relationship with the
energy of will and power then they must learn to accept
and share in greater and greater responsibility. Prior to the
Second Initiation this is not possible for the disciple because
the astral body is still largely in control and seeks that which
is pleasing—an emotional peace which is too vigorously
disturbed by direct confrontation with the energy of Life and
the part in which death plays in the evolutionary process.
He leaves such things to generals and politicians who, if they
are disciples, are acutely aware of the responsibility of the
decisions they make and open their hearts to the necessary
and consequent suffering that occurs along with all accelerated
movement forward at the current stage of evolution on Earth.

303
 Humanity has demanded “entrance of that which
can effect a change”.44 By definition they cannot know the
consequences of that invocation. Its lower expression can be
seen in the sudden experience of the tsunami—for millions
of people, lives were radically changed by one wall of water.
The higher expression is the experience of being ‘drenched’
by the waters of Life. Something changes in the inner
depths of consciousness and nothing is as it was before. The
world is changed because the eyes and the ‘I’s that view
the world are changed. This is the experience of initiation,
and some contemplation may reveal what a planet wide
initiation may involve.
As the Aquarian full Moon approaches with its
message of service to the race it is to the disciples and
initiates that the call goes forth. They are the carriers in
the three worlds of the ‘waters of Life’. It is they who can
reach through into the unfettered positivity that lies at
the heart of the Life principle. It is they who are able to
face death and disaster without becoming overwhelmed
by it. Humanity is entering a pronounced period of self-
initiated testing—and I am here referring to the next
twenty years. It is ready for such a testing and it will lead
to the externalisation of the Hierarchy. In order for this to
occur Humanity must first reveal to itself the deeper values
and principles that lie at its core. This will also entail the
revelation of those who are able to embody and express
those principles, under tension, and thus will disciples and
initiates move into positions of greater influence within
human society. None of this can occur without pressure.
Be prepared for the pressure to increase. It is for just such
a time of testing that discipleship training was initiated.
It was to assist humanity in this time of the global
‘forerunner’ that many of you chose to incarnate.

304
 The NGWS has become a potent player in world
affairs. It has achieved this potency not through outer
influence but through its inner connection to the realities of
divinity. It can become a more and more effective conduit
for the waters of Life if it continues to make demand along
this vertical channel. This demand is strengthened by the
realisation and affirmation of the location of true planetary
power in the face of the seemingly intractable expression of
temporal power by those forces which currently control the
planetary centre Humanity.
The tsunami crisis will pass, and with the point
of tension over things may appear to return to normal.
Channels have been opened however—in the planetary
antahkarana, in the planetary financial and political systems,
in the human heart—that will be more easily accessible
at future points of tension—and these there will be in
greater and greater frequency. Whether or not they result in
dramatic outer crises depends upon the way in which they
are handled and the lessons learned.
In offering this perspective I appeal to all servers to
view the tsunami disaster in the same way Noah viewed
the first sign of rain and to redouble your efforts in
building the Ark of service to the new world and the new
subrace. The key to this is the capacity to go beyond mind
through intuition into the operation of spiritual instinct.
At times of crisis—and we are entering into a prolonged
planetary crisis—there is no time for thought. Action must
be instinctive. Whether that action stems from the lower
or higher instincts is the test in which Humanity and the
NGWS are inexorably engaged.
When the winds of change die down, when the flood
waters recede, when the crisis is over, we see what is left
standing amongst the rubble and those trees, those buildings,

305
those people and those organisations which remain become
the foundational pillars in the new temple. Always there
is another garden, for Life cannot be destroyed and this is
the promise of that centre which lies on the far side of the
seven rayed bridge of Light.

306
24 February 2005
Pisces Full Moon
Sacrifice
In closing this series of instructions I would like to
bring your attention to the keynote of sacrifice. Sacrifice
rules the transition of identity from one level to another.
It is sacrifice that allowed the solar angels to descend and
dedicate themselves to human salvage. It is also sacrifice that
allows the release of a lower identification for a higher one.
Sacrifice is thus associated with the vertical dimension of
existence.
The ‘Returning Nirvanas’, the ‘Five Kumaras’,
‘Makara’—these are all names for that five-fold entity that
is our essential selves, descending from the cosmic astral
plane and informing the cosmic physical. This sentiency
is both a vehicle for more subtle cosmic energies as well
as the driver of the dense physical via the cosmic ethers.
This cosmic astral energy is five-fold in essence—being
developed in the last system—and three-fold in expression.
That expression in the case of humanity is via the
monad, soul and personality. When these three energies
are balanced then that which expresses through them is
revealed and the Higher Way, the pathway to the cosmic
astral plane and beyond, stands open.
Revelation allows that which is hidden at the core to
be revealed. The soul lies at the core of the personality, the
monad lies at the core of the soul. Revelation of a greater
principle to the indwelling entity sets up the possibility of
sacrifice. The identification with the lower must first be
sacrificed or given up, allowing for the identity to shift to
the higher. Then the ‘enjoyment’ of the higher sphere can
be temporarily sacrificed in time and space in order to
307
become a messenger or ambassador of the higher within
the lower. Sacrifice thus creates a bridge between levels of
identity and it is the creation of this living antahkarana
that allows for the free flow of energy and identity between
planes.
Within the cosmic physical plane the twin spans of the
antahkarana concern the bridge between personality/soul and
soul/monad. As you know the centres associated with that
bridge are the NGWS and the Nirmanakayas. The planetary
energies most associated with this bridge are that of Venus and
Mercury. Mercury provides through revelation of the heights,
the opportunity to transfer identity and sacrifice the lower for
the higher. Venus provides through sentient response to the
needs of the whole, the opportunity to act as a distributor of
the higher within the lower.
Mercury sets us free. Venus encourages us to willingly
circumscribe that freedom out of love. Some idea of the
role of Sanat Kumara, the Great Sacrifice, in the fourth or
Earth scheme may be gained by contemplating this duality.
The keynote of Pisces—”I leave the Father’s home
and turning back, I save”45—is most closely allied to the
functioning of Venus in the dual work of the antahkarana,
which is why Venus is exalted in Pisces and Mercury ‘falls’.
Esoterically, the reason that Venus is exalted in Pisces
is connected with the relation of Pisces to the sign
Gemini, of which Venus is the esoteric ruler, and also
in relation to the fact that Venus is the Earth’s alter
ego and is closely related to the human kingdom. This
subject is too vast and complicated to be elaborated
here, but the point should be remembered. The Fishes
in Pisces are bound together, as we have seen, and this
is a symbol of the captivity of the soul in form, prior
to the experience upon the Fixed Cross. The Twins in
308
Gemini are symbols of the same basic duality, but the
experience of the many changing incarnations has done
its work, and the Band (uniting the two fishes) is in
process of dissolution, for part of the work of Pluto is
to “cut the thread which binds the two opposing lives
together.” It is the task of Venus to “reunite the severed
lives but with no binding thread.” Therefore, Venus is
exalted in Pisces and at the end of the greater cycle, the
Sons of God who are the Sons of Mind are raised up
into glory through experience and crucifixion because
they have learned to love and truly reason.46
Therefore, when we find that the power of Mercury is
lessened in Pisces and that it finally “falls” in that sign,
what is the esoteric and spiritual meaning? Simply, that
after the stage of initiation in Capricorn, as the result of
the reversal of the wheel and the consequent experiences,
and after the triumph of Scorpio, the power of the
mind lessens steadily till finally (like other aspects of
form life in the three worlds) it comes to an end and
its meaning and illuminating aspects between soul and
physical brain are no longer required. The man, coming
definitely into full soul consciousness, requires now no
mediator but deals directly himself with his emanating
source. Mercury is then met with again under another
name, this time as the Sun, mediating between the higher
aspects—soul and spirit—for Mercury and the Sun are
One. Through Mercury, the mind is illumined and
relation is established between personality and the soul. As
Mercury, the Sun—the mediator—shifts to a still higher
plane and is no longer mediator between two different
stages in consciousness but between life and consciousness
itself; this is a very different matter and effects the higher
understanding. This will necessarily be incomprehensible
309
 to you at present for it is not a mediatorship between
differences but a fusion of what is already related. Are
you any the wiser for that statement? 47
A couple of points can here be clarified. Venus is
the Hierarchical ruler of Capricorn and stands for the full
embodiment of the soul in form at the Third Degree. The
free dedication of the soul to embodiment cannot take
place as long as there are karmic threads tying it to the
three worlds. Saturn must be superseded, karma must end
before the willing sacrifice of the higher to the lower can
take place using the Second or Love Aspect as the basis of
relationship instead of the Third Aspect. The soul cannot
fully be present unless it is free to not be present.
Similarly, Mercury is the Hierarchical ruler of Scorpio
and stands for the liberation of the soul. This freedom
cannot occur until the desire for freedom from existence
in the three worlds is outgrown. Mars must be superseded,
desire must end, before liberation from the wheel of rebirth
can take place and the identity shift from the Third to
Second Aspect.
Pisces and Taurus are related in a similar way to
Scorpio and Capricorn and indeed the four signs form with
a fifth—that of Leo—an interesting five-pointed star. By
means of this pentagram the third and fifth subplanes of
the cosmic astral plane are brought into relationship with
the fourth and fifth subplanes of the cosmic physical plane
via the Leo Hierarchy on the first subplane of the cosmic
physical. More than this I cannot say, but the intuition will
reveal that which is relevant to the spiritual development of
the reader.
Four signs have a dual rulership—Taurus, Scorpio,
Capricorn and Pisces. One sign has a triple rulership—Leo.
They can be placed in a geometrical relationship called
310
‘the Sun upon the square’ as follows: You will recognise
this formation as having relationship to Formula Four.48
There are six synthetic triangles created in this formation,
if the diagonals are included, each having the Sun as their
synthetic point or apex:
Vulcan, Mercury, Sun
Vulcan, Venus, Sun
Vulcan, Pluto, Sun
Mercury, Pluto, Sun
Mercury, Venus, Sun
Venus, Pluto, Sun
The seventh synthetic triangle is created out of the
three aspects of the Sun itself.
Taurus Scorpio
Vulcan Mercury

Leo

The Sun

Venus Pluto
Capricorn Pisces

There is also a relationship to the Law of the

Lower Four.49 Vulcan/Pluto represent a duality of the Life
aspect just as Mercury/Venus represent a duality in the
consciousness aspect. The Sun links Life and consciousness
through the formula ‘Vulcan (Pluto), Mercury (Venus) and
the SUN are One’.

311
 With regard to the astrological signs you will note
that there are two water signs and two earth signs brought
into relationship through the agency of fire or the sign Leo.
This is symbolic of the relating and synthetic operation of
cosmic astral and physical planes under the direction of the
fire of mind emanating from the cosmic mental plane. This
fire originates from the causal body of the Planetary Logos
on the third subplane of the cosmic mental. It operates in a
dual fashion on the third and fifth subplanes of the cosmic
astral and this duality becomes the human being (Mercury/
Venus or the Fourth and Fifth Hierarchies) on the buddhic
and mental planes of the cosmic physical. The Will of the
Logos is thus made known to the farthest reaches of his
manifestation.
Let us return then to the relevance that these
thoughts have to the series of transmissions which are
concluding. The whole subject of group initiation deals with
the journey through consciousness or the Second Aspect
from the individual via the group to the universal. The first
series related therefore to your individuality ‘as a group’
and the specific purpose that brought you together. In the
second series your relationship as a group to other groups
was the focus and in this final series the emphasis is upon
the planetary life as a whole. The planetary life is itself an
‘individuality’ within a larger group and so on up until the
great cosmic Life that ensouls the universe. An initiation
is in reality a transition of identity—the movement of
the polarisation of the centre of ‘self ’ from one plane to
another, from one Aspect to another.
At the First Initiation the identity is freed from
the body. At the Third it is freed from the lower three
subplanes (the body of the Logos). At the Fifth it is freed
from the triad and at the Seventh it is freed from the three-

312
fold entity of monad/soul/personality. Freedom is followed
by willing sacrifice. So for example the Third Initiation
frees the identity from the three worlds, but the freed
identity (now triadal) acts as a boddhisattva in service to
the three worlds during the period between the next two
initiations. At the Fifth Initiation the identity becomes a
buddha and yet continues to serve the five worlds until the
Seventh, and so forth. At the Seventh Initiation there is
the demonstration of synthesis upon all the planes, which
is why the Externalisation process is in many ways a by-
product of a much larger process of synthesis that involves
the cosmic planes. At the Ninth Initiation all contact with
the cosmic physical plane is repudiated.
These Mercury transmissions on group initiation have
been intended to lay a framework that works to:
• Decentralise the consciousness of the group individual
in a series of steps leading to identification with the
planetary Life.
• Accelerate the fusion of consciousness through the primary
appeal to the Life or First Aspect.
• Educate this and future groups as a by-product of
carrying forward an actual piece of the Plan.
• Lay the emphasis upon the energy of synthesis and the
transmission of Light Supernal that lies behind the
dissemination of information.
• Give more information on the workings of the higher
antahkarana between consciousness and Life,
Hierarchy and Shamballa.
• Arouse interest and inquiry in regard to what lies behind
the synthetic functioning of the triangles Shamballa/
Hierarchy/Humanity or in the individual case monad/
soul/personality.

313
 Mercury is a messenger, an intermediary, a transmitter
of energy from higher spheres into the lower with the aim
of producing illumination, revelation and liberation. As with
all intermediaries—like the soul itself—its function is not
permanent but temporary. The soul is a vessel, a sheath of
flame, in which the spark of essential divinity can pass from
the heights to the depths and back again. In this system we
are lifted and aided from above and then we each become
in turn, messengers and lifters for others. Indeed there is
only One. This truth as monad we experience, as soul we
work out in consciousness, as personality we demonstrate in
action.
On cosmic planes the Kumaras are the soul principle
within the Logoic personality. They are the sheaths of
flaming desire that allow the life, love and activity of the
Cosmos to penetrate and work out on the dense physical
plane through the life, love and activity of the human
monad. Essentially they are us, we are they.
At your own level of evolution my earnest wish
for you is that you are lifted free of mind, that your
identification in consciousness with the One Life becomes
unshakeable and that in your own sphere you pour this
energy of Life, of Light Supernal, through the flaming
sheath of the triad into the three worlds. Liberated to a
degree yourselves, turn your gaze in service and salvage to
the race. Turn your backs on Light Supernal and become a
conduit for it. Allow Mercury to ‘fall’ and Venus to rise in
your work for Hierarchy until I call you once again to the
heights.

314
Endnotes

Part One
1. Alice A. Bailey, The Rays and the Initiations, Lucis Publishing
Company, New York, 1960, p.148.
2. Bailey, Telepathy and the Etheric Vehicle, Lucis Publishing
Company, New York, 1950, pp.135–7.
3. Bailey, The Rays and the Initiations, p.215.
4. Bailey, Discipleship in the New Age, vol.2, Lucis Publishing
Company, New York, 1955, p.245.
5. Bailey, A Treatise on Cosmic Fire, Lucis Trust Publishing
Company, New York, 1925, p.1199.
6. Bailey, A Treatise on Cosmic Fire, pp.1118–9.
7. Bailey, A Treatise on Cosmic Fire, p.125.
8. See transmission 11 September 2002.
9. Bailey, The Rays and the Initiations, pp.181–2.
10. Bailey, Esoteric Psychology, vol.2, Lucis Publishing Company,
New York, 1942, pp.375–6.
11. Bailey, Esoteric Psychology, vol.2, p.376.
12. Bailey, A Treatise on Cosmic Fire, p.125.
13. Bailey, Esoteric Astrology, Lucis Publishing Company, New
York, 1951, p.333.
14. Bailey, The Rays and the Initiations, p.517.
15. Bailey, The Rays and the Initiations, p.516.

Part Two
16. Bailey, Discipleship in the New Age, vol.2, p.400.
17. Bailey, Esoteric Astrology, p.563.
18. Bailey, Esoteric Astrology, p.456.
19. Bailey, Esoteric Psychology, vol.1, Lucis Publishing Company,
New York, 1936, p.264.
20. Bailey, Discipleship in the New Age, vol.2, p.175.
21. Bailey, Discipleship in the New Age, vol.1, Lucis Trust
Publishing Company, New York, 1944, p.359.
22. Bailey, A Treatise on Cosmic Fire, pp.67–8.

315
23. Bailey, Discipleship in the New Age, vol.2, pp.376–9.
24. Bailey, Discipleship in the New Age, vol.2, p.439.
25. Bailey, The Destiny of the Nations, Lucis Trust Publishing
Company, New York, 1949, p.102.
26. Bailey, The Externalisation of the Hierarchy, Lucis Trust
Publishing Company, New York, 1957, pp.168–9.

Part Three
27. See transmission 15 October 2003.
28. Bailey, The Rays and the Initiations, p.69.
29. Bailey, Initiation Human and Solar, Lucis Trust Publishing
Company, New York, 1922, p.77.
30. Bailey, Discipleship in the New Age, vol.2, p.210.
31. Bailey, Esoteric Astrology, p.320.
32. Bailey, Esoteric Astrology, p.352.
33. Bailey, Esoteric Astrology, pp.353–4.
34. See transmission 12 May 2004.
35. Bailey, The Rays and the Initiations, p.241.
36. Bailey, A Treatise on White Magic, Lucis Trust Publishing
Company, New York, 1934, p.105.
37. See transmission 4 February 2004.
38. Bailey, A Treatise on Cosmic Fire, p.1204.
39. Bailey, A Treatise on Cosmic Fire, p.844.
40. Bailey, A Treatise on Cosmic Fire, p.700.
41. See transmission 27 October 2004.
42. Bailey, The Externalisation of the Hierarchy, p.525.
43. Bailey, The Externalisation of the Hierarchy, pp.122–3.
44. Bailey, The Rays and the Initiations, p.164.
45. Bailey, A Treatise on White Magic, p.441.
46. Bailey, Esoteric Astrology, pp.129–30.
47. Bailey, Esoteric Astrology, pp.131–2.
48. See Bailey, Discipleship in the New Age, vol.2, p.305.
49. See Bailey, Esoteric Psychology, vol.2, p.200.

316